JP2020116193A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: A game area PE has a second operation hole 34 that game balls can enter, and an ordinary electric accessory switchable to an open state capable of receiving or easily receiving game balls into the second operation hole 34 and a closed state incapable of receiving game balls into the second operation hole 34 or less easily receiving game balls than the first state. When a high-frequency support mode is completed internally, a first game round after completion of the high-frequency support mode is started at a lapse of a predetermined period. A mode of an accessory opening/closing game for the high-frequency support mode includes a specific mode in which an executable period of the accessory opening/closing game is longer than the predetermined period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a ball entering portion into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which the game ball can be received or easily received in the ball entering portion, and the game ball cannot be received or accepted in the ball entering portion. There is known one including a variable receiving means capable of switching to a difficult second state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2004-81853, A

Here, in the gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the attention of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention is
Launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launching operation,
A ball entering portion provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
An information storage unit that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number set in advance as an upper limit;
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage unit corresponds to the assignment information,
Based on the fact that the grant determination means makes the grant determination, the variable display of the design is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means is displayed. A game time control means for causing the game time to be executed in
When the determination result of the grant determination means is a result corresponding to the grant information, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to the player,
A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger, the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then the variable acceptance control is executed in which the switching control to the second state is executed at least once. Acceptance control means,
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
First control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control for establishment when the specific trigger occurs in a first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is established;
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied, it is possible to execute the variable reception control for non-establishment in which it is more difficult to receive the game ball in the ball entering portion than the variable acceptance control for establishment. Second control means,
Equipped with
In the case where the first situation is changed to the second situation, it is possible to start the first game time after the second situation is reached after a predetermined period has passed since the second situation was reached. And
When the second situation occurs during execution of the variable acceptance control for establishment, it is configured such that the variable acceptance control that is being executed can be continued even after the second situation.
The mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a specific mode in which the feasible period of the variable acceptance control is longer than the predetermined period.

According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the degree of interest in games.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view showing the configuration of the game board, (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the game times. (A) is a schematic diagram of the 2nd operating port in a closed state, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the 2nd operating port in an open state. FIG. 6A is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in the closed state, and FIG. 7B is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in the open state. (A) A vertical cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the side surface side, and (b) a vertical cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the rear surface side. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. (A) is an explanatory view of the hit/miss table for the first special drawing, and (b) is an explanatory view of the hit/miss table for the second special drawing. (A) is explanatory drawing of the big hit classification table for 1st special drawings, (b) is explanatory drawing of the big hit classification table for 2nd special drawings. (A) is an explanatory view of the small hit type table for the first special figure, (b) is an explanatory view of the small hit type table for the second special figure, and (c) is an explanatory view of the big hit type table for V big hit. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a low distribution mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a high distribution mode. (A) is an explanatory view of a universal figure acceptance/rejection table for the low frequency support mode, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a universal figure acceptance/rejection table for the high frequency support mode. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a low winning prize opening/closing game, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a high winning prize opening/closing game. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a winning process for the operating port. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is the flowchart which shows the special figure game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of special figure fluctuation display time. (A) is an explanatory view of the variable display time table A for the second special figure, (b) is an explanatory view of the variable display time table B for the second special figure, and (c) is a diagram after the end of the high-frequency support mode. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the game time of 2 special drawings, and the accessory opening and closing game of the general electric utility. It is a flow chart which shows processing for a special figure fixed display. It is the flowchart which shows the shift processing to the small hitting game state. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing processing for small hits. It is the flowchart which shows the ending processing of the small hitting game. It is a flow chart which shows V distribution setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for V winning. It is the flowchart which shows the shift processing to the big hit game state. It is the flowchart which shows the shift processing when the big hit game ends. It is a flow chart which shows processing for ending high frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the termination of a specific state. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is the flowchart which shows the general game game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a universal figure fluctuation|variation start process. It is a schematic diagram showing a general game time. It is the flowchart which shows the general game state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each opening/closing control. It is a state transition diagram showing a transition of the game state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game during the high frequency support mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the game at the time of completion|finish of a high frequency support mode, and after completion. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. It is the schematic which shows the example of a display of the special effect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the processing for special production which is executed with MPU of the production control control equipment. (A) is a flow chart showing a process of grasping the number SA of reserves that can be added, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the grasping process. It is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a special effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of special effects. It is explanatory drawing of the variable display time table B for 2nd special figures which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a winning process for the operating port. It is a flow chart which shows processing for reservation confirmation. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special effects. It is a flow chart which shows the grasp processing of the number SA of addition possible reservations. It is a flow chart which shows the update processing of the number SA of addable reservations. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of special effects. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of special effects. It is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a special effect. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special production concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows grasp processing of the remaining period. It is an explanatory view for explaining grasping processing of the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a special effect. It is a flow chart which shows processing for a special figure finalization display concerning a 5th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the variable display time table B for 2nd special figures. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. (A) is explanatory drawing of the opening classification table A for general drawings in a low frequency support mode, (b) is explanatory drawing of the opening classification table B for general drawings in a high frequency support mode. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first high-winning prize opening/closing game, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a second high-winning prize opening/closing game, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing a third high-winning prize opening/closing game. Is. It is the flowchart which shows the general game state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each opening/closing control. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure fluctuation display control process. (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of the universal figure game time effect, and (b) is a flowchart showing a universal figure variation start process. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. (A) is explanatory drawing of the variable display time table B for 2nd special figures which concerns on 6th Embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing of the open classification table for general figures in a high frequency support mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. (A) is a front view of the 1st special figure display part which concerns on 7th Embodiment, (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st special figure display part and the area|region including the front side. It is explanatory drawing of the stop result table for selecting the stop result for the jackpot of the 1st special figure. (A) is explanatory drawing of the big hit classification table for 1st special drawings, (b) is explanatory drawing of the big hit classification table for 2nd special drawings. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of special figure fluctuation display time. (A) is explanatory drawing of the variable display time table B1 for 2nd special drawings, (b) is explanatory drawing of the variable display time table B2 for 2nd special drawings. It is a flow chart which shows special figure fluctuation display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for a special figure fluctuation start. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop result stopped and displayed on the 1st special figure display part, and the stop result of the symbol sequence stopped and displayed by the symbol display device. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop result that is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit and the variable display time table of the second special figure that is selected in the specific state, and (b) is a symbol It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop result of the symbol sequence stopped and displayed by the display device, and the variable display time table of the second special figure selected in the specific state. It is a figure which shows another example of a normal electric utility product.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in a developed manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions being the support side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions being a support side. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right side portions being a support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its pivoting front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

The front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 is provided with a window portion 61 that allows substantially the entire game area described below to be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent.

Around the window 61, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display light emitting portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as a part of the various lamp portions. In addition, speaker units 64 are provided on the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63 to output sound effects and the like according to the game situation.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 71.

A firing handle 60 is provided to the right of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the firing handle 60, a game ball is fired toward the game area PE from the game ball firing mechanism 53 provided in the inner frame 13 below the game area PE. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 60, the firing intensity of the game ball, which is fired toward the game area PE, that is, the momentum of the firing is changed. In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the firing handle 60 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 53 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PE in 0.6 sec. It

The game area PE is formed on the game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. The configuration of the game board 24 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PE, and are partitioned by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52. The game area PE is thus formed. In addition, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 constitute a guide rail 54 for the game ball to the game area PE, and the game is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53 by the player rotating the launch handle 60. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail 54.

The guide rail 54 is formed such that its outlet portion is directed to the upper center of the game area PE on one side of the game area PE. Therefore, as the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area PE is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 54 is formed to the opposite side thereof. Shift to the side. The exit portion of the guide rail 54 is provided on the left side portion of the game area PE.

A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction due to router processing are formed in a range defined as the game area PE on the game board 24. In each opening, a general winning opening 31, a first variable winning device 32A, a second variable winning device 32B, a first operating opening (or a first starting ball entering portion) 33, a second operating opening (or a second starting ball entering). Section) 34, through gate 35, variable display unit 36, special figure display section 43 as the main display section, and general figure display section 44 as the accessory display section. A plurality of general winning openings 31 are provided.

Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. It Regarding the number of the prize balls, specifically, four payouts are executed when a ball enters the first operation port 33, and one ball is received when a ball enters the second operation port 34. Is paid out, and when a ball is inserted into the general winning opening 31, the payout of 10 prize balls is executed. In addition, when a ball has entered the first variable winning device 32A, 15 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball has entered the second variable winning device 32B, 3 prize balls have been paid out. Will be paid out.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls associated with the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls associated with the second operation port 34 may be the same, or the second operation port 34 may be used. The number of prize balls related to the number of prize balls may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operation port 33. Further, the number of prize balls related to the first variable winning device 32A may be the same as or smaller than the number of prize balls related to other actuating ports and the like. Further, the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B may have the same number of prize balls, or the latter may have a larger number of prize balls than the former.

In addition, an outlet 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning openings are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 37. Even if a game ball enters the outlet 37, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening portion, and not only the aspect in which the game area PE is discharged after passing through the opening portion, but also the game area PE after passing through the opening portion. It also includes a mode that is not discharged. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the outlet 37, the general winning opening 31, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, the first operating opening 33, The entry of the game ball into the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35 is also referred to as a prize.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral portion (center frame 36a) of the variable display unit 36 protruding toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24, there is an area where the game balls shot in the game area PE can flow down. It is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PE, an upper area PE1 which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and a lower continuous area of the upper area PE1 with respect to the upper area PE1 which is lower than the variable display unit 36. The left side area PE2, which is the left side area, and the right side area PE3, which is an area that is continuous below the upper side area PE1 and is on the right side of the variable display unit 36, and the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, respectively. On the other hand, a lower region PE4 that is a region below the variable display unit 36 that is continuous below it is partitioned.

Which of these areas PE1 to PE4 the game area flows down (passes through) is determined by the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 60, that is, the firing force of the game ball. Specifically, when the player performs the turning operation of the firing handle 60 with the turning operation amount in the first range that is equal to or more than the predetermined turning amount and is less than the reference turning amount as the first firing operation, The launched game ball is more likely to be launched leftward than the lateral center position in the upper area PE1. In this case, the game ball flows down the game area PE in the order of the upper area PE1, the left area PE2, and the lower area PE4.

On the other hand, when the player performs the turning operation of the firing handle 60 with the turning operation amount in the second range which is equal to or larger than the reference turning amount as the second firing operation, the game ball shot is in the upper area PE1. It is easier to hit to the right than the lateral center position. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PE1→the right area PE3→the lower area PE4. That is, by adjusting the amount of turning operation of the firing handle 60, whether the game ball is to be played on the left route flowing down the left side area PE2, or is the game ball being played on the right route flowing down the right side area PE3? It is possible for the player to make a selection.

The reference rotation amount is a rotation operation amount at which the rate at which the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 and the rate at which the game ball flows down the right side area PE3 are the same or substantially the same, and a predetermined rotation amount. Is the amount of turning operation that allows the launched game ball to pass through the guide rail 54 and enter the game area PE. With the turning operation amount in the first range, the rate of the game balls flowing down the left side area PE2 is high, and with the turning operation amount in the second range, the rate of the game balls flowing down the right side area PE3 is high.

The first working port 33 is installed in the lower area PE4. The first operating port 33 is open upward, and no member for opening and closing is provided. Then, in a situation where the game balls are being fired in the same manner, the winning probability to the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In addition, the first operation port 33 is arranged directly below the stage 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and is a game ball that flows into the stage 36b through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 36. The game ball discharged from the center of the stage 36b to the outside of the variable display unit 36 is likely to enter the first operating port 33. The first operating port 33 is provided with a first operating port winning sensor 33a, and the gaming sensor winning the first operating port 33 is detected by the winning sensor 33a.

Here, with respect to the first operating port 33, the game ball flowing down the left route can win (can reach), and the game ball flowing down the right route does not win (do not reach). That is, the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 38 in the left side area PE2, the right side area PE3, and the lower side area PE4 is configured to allow the game balls flowing down the left side area PE2 to reach the first operating port 33. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side region PE3 is configured not to allow the game ball to reach the first operating port 33. Therefore, when the player aims to win the first operation opening 33, the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the left route.

The second operation port 34 is installed in the right side area PE3. The configuration of the second working port 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the second working port 34.

The second operation port 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a (variable receiving means) as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The general electric accessory 34a is connected to the general electric drive unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the general electric drive unit 34b to be in the closed state shown in FIG. 5(a). It is arranged in either (non-support state or non-guide state) and open state (support state or guide state) shown in FIG. 5B. In the closed state of the universal electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the universal electric object 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating port 34. By the way, when it is in the open state, the universal electric accessory 34a projects toward the game area PE and guides the winning of the second working opening 34. The second working port 34 is provided with a second working port winning sensor 34c, and the gaming ball winning the second working port 34 is detected by the winning sensor 34c.

In addition, in the state where the winning of the game ball to the second operating port 34 is likely to occur and the state where the winning is less likely to occur than the state where the winning is not impossible but the above winning is likely to occur, The configuration may be switched. Further, it may be configured to switch between a state in which a prize is more likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur by the movement or rotation of the general electric accessory 34a in the front-rear direction.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes having different modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are set. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the situation in which the game balls are continuously fired in the same manner in the game area PE, the frequency with which the ordinary electric utility product 34a is opened per unit time. Is relatively high and/or low and/or the open state is relatively short, so that the low frequency support mode (or low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (or high frequency guide state) Is set.

In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the second working opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Then, when a winning is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of the ball.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 35 is provided above the second operation port 34 (upstream side) in the right side region PE3. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PE after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. The through gate 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35a, and the detection sensor 35a detects a game ball winning the through gate 35.

Based on the winning of the through-gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through-gate 35 as a trigger, the result of the internal lottery is an open result (support win), the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display is ended. If the accessory opening and closing game (support execution mode) is executed. In the accessory opening and closing game, the universal electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

With respect to the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35, when the firing handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, the winning is not possible, and the right side area PE3 is the game ball. When the firing handle 60 is operated so as to flow down, winning is possible. Therefore, when the player aims to win the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35, the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the right route.

The first variable winning device 32A is arranged below the first operating port 33 in the lower region PE4. The configuration of the first variable winning device 32A will be described with reference to FIG.

32 A of 1st variable winning a prize devices are provided with the 1st special winning opening 321 opened in front of the pachinko machine 10, and the opening/closing door 322 which opens and closes the 1st special winning opening 321. The first big winning opening 321 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that allows a plurality of game balls to win at the same time. The first big winning opening 321 communicates with a guide passage 324 provided on the back side of the game board 24, and all the game balls winning the first big winning opening 321 are guided to the guide passage 324. ing. The guide passage 324 is provided with a first special winning opening detection sensor 325 that detects passage of a game ball, and the first special winning opening detection sensor 325 detects a game ball entering the first special winning opening 321. The winning is detected.

In addition, the first variable winning device 32A is provided with a drive unit 323 that drives the opening/closing door 322. The opening/closing door 322 is driven by a driving unit 323 through a link mechanism (not shown), so that a game ball can be won in the first big winning opening 321 (FIG. 6(b)) and the first big winning opening. The game ball is switched to the closed state (FIG. 6(a)) where the game ball cannot be won in 321.

In addition, when the first variable winning device 32A (opening/closing door 322) is in the closed state, it is not necessary to be able to win the first big winning opening 321 and it is more difficult to win the prize than in the open state. It may be configured to be able to win a prize. The point is that the ease of winning the first big winning opening 321 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

Here, with respect to the first variable winning device 32A, the first variable winning so that the gaming ball can be won only when the firing handle 60 is operated so that the gaming ball flows down the right side area PE3. The arrangement of the nails 38 and the game parts in the peripheral portion of the device 32A is set. Therefore, when the player aims to win the first variable winning device 32A, the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the right route.

As shown in FIG. 4, a second variable winning device 32B is arranged diagonally right below the variable display unit 36 (downstream of the second operation port 34) in the right area PE3. The configuration of the second variable winning device 32B will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the second variable winning a prize device 32B includes a second special winning opening 351 opening in front of the pachinko machine 10 and an opening/closing door 352 opening and closing the second special winning opening 351. There is. The second variable winning device 32B is provided with a drive unit 353 that drives the opening/closing door 352. The opening/closing door 352 is driven by the driving unit 353 through a link mechanism (not shown), and thus the game ball can be won in the second special winning opening 351 and the game ball cannot be entered in the second special winning opening 351. It is switched to the closed state.

In addition, when the second variable winning device 32B (opening/closing door 352) is in the closed state, it is not necessary to be able to win the second big winning opening 351 and it is more difficult to win the prize than in the open state. It may be configured to be able to win a prize. The point is that the ease of winning in the second special winning opening 351 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

The second big winning opening 351 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that allows a plurality of game balls to win at the same time. The second special winning opening 351 communicates with a guide passage 354 provided on the back side of the game board 24, and all the game balls winning the second special winning opening 351 are guided to the guide passage 354. ing.

As shown in FIG. 7( b ), the guide passage 354 bifurcates from its middle position, and constitutes one upstream region 355 that constitutes the upstream side of the branch position and one of the downstream sides of the branch position. A V winning area (or a used area) 356 and a discharge area (or a non-used area) 357 that constitutes the other downstream side of the branch position are provided. Further, at the branch position, a distribution member 358 is provided as a distribution unit that distributes the game balls reaching the branch position from the upstream area 355 to either the V winning area 356 or the discharging area 357. In a state where the distribution member 358 is not driven by the distribution driving unit 359, the game balls that have reached the branch position will flow into the discharge area 357, and the distribution member 358 is driven by the driving unit 359. In the state where the game ball has reached the branch position, it flows into the V winning area 356.

In the upstream area 355 of the guide passage 354, a detection sensor 361 for counting is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game ball flowing into the upstream area 355 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball by the detection sensor 361 for counting, the payout of the prize ball corresponding to the winning of the second variable winning device 32B is executed. Further, in the V winning area 356, a V winning detection sensor 362 is provided so that the detecting area exists at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the V winning area 356 always passes. The V jackpot is generated based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 362. The details of the V jackpot will be described later.

Further, in the discharge area 357, a discharge detection sensor 363 is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the discharge area 357 always passes. Based on the detection results from the detection sensor 363 for discharge and the detection sensor 362 for V winning, whether or not the game ball remains in the second variable winning device 32B, and the number of winnings to the second variable winning device 32A. It is determined whether or not the number of coins discharged from the winning device 32A matches.

The drive unit 359 is drive-controlled periodically from a predetermined timing. Specifically, the drive unit 359 for the distribution member is drive-controlled in a predetermined cycle from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened. As a result, the timing at which the game balls won in the second variable winning device 32B are distributed to the V winning region 356 side and the timing to be distributed to the discharging region 357 side are periodically switched.

In the opening/closing execution mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened, a plurality of opening/closing execution modes in which the period during which the opening/closing door 352 is in the open state are different are set. As will be described later in detail, in the pachinko machine 10, the probability that the winning game balls are distributed to the V winning area 356 becomes relatively high and low by changing the period in which the open/close door 352 is in the open state. Has been done. Hereinafter, the opening mode on the side having a high probability of being distributed to the V winning area 356 is referred to as a high distribution mode (high expectation mode), and the opening mode on the side having a low probability is a low distribution mode (low expectation mode). Say.

The total probability that the game ball passes through the V winning area 356 in the low distribution mode open/close execution mode and the high distribution mode open/close execution mode in which the game ball can win the second variable winning device 32B. Is set to be less than or equal to a predetermined probability (1/10). That is, although the probability of passing the V winning area 356 in the high distribution mode opening/closing execution mode is increased, when combined with the probability of passing the V winning area 356 in the low distribution mode opening/closing execution mode. , The winning rate to the second variable winning device 32B and the passing rate of the V winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode of the high distribution mode/low distribution mode so that the probability becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined probability. The distribution ratios of the high distribution mode and the low distribution mode when the open/close execution mode is executed are set.

It is preferable that the second variable winning device 32B is formed so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 which of the V winning area 356 and the discharging area 357 the winning game balls are distributed to. Specifically, it is preferable that the front surface side of the second variable winning device 32B is formed to be colored transparent or colorless transparent.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32A is a variable winning device that is opened/closed when an opening/closing execution mode (big winning game state) corresponding to a big hit is executed. The jackpot gaming state is a mode to be shifted when the jackpot is won, and in the jackpot gaming state, the opening time of the first variable winning device 32A reaches a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the first variable winning. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the device 32A (first big winning opening 321) as one round, and the first variable winning device 32A is repeatedly opened up to a plurality of rounds. There is.

On the other hand, the second variable winning device 32B is a variable winning device that is opened/closed when an opening/closing execution mode (small winning game state) corresponding to a small win (special win or special miss) is executed. The small hitting game state is a mode to be shifted when a small hit is won, and in the small hitting game state, the opening time of the second variable winning a prize device 32B reaches a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 sec). Alternatively, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the second variable winning device 32B (second big winning opening 351) as one round, and the round game is executed only once. ..

In the round game in the big hitting game state and the small hitting game state, the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32A or the second variable player having a predetermined number of times and a predetermined period even if the ending condition of the upper limit opening time or the upper limit winning number is not satisfied. It is configured to end when the winning device 32B is opened.

When a prize is awarded to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34, an internal lottery (a lottery whether or not a big hit is won, a lottery whether or not a small win is won) is performed. Then, if the lottery is won, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B can be won.

As shown in FIG. 4, the special figure display section 43 and the general figure display section 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided in the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further with the window panel 62. The distance between them is smaller than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

To display the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered by winning the jackpot in the internal lottery (or the opening/closing execution mode) is displayed on the special figure display unit 43. The round display section RS is provided. In the round display section RS, the display of the number of round games is started at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and the display is ended at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, on the special figure display section 43, the first special figure display section AS for clearly showing the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first working port 33, and the second working port 34. The second special figure display portion BS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning is set.

In the first special figure display portion AS, the variable display of the pattern is performed by the winning of the first working opening 33 as a trigger, and the result of the stop of the variable display is based on the winning of the first working opening 33. The result of the internal lottery is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first working opening 33 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first special view display portion AS. After the variable display is stopped, the mode is changed to the open/close execution mode.

In the second special figure display portion BS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the second operating port 34 as a trigger, and the result of the stop of the variable display is based on the winning of the second operating port 34. The result of the internal lottery is clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second working opening 34 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second special figure display portion BS. After the variable display is stopped, the mode is changed to the open/close execution mode.

In the following, in order to distinguish the pattern that is variably displayed when the prize for the first working port 33 is a prize and the pattern that is variably displayed when the prize for the second operating port 34 is a prize, the former is the first special symbol. Or it is called the first special symbol, and the latter may be called the second special symbol or the second special symbol.

Here, the variable display is started on the corresponding first special figure display portion AS and second special figure display portion BS based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 33 and 34, and the predetermined stop result is stopped and displayed. However, the end of the stop display corresponds to one game. A supplementary explanation will be given on the game times with reference to FIG.

As for the game times in the special figure display unit 43, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the win/win lottery is performed, and then the variable-displayed pattern is fixedly displayed in a mode corresponding to the result of the win/win lottery. It is one time. In other words, the game game consists of the variable display of the pattern and the fixed display of the variable display. The term "determined" is based on the fact that the stop display is performed as a display of a definite stop result with the display content (pattern) unchanged.

Here, the fixed display of the pattern is not completed by the end of the variable display, but is completed by the continuous display of the pattern of the mode corresponding to the result of the winning/winning lottery for a predetermined fixed display time. This is for clarifying the boundary with the subsequent game time while ensuring the time for the player to recognize the game result. Therefore, after the variable display of the pattern is started, the next game time (variable display) is started after the variable display time has elapsed and after the fixed display time has further elapsed. In the following, the total period of the variable display time and the fixed display time, that is, the period from the start of the variable display of the pattern in this game time to the start of the variable display of the pattern in the next game time It may be called the execution period of.

The general-purpose display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through-gate 35. In this case, on the general-purpose display unit 44, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35. The result of is clearly indicated by the display.

It should be noted that, also in the universal figure game time, similar to the special figure game time shown in FIG. 4(b), the variable display of the pattern is started based on the win/loss lottery, and then the variable display pattern is changed. The confirmation display is performed once in a mode corresponding to the result of the winning/winning lottery. In other words, the ordinary game time also consists of the variable display of the design and the fixed display of the design.

When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the support state in which the universal electric accessory 34a is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the general-purpose display unit 44. Is displayed and the variable display is stopped, and then the game proceeds to the accessory opening/closing game. In the accessory opening/closing game, the ordinary electric product 34a is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the open/close control (switching control) is performed at least once. If the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) after the shift to the game, or if a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are won in the second operating port 34 Is configured to end. It should be noted that the accessory opening/closing game may be terminated when the general electric auditors a thing 34a is released for a predetermined number of times and period even if the ending conditions for the upper limit opening time and the upper limit winning number are not satisfied. Is configured.

The special figure display section 43 and the general figure display section 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but the invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used. Good.

Next, the variable display unit 36 will be described. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that variably displays (or variably or switches) a symbol which is a kind of symbol.

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 41, symbols are displayed side by side, for example, above, in, and below, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34. That is, when the variable display is performed on the special figure display unit 43, the variable display is also performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, when shifting to the jackpot gaming state in which the first big winning opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is opened, in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset effective line Is stopped.

Further, on the symbol display device 41, a hold display corresponding to the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS is performed. The maximum number of winning game balls in the first operating port 33 is 4 and the maximum number of winning game balls in the second operating port 34 is 4. In the above hold display, a predetermined hold image is displayed, and the number of holdings of each of the operating ports 33 and 34 is indicated by the number of displayed images. Note that the number of holdings is not limited to that shown by the above-mentioned holding image, and may be shown by a numerical display. Further, the structure is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by, for example, a display unit, a light emitting unit (holding lamp unit), or the like provided on the game board 24.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted.

The main controller 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is housed in a substrate box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 serving as a separation preventing means (or a connecting means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Further, since they are inseparably connected by the box connecting portions 85, it is necessary to break or partially cut the substrate box 83 when opening the internal space of the substrate box 83. A plurality of box joining portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for joining processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled in a non-releasable manner. However, by inserting a locking claw into the long hole that constitutes the box coupling portion 85, It is designed to be permanently connected to the box cover. The merging process by the box merging unit 85 prevents illicit opening after the merging, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if illicit opening is performed. It is possible to perform the opening process again after the opening. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. Then, when the board box 83 is opened when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box connecting portion 85 in which the locking claw is inserted and another box connecting portion 85 are connected. Cut off the connection part of and the connection part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling part 85. If a history indicating that the board box 83 has been opened is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found by looking at the board box 83 that the board has been opened illegally.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side portion of the board box 83 so as to project laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81. The coupling pieces 86 and the coupling pieces 87 form a board box 83 and a mounting base. Join processing is performed between the two.

As a trace means for detecting the unauthorized opening of the board box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal sticker is peeled off from the pasted part, the adhesive layer of the seal sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace thereof remains. Furthermore, an IC tag for transmitting a response wave containing identification information to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker, and when the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the above-mentioned response is given. The wave may not be transmitted.

The production control device 82 includes a production control board that controls voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the production control board is a substrate box made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is configured to be accommodated in 84.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and the payout mechanism 92, the discharge passage board 88, and the control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 protruding rearward and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game arcade are successively replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. And a dispensing device 96 for dispensing the ball. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is provided with a main power supply of, for example, AC 24 V, and a back pack substrate provided with a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when the game balls are insufficient in the tank 95, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. Output terminal for outputting a signal each time it is rented, output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and opening/closing execution mode, etc. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to the state). Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

The discharge passage board 88 has a discharge passage opened rearward on a surface facing the control device gathering unit 93, and an opening portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device gathering unit 93. The game balls that have won the various winning openings 31, 33, 34, 321, and 351 and the game balls that have entered the out opening 37 are led out to the discharge passage on the back side of the game board 24. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facility of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 93 has a horizontally long mounting base, and the payout control device 97 and the power supply/launching control device 98 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 97 and the power supply/launch control device 98 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is housed in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppressing means as the board box 83 of the main controller 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout controller 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by housing a power supply and launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and further by the player. The control of the launch of the game ball is performed in accordance with the operation of the firing handle 60. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the status at the time of the power failure and can recover the status at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure. It is like this.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and each may be configured into an individual chip. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 112, the power failure monitoring board 115 and the payout controller 97 provided in the main controller 81 are connected. In this case, a power supply and a firing control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various types of sensors include a general winning opening 31, a first working opening 33, a second working opening 34, a through gate 35, a first variable winning device 32A and a second variable winning device 32B. Sensor 31a, first working opening winning sensor 33a, second working opening winning sensor 34c, through winning sensor 35a, first big winning opening detection sensor 325, detection sensor 361, V winning area 356, for discharging Detection sensors 362 and 363 for detecting the inflow of game balls into the area 357 are provided. The MPU 112 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) or the like for each ball entry portion based on the detection results of these various sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 325, 361 to 363. Further, the MPU 112 executes various kinds of lottery based on the winning of the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35.

To the output side of the MPU 112, the power failure monitoring board 115, the payout control device 97, the effect control device 82, etc. are connected. To the payout control device 97, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of the prize determination to the prize ball corresponding ball input part corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands for effects are output to the effect control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the production control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

In addition, an electric accessory driving unit 34b and driving units 323, 353, 359 for the variable winning a prize device are connected to the output side of the MPU 112 as various driving units. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a shift to the open/close execution mode (big hit game state or small hit game state) occurs, the open/close door 322 of the first variable winning device 32A, the open/close door 352 of the second variable winning device 32B, and the distribution member. The drive control of the drive units 323, 353, 359 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the 358 is driven. In addition, when the general electric utility article 34a is elected in the open state, the MPU 112 performs drive control of the electric auditor product driving section 34b so that the general electric article 34a is opened and closed. Further, at the time of each special figure game time, the display control of the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS in the special figure display section 43 is executed in the MPU 112, and at the time of the big hit game, the special figure is used. The display control of the round display section RS in the display section 43 is executed. Then, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a, the display control of the general-purpose display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 112, and through this external output terminal 99, information about entering balls into various entering parts and a big hit to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side. Information about the lottery results such as is output. This allows the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply/launch control device 98, and also monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V output from the power supply/launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls payout of prize balls or loan balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, and the like are generated with necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply and firing control device 98 is provided with a power source for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power source for power interruption is mainly used. Electric power for storage is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied. In this case, the game ball launch mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 54 of the game board 24, a ball feeder for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 71 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid that is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 54, and the game ball is supplied by a drive signal supplied from the power supply and the launch control device 98 to the solenoid. Is fired.

The effect control device 82 drives and controls the display light emitting part 63 and the speaker part 64 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also controls the display control device 212. is there.

An MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 243. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command is received. Also, it receives a game time control command (game time control information) such as a change command, a type command, and a change end command. It also receives open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as an open command, a close command, an opening command, and an ending command.

The MPU 242 performs processing for executing various effects based on various commands received from the main control device 81. The received command is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242. Then, the stored command is analyzed, and various effects are executed. The ROM 243 of the MPU 242 is provided with various table storage areas, and the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 is provided with various flag storage areas and various counter areas. When performing various effects, processing using these areas is performed. It is possible to do.

On the output side of the MPU 242, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected, and the display control device 212 is also connected.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 271 on which a MPU 272 in which a program ROM 273 and a work RAM 274 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 276, and a video RAM 277 are mounted. There is.

From the production control device 82, the MPU 272 is a command for holding display control (holding display control information) for performing holding display control, a game time control command for performing variable display of symbols (game time control information), An open/close execution mode command (open/close execution mode information) for displaying a moving image in the open/close execution mode is received. Then, the received command is analyzed or a predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received command to control the VDP 275 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 275).

The program ROM 273 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 272 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 274 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 272 executes various programs. These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM 274.

The VDP 275 is a kind of drawing circuit for directly operating the image processing device as the liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 275 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 275 adjusts the timings of the MPU 272, the video RAM 277 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and at the same time, reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 277 from the character ROM 276 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 276 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a design displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 276 holds bit map format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 276 and share the character ROMs 276 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 273 may be stored in the character ROM 276.

The video RAM 277 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 277.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing individually the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 9(a) to 9(j), a design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached and shell-shaped design designs. It is composed of sub-patterns. More specifically, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively attached to nine types of character designs such as octopus to constitute the main design.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper stage, the middle stage and the lower stage are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of these symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, the display screen G is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 3×3 nine symbols are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done.

Five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number on any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of Z3 is finished, the big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit result.

Here, the variable display of each symbol row will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. When the game time is started, high-speed variable display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or difficult to recognize which symbol string is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 11A, the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high speed variable display to the low speed variable display in which the player can recognize the variable displayed symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 11B, the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is terminated, and the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed variable display to the low speed variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 11C, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. After the fluctuation of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 is completed, a stop display period for maintaining the stop display for a predetermined period and waiting is provided.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41, the symbols in the final stop row (the middle symbol row Z2 in the present embodiment) are not suddenly stopped, but gradually changed while lowering the variable display speed. It is common to stop at. In this case, if it is configured to start stopping the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) in synchronization with the start of the final display on the special figure display unit 43, the deceleration time until the symbols stop is required, and the symbols are reduced. The stopped time is shortened, and the stop display time is substantially shortened.

Therefore, before starting the finalized display on the special figure display unit 43, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the final stop row are stopped (temporarily stopped), and then the finalized display on the special figure display unit 43 is performed. It is configured such that the temporarily stopped symbol is permanently stopped (confirmed display) at the start timing of. The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the temporary stop is different from that in the fixed display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is gently reciprocated, and at least a part of characters (see FIG. 6) such as an octopus that constitutes a main symbol or a sub symbol is moving. That is, the temporary stop is performed so as to keep the incomplete stop state although the design seems to be stopped at first glance (stop display). On the other hand, the confirmation display is performed so that the reciprocating slight movement and the motion of the character are not performed and the display is completely stopped.

In addition, the temporary stop display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started with the result of the winning/winning lottery or the stopping result corresponding to the jackpot type, and thereafter, the display shifts to the confirmation display as it is, and the stop not corresponding to the result of the winning/winning lottery or the jackpot type. After being stopped and displayed as a result, it may be changed to a stop result corresponding to the result of the winning/winning lottery through the re-variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and then the final display may be performed.

By the way, in the special drawing game time executed in the special drawing display unit 43, the temporarily stopped display of the pattern is not performed, but the variable displayed pattern is suddenly stopped according to the lapse of the variable display time, and the state (pattern Is maintained until the fixed display time elapses. That is, the stop display of the picture on the special figure display portion 43 is the final display as it is. This also applies to the universal figure game times executed on the universal figure display unit 44.

The mode of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, A combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit or a miss can be appropriately changed.

A first reserved display area Ga is set on the left side of the lower portion of the display screen G, and a second reserved display area Gb is set on the right side of the lower portion of the display screen G.

In the first hold display area (non-priority side hold display area) Ga, the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. It is displayed as a section. Specifically, the maximum number of holdings when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 is four, and the corresponding first holding display area Ga corresponds to the first unit holding display area Ga1 and the first holding display area Ga1. The 2 unit hold display area Ga2, the 3rd unit hold display area Ga3, and the 4th unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of holding balls when the game ball wins the first actuation opening 33 is one, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball makes the first operation. When the number of holdings when the winning is won in the mouth 33 is 4, a predetermined holding image is displayed in all of the first unit holding display area Ga1 to the fourth unit holding display area Ga4.

Further, in the second hold display area (priority side hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the second operating port 34 are arranged in the left-right direction. It is displayed as a section so that it will be installed. Specifically, the maximum number of holdings when the game ball wins the second operating port 34 is four, and the corresponding second holding display area Gb corresponds to the first unit holding display area Gb1 and the second holding display area Gb. The 2 unit hold display area Gb2, the 3rd unit hold display area Gb3, and the 4th unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of holding balls when the game ball wins the second operating port 34 is one, the holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gb1, and the game ball is the second operating port 34. In the case where the number of holdings when the winning is won is four, the holding image is displayed in all of the first unit holding display area Gb1 to the fourth unit holding display area Gb4.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in MPU 112 of main controller 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 112 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display on the special figure display unit 43, setting of effect contents of the symbol display device 41, setting of display on the general figure display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot random number counter C1 used in the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, the jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type, and the jackpot type are determined. Small hit type counter C3 used for, the big hit random number counter C1 random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value, special figure display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 fluctuation type counter CS for determining the fluctuation display time And, will be used. Further, the open random number counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether or not to put the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 in the electric open state is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3, and the variation type counter CS indicates that the winning of the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34 has occurred. In this case, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as an information storage means.

The reserve ball storage area 114b includes a reserve area RE including a first special figure display section reserve area Ra and a second special figure display section reserve area Rb, and an execution area AE. Each of the holding areas Ra and Rb includes a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and a lottery counter according to the winning history of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34. Numerical value information of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored in any of the areas as pending information. The pending information corresponds to special information (determination information).

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the winning in the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area→the second area→the third area→ Each numerical value information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth area. Since each of the four areas is provided in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34 is stored up to four, respectively. In addition, a reserve number storage area is provided in the reserve ball storage area 114b, and the number of reserve history of the winning history for the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34 is specified in the reserved number storage area. The information for doing is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display portion 43, and is executed at the start of one game time. Based on the various numerical information stored in the area AE, the determination of win/fail is made.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199), returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 199). The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first special view display reserve area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first working opening 33, and the second of the RAM 114 is stored at the timing when the game ball wins the second working opening 34. It is stored in the special area display reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number that is a big hit is stored as a win/loss table (win/win information group) in the win/win table storage area 113a as a win/win information group storage unit in the ROM 113. Here, the contents of the hit/miss table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As the win/loss table, a win/loss table for the first special figure (FIG. 13A) and a win/loss table for the second special figure (FIG. 13B) are provided. In the lottery based on the entry into the first working port 33, the win/loss table for the first special figure is referred to, and in the lottery based on the entry into the second working port 34, the win/loss table for the second special diagram is referenced. To be done.

In the hit/miss table for the first special figure, as shown in FIG. 13A, the value of the random number corresponding to the jackpot result is one “7”. That is, of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of "0" to "199", "7" corresponds to the jackpot result, and the jackpot probability is 1/200. Further, in the hit/miss table for the first special figure, four pieces of “0” to “3” correspond to the small hit result, and the probability of the small hit result is 1/20. In addition, the lottery result is configured to be a deviating result except for the value of the random number which is the result of the big hit and the value of the random number which is the result of the small hit.

In the hit/miss table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 13B, the value of the random number corresponding to the jackpot result is one “7”. That is, "7" of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of "0 to 199" corresponds to the jackpot result, and the probability of being a jackpot is 1/200. In the hit/miss table for the second special figure, 20 pieces of “0” to “6” and “8” to “20” correspond to the small hit result, and the probability of the small hit result is 1/10. ing. In addition, the lottery result is configured to be a deviating result except for the value of the random number which is the result of the big hit and the value of the random number which is the result of the small hit.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for sorting the types when a jackpot is hit, and is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 in sequence, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). Has become. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first special view display reserve area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first working opening 33, and the second of the RAM 114 is stored at the timing when the game ball wins the second working opening 34. It is stored in the special area display reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result to the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a big hit type table (first distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 113. Here, the contents of the jackpot type table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (FIG. 14A) and a jackpot type table for the second special figure (FIG. 14B) are provided. In the case of a big hit based on the ball entering the first working port 33, the big hit type table for the first special figure is referred to, and in the case of a big hit based on the ball entering the second working port 34. Refers to the jackpot type table for the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 14A, in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, “0” to “49” correspond to the 5R jackpot result A, and “50” to “99” are the 5R jackpot results. Corresponds to B. That is, in the present embodiment, both the probability of being assigned to the 5R jackpot result A and the probability of being assigned to the 5R jackpot result B are set to 50%. When the 5R jackpot result A or the 5R jackpot result B is reached, the jackpot game state is executed in which a round game for five rounds is executed, and the first variable winning device 32A is opened five times.

If the 5R jackpot result A is won, the game shifts to the high frequency support mode after the jackpot gaming state is over. The high-frequency support mode in this case continues until the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 9 times) after the transition to the support mode, and after the high-frequency support mode ends, the support mode is Move to low-frequency support mode.

In the present embodiment, the number of executions of special figure game times in the high frequency support mode is configured to be counted only for the game times of the second special figure. Therefore, after the transition to the high frequency support mode, regardless of the number of times the game times of the first special figure are executed, if the number of times of execution of the game times of the second special figure reaches the end reference number, high frequency support The mode ends.

On the other hand, when the 5R jackpot result B is won, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode without shifting to the high frequency support mode after the jackpot gaming state is completed. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is generated based on the ball entering the first working opening 33, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the big hit game state with a probability of 50%. Become. The normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means a state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

As a support mode of the second working port 34 in the universal electric vehicle 34a, when comparing in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in a similar manner to the game area PE, the operation mode to the second working port 34 is changed. The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set so that the winning frequency is relatively high and low. Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the electric-role open state wins in the electric role open lottery using the open random number counter C4 is higher in the latter than in the former. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric officer 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one more time is set. It is set long.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operation port 33 is higher than in the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than the first operation port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a winning is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he or she holds. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of being in the electric power open state per unit time in the high frequency support mode is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the electric hand open state in the (universal figure win/loss lottery) is the same. Further, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode may be set by differentiating any one of the number of times, the opening time and the winning probability or the condition of an arbitrary combination.

As shown in FIG. 14B, in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, “0” to “99” correspond to the 15R jackpot result. That is, when a big hit is generated based on a ball entering the second operation port 34, it is set to be distributed to the 15R big hit result with a probability of 100%. In the case of the 15R jackpot result, the jackpot game state in which the round game for 15 rounds is executed is shifted to, and the first variable winning device 32A is opened 15 times. When the result of 15R jackpot is obtained, the high frequency support mode is entered. The high frequency support mode in this case also continues until the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 9 times) after the transition of the support mode, as in the case of the jackpot type table for the first special map. Has become.

The small hit type counter C3 is for distributing the type when a small hit occurs, and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. It is composed. The small hit type counter C3 is regularly updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first special view display reserve area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first working opening 33, and the second of the RAM 114 is stored at the timing when the game ball wins the second working opening 34. It is stored in the special area display reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result to the small hit type counter C3 is stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 113 as a small hit type table (second distribution information group). Here, the contents of the small hit type table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

As the small hit type table, a small hit type table for the first special figure (FIG. 15A) and a small hit type table for the second special figure (FIG. 15B) are provided. When a small hit occurs based on the ball entering the first working port 33, the small hit type table for the first special figure is referred to, and a small hit occurs based on the ball entering the second working port 34. In this case, the jackpot type table for the second special figure is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 15A, in the small hit type table for the first special figure, “0” to “99” correspond to the disadvantageous small hit result. That is, when the small hit is won based on the ball entering the first working opening 33, it is set to be distributed to the disadvantage small hit result with a probability of 100%. The unfavorable small hit result is a kind of small hit result, and when the unfavorable small hit result is reached, the small hit game (one round opening/closing execution mode) by the second variable winning device 32B is executed. Specifically, the opening/closing control of the second variable winning device 32B is performed in a low distribution mode in which the game balls entered in the second variable winning device 32B are less likely to be distributed to the V winning region 356.

As shown in FIG. 15B, in the small hit type table for the second special figure, “0” to “59” correspond to the advantageous small hit result A, and “60” to “99” are the advantageous small hits. Corresponds to result B. That is, when the small hit is won based on the entry into the second operating port 34, the small hit result A is distributed to the advantageous small hit result A with a probability of 60%, and the advantageous small hit result B is distributed to a probability of 40%. Advantageous small hit result A and advantageous small hit result B are one kind of small hit result, when it becomes these small hit results, small hit game with 2nd variable winning a prize device 32B is executed. Specifically, the second variable winning device 32B is controlled to be opened and closed in a high distribution mode in which the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 32B are easily distributed to the V winning region 356.

Here, the low distribution mode and the high distribution mode will be described with reference to FIG. Incidentally, since the operation of the distribution member 358 (see FIG. 7) is the same in both the low distribution mode and the high distribution mode, the operation of the distribution member 358 will be described first.

As shown in FIG. 16(a3), at the timing t1 which is the start timing of the small hit game, the distribution member 358 distributes the game balls won in the second variable winning device 32B to the discharge area 357 (outside). Located in position. Then, at a timing t4 when a waiting time of 1 sec has elapsed from the timing t1, the distribution member 358 is displaced to a position where the game balls won in the second variable winning device 32B are distributed to the V winning area 356. After that, the state is maintained until the distribution time of 2 seconds elapses from the timing t4, and at the timing t5 when the distribution time elapses, the position is returned to the position on the detachment side.

In this case, in the small hitting game of the low distribution mode executed based on the disadvantageous small hitting result, as shown in FIG. 16(a2), 0.5 sec is set as the opening period of the small hitting game ( At the timing t2), after the opening period has elapsed, the second variable winning a prize device 32B is opened for 0.1 sec (timing t3). That is, in the small hitting game of the low distribution mode, the opening time (0.1 sec) of the second variable winning device 32B is shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball and is extremely short. Even if the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state, it is difficult for the game balls to win (the winning is hardly expected). Even if the game ball wins, since the opening and closing of the second variable winning device 32B is completed in the timings t1 to t4 when the distribution member 358 is located on the discharge area 357 side, the winning game is won. The balls are distributed to the discharge area 357. That is, as shown in FIGS. 16A2 and 16A3, the period in which the distribution member 358 is located on the V winning region 356 side and the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state do not overlap. Because of the relationship, the game ball cannot pass through the V winning area 356.

On the other hand, in the small hitting game of the high distribution mode executed based on the advantageous small hitting result, as shown in FIG. 16(b2), 0.5 sec is set as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode (timing t12). ), after the opening period has elapsed, the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state for 1.8 seconds (timing t13). Therefore, in the small hitting game of the high distribution mode, as shown in FIGS. 16(b2) and 16(b3), the distribution member 358 is the discharge area at the timing t13 when the second variable winning device 32B is open. It will be displaced from the 357 side to the V winning area 356 side. As a result, the period in which the distribution member 358 is located on the V winning region 356 side and the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state overlap, and the period is 1.3 sec. Since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 sec, approximately two game balls can be won in the second variable winning device 32B during the period, so that at least one game ball is almost certainly for V winning. It can pass through the area 356.

In addition, in the small hitting game of the high distribution mode, the period (0.5 sec) from when the second variable winning device 32B is opened until the distribution member 358 starts to be displaced to the V winning area 356 side. ) Is a period shorter than the product of the game cycle of the game ball and the maximum winning number (10) in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, before the distribution member 358 is displaced to the V winning region 356 side after the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state, the winning number of game balls to the second variable winning device 32B is the upper limit winning. It is avoided that the small hitting game is finished when the number reaches the number (the small hitting game is finished without being distributed to the V winning area 356).

Here, regardless of whether it is the advantageous small hit result A or the advantageous small hit result B, the mode of the opening/closing control of the second variable winning device 32B during the winning game is the same, but it is the advantageous small hit result. The distribution result of the small hit type in this case has an influence on the distribution result of the big hit type when the V big hit occurs. That is, in the small hitting game, the game balls that have won the second variable winning device 32B flow into the V winning area 356, and when a V winning occurs, depending on the type of the small hitting game being executed at that time, The type of V jackpot can be sorted. This distribution is performed using the jackpot type table for V jackpots (third sorting information group) stored in the sorting table storage area of the ROM 113.

As shown in FIG. 15C, in the jackpot type table for V jackpots, 16RV jackpot results and 6RV jackpot results are set as the jackpot result types. The former is a round game to be executed 16 times, and the latter is 6 times. That is, the 16RV jackpot result and the 6RV jackpot result are different in terms of the number of round games executed in the jackpot gaming state, that is, the number of expected balls to be acquired. Further, both of these V jackpot results, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the end reference number is 9 times in each case. That is, if a small hit game is generated based on the entrance of the second special map and a V prize is generated in the small hit game, there is a high probability that the support mode after the end of the big hit game state has a high probability of 100%. It is designed to shift to support mode.

In the jackpot type table for V jackpot, the type of a V winning flag, which will be described later, and the type of the V jackpot result are associated with each other. As will be described in detail later, the type of the V winning flag corresponds to the type of the advantageous small hit result that triggered the V big hit. As a result, the type of the V jackpot result is determined by the type of the advantageous jackpot result that triggered the V jackpot. Specifically, if the small hit game being executed when the V winning occurs is based on the result of the win/no win lottery of the second special drawing being the advantageous small hit result A, 16RV big hit If the small hitting game which is distributed to the results and is executed when the V winning occurs is based on the advantageous small hitting result B, it is distributed to the 6RV big winning result. Therefore, the probability of distribution to the 16RV jackpot result is 60%, which is the same as the probability of the advantageous small hit result A among the advantageous small hit results, and the distribution probability to the 6RV jackpot result is the advantageous small hit result B. 40%, which is the same as the probability of becoming.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the win/no win lottery of the second special figure includes the result of advantageous small hits, so that it is possible to expect to win the V big hit, and further shift to the high frequency support mode. Regarding the probability of doing, the second special figure is higher than the first special figure. That is, the win/no win lottery of the second special diagram is preferentially treated than that of the first special diagram, and the second operating port 34 is more advantageous to the player than the first operating port 33. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that a prize will be awarded to the second operating port 34.

The MPU 112 uses the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the small hit type counter C3 stored in the execution area AE, in the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS. The stop result is determined, and the stop result table storage area of the ROM 113 is used for the determination.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS is a fluctuation display time and a fixed display time in the first special figure display section AS and the second special figure display section BS of the special figure display section 43, and a variable display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41, Is used in the MPU 112. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first special view display reserve area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first working opening 33, and the second of the RAM 114 is stored at the timing when the game ball wins the second working opening 34. It is stored in the special area display reserved area Rb.

The MPU 112 uses the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE to determine the fluctuation display time in the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS. The variable display time table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is used.

The open random number counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the electric power holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35.

The value of the random number, which is the per-universal figure (release result), is stored in the win/loss table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 as a general-purpose hit table. Here, the content of the hit/miss table for general drawings will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As the hit/miss table for general use, a table for the low frequency support mode (FIG. 17A) and a table for the high frequency support mode (FIG. 17B) are provided. When the universal figure game times are executed under the condition that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the universal figure pass/fail table for the low frequency support mode is referred to, and the universal figure game is executed under the high frequency support mode. When the number of times is executed, the universal figure pass/fail table for the high frequency support mode is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 17A, in the universal figure hit/miss table for the low frequency support mode, the value of the random number corresponding to the release result is one “7”. That is, the probability of winning a general figure is 1/200, and under the low frequency support mode, most of the general figure win/loss lots are set to result in a failure. It should be noted that, except for the random number value that is the opening result, the lottery result is a deviating result (the result that the general electric accessory 34a does not open).

When the result of the universal figure winning/missing lottery is the open result under the low frequency support mode, the accessory opening/closing game of the ordinary electric accessory 34a is executed in the opening/closing mode for the low frequency support mode. Here, the accessory opening/closing game for the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG.

In the accessory opening/closing game for the low frequency support mode, opening/closing control of the universal electric accessory 34a is performed once from the start to the end of the accessory opening/closing game. The opening time in this case is set to 0.2 sec. This opening time is shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec) and is extremely short, so it is difficult to win the prize even if the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state (the prize is hardly expected). It has become a thing. Therefore, under the low-frequency support mode, even if the result of the universal figure winning/winning lottery is an open result, there is almost no winning in the second working port 34, and the winning/winning lottery of the second special map is substantially generated. It cannot be received.

The mode of the accessory opening/closing game for the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and if the winning to the second operating port 34 is hardly generated, the opening/closing control of the universal electric accessory 34a is performed. It may be performed a plurality of times, or the opening time may be set to a time other than 0.2 sec.

Further, for the sake of convenience, the opening period and the ending period are set to 0.2 sec, but this is also arbitrary, and both may be different periods from 0.2 sec, for example, 0 sec.

As shown in FIG. 17B, in the universal figure acceptance/rejection table for the high frequency support mode, the random number values corresponding to the release result are 190 “0” to “189”. That is, the probability of being the opening result is 190/200, and under the high-frequency support mode, the majority of the universal figure win/loss lots are set to be the opening result. Other than the value of the random number that is the release result, the lottery result is configured to be a defeat result.

Then, when the result of the universal figure winning/missing lottery is the open result under the high frequency support mode, the accessory opening/closing game of the ordinary electric accessory 34a is executed in the opening/closing mode for the high frequency support mode. Here, the accessory opening/closing game for the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG.

The accessory opening/closing game for the high-frequency support mode is composed of a combination of a first opening/closing pattern and a second opening/closing pattern. More specifically, after executing the first opening/closing pattern, the second opening/closing pattern is executed. It is configured to run.

The first opening/closing pattern is more likely to enter the second working port 34 than the second opening/closing pattern. In other words, under the high frequency support mode, the reserved memory of the second special map is stored. It is easy to store and it is easy to receive a prize ball based on a ball entering the second operating port 34.

On the other hand, the second opening/closing pattern is less likely to enter the second operation port 34 than the first opening/closing pattern, but is less likely to generate an invalid entry (non-target entry) than the first opening/closing pattern, It is easy to efficiently generate the reserved storage of the second special diagram. In this pachinko machine 10, even if the incoming ball of the second special figure occurs while the number of reserved memories of the second special figure has reached the upper limit number, the pending information based on the incoming ball (big hit random number counter C1 etc.) However, the invalid ball is a ball that does not store such reserved information. However, even if the ball is invalid, the prize ball is paid out based on the ball entering the second operating port 34.

Explaining each opening/closing pattern in detail, the first opening/closing pattern is one in which the opening/closing control of the universal electrician object 34a is performed once, and its opening time is the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball and the role. It is 3 sec which is more than the product (2.4 sec) of the upper limit winning number (4) to the second operation port 34 which is one of the ending conditions of the object opening and closing game. Therefore, when the game balls are being fired in the normal manner (the manner in which the firing handle 60 is continuously rotated), the number of winning game balls to the second working opening 34 is the upper limit in the middle of the first opening/closing pattern. The winning number is reached, and the accessory opening/closing game is completed.

In addition, the opening time of the utility battery 34a in the first opening/closing pattern is equal to or more than the product (2.4 sec) of the game cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number (4) of the number of reserved memories in the second special diagram. Has become. Therefore, by controlling the opening and closing of the ordinary electric accessory 34a in the first opening and closing pattern, it is possible to generate at least the number of balls corresponding to the upper limit of the number of reserved memories in the second operating port 34. ..

On the other hand, the second opening/closing pattern is one in which the opening/closing control of the general electric accessory 34a is performed three times, and the opening time of each opening is 1 sec which is longer than the game cycle of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to expect at least one ball to enter the second operation port 34 every time the opening/closing control of the general electric accessory 34a is performed once in the second opening/closing pattern. In the second opening/closing pattern, the waiting time between each opening (the period of waiting for the next opening with the general electric accessory 34a in the closed state) is set in accordance with the execution period of the game times of the second special diagram. There is. The relationship between each waiting time and the game period execution time of the second special figure will be described in detail later.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed to advance the game in the MPU 112 in the main control unit 81 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the MPU 112 executes the main processing started when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing started by the input of the power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). A description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is activated by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361 to 363 are read, and the states of these various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361 to 363 are determined and detected. Perform the process of saving information. In addition, in the case where the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 325, 361 corresponding to the generation of the prize balls detect the winning of the game balls, the payout controller 97 is instructed to pay the prize balls. Set the prize ball command of. For example, when the first special winning opening detection sensor 325 detects the winning of the first variable winning device 32A, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls. To set. In a succeeding step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In a succeeding step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the jackpot type counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 114.

In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning in the through gate 35 is executed. In the through winning process, when the winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the number of stored accessory holdings stored in the electric hand holding area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). As a condition, the value of the open random number counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric power combination holding area 114c. Moreover, the process for lighting the third holding light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the number of stored accessory holdings is performed on the effect control device 82.

In a succeeding step S105, a winning process for the operating port is executed. Here, the winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the winning process for the operating port, first, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first operating port 33 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the first operating port winning sensor 33a. If it is determined that the game ball has won the first operation opening 33, in step S202, a payout ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set. In a succeeding step S203, it is determined whether the first startup hold storage number RaN stored in the hold ball storage area 114b is less than the maximum storable number (1) (whether it is 0 or not). The first startup hold storage number RaN is incremented by 1 when the hold information is stored in the first special view display holding area Ra based on the winning of the first working opening 33, and the first special game is played. It is decremented by 1 when the time starts.

If it is less than the maximum number, that is, 0, in step S204, a process of adding 1 to the first startup pending storage number RaN is executed. After that, in step S205, an information acquisition process of storing the respective values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3, and the variable type counter CS in the first special figure display holding area Ra is performed. In a succeeding step S206, a setting process of the first hold command is executed. In such a process, information indicating that the winning of the first working opening 33 has occurred is output to the effect control device 82 side, and the game of the pending information acquired based on the winning of the first working opening 33 of this time is played. A process of outputting information on the number of times (game result information, variable display time information, etc.) to the effect control device 82 side is performed.

In the present embodiment, in the situation where the upper limit number (4 pieces) of holding information is stored in the first special figure display holding area Ra, even if a winning for the first working opening 33 occurs. Since the hold information is not acquired, the first hold command is not output even if the winning of the first operating port 33 occurs in this situation. The same applies to the second hold command described later.

When a negative determination is made in either step S201 or step S203, or after the process of step S206 is executed, the process proceeds to step S207. In step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second working port 34 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the second working port winning sensor 34c. If it is determined that the game ball has won the second operating port 34, a prize ball command for paying out one game ball is set in the payout control device 97 in step S208. In a succeeding step S209, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold storage number RbN stored in the hold ball storage area 114b is less than the maximum storable number (1) (whether it is 0 or not). The second start hold storage number RbN is incremented by 1 when the hold information is stored in the second special view display holding area Rb based on the winning of the second operating port 34, and the second special game is played. It is decremented by 1 when the time starts.

If it is less than the maximum number, that is, 0, in step S210, the process of adding 1 to the second start pending storage number RbN is executed. After that, in step S211, an information acquisition process of storing each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3, and the variation type counter CS in the second special figure display holding area Rb is performed. In the following step S212, the setting process of the second hold command is executed. In such a process, the information that the winning in the second operating port 34 has occurred is output to the effect control device 82 side, and the game about the pending information acquired based on the winning in the second operating port 34 this time is played. A process of outputting information on the number of times (game result information, variable display time information, etc.) to the effect control device 82 side is performed. When a negative determination is made in either step S207 or step S209, or after the process of step S212 is executed, the winning process for the main working opening is ended.

The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S208 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in an external output process of a normal process described later. Further, the hold command set in steps S206 and S212 is also transmitted to the effect control device 82 by the external output process of the normal process. These hold commands include information indicating which one of the winning openings of the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 is based on the winning, and in the effect control device 82, the holding is performed. By receiving the command, the display control device 212 displays the variable display by each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 side, and the first special symbol display area GA and the second special symbol display area GB in the display screen G. Make display settings.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process in FIG. 19, after the winning process for the working opening in step S105 is executed, the V winning process for detecting the occurrence of the V winning is executed in step S106, and then, This timer interrupt processing ends. The V winning process will be described in detail later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S301 to S308 is executed as a regular processing of a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S311 and S312 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal process, first, an external signal output process is executed in step S301. In the external signal output process of step S301, output data such as the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If the effect command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S302, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In a succeeding step S303, special figure game time control processing for advancing the game of each special figure game time is executed. In this special figure game time control processing, the jackpot and the like determination, the big hit type distribution determination, the small hit type distribution determination is performed, and the variable display setting of the symbol by the symbol display device 41, the special symbol display unit The variable display in 43 is set.

After executing the special figure game time control processing of step S303, it advances to step S304, executes the shift processing to the small hitting game state in order to shift the game state to the small hitting game state. In a succeeding step S305, processing for shifting to the jackpot gaming state for shifting the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state is executed.

Next, in step S306, processing for electric power combination support for driving and controlling the general electric power accessory 34a provided in the second operation port 34 is executed. In a succeeding step S307, a V distribution setting process for driving and controlling the distribution member 358 provided in the second variable winning device 32B is executed.

In addition, the special figure game time control process of step S303, the shift process to the small hit game state of step S304, the shift process to the big hit game state of step S305, the electric power support process of step S306, and the V distribution of step S307. Details of the setting process will be described later.

After executing the V distribution setting process in step S307, a game ball launch control process is executed in step S308. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 98. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In a succeeding step S309, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the RAM 114. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 115 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and is erased in the next main processing.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed has ended, so it is determined in step S310 whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the last normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S311, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114. In step S312, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S308 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and in the same manner. The fluctuation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S309 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, and therefore, the processing at the time of power failure after step S313 is executed. That is, in step S313, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, after that, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S314, and the access to the RAM 114 is prohibited in step S315. Continue infinite loop until can no longer be executed.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the special figure game time control processing of step S303 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure game time control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not various big hit flags and various small hit flags are stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The jackpot flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the jackpot gaming state transition processing, which will be described later, and the jackpot game is played in the transition processing. Cleared when ending the state. In addition, the small hitting flag is a flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed, and is stored when the gaming state is changed to the small hitting gaming state in the small hitting gaming state transition process described later. It is erased when the small hitting game state is ended in the transition process.

When the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed, the process after step S402, that is, the process for starting the game times of steps S404 to S406, the process for proceeding the game times of step S408, and the end of the game times of step S409 This special figure game time control processing is ended without executing any of the processing. That is, when the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed, the special figure game time is not started regardless of whether or not a prize has been paid to the operating ports 33, 34.

When the big hit game or the small hit game is not being executed, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the special figure display unit 43 is displaying a variation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first special figure display area AS and the second special figure display area BS is being variably displayed. Note that this determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The variable display flag is stored when the variable display is started for either the first special figure display portion AS or the second special figure display portion BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

If the special figure display unit 43 is not displaying the variation, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether the confirmation display on the special figure display unit 43 is completed. That is, after the variable display is finished, the result display is executed for a predetermined period. In this step, it is determined whether or not the final display is finished.

If the confirmation display has ended, the process proceeds to the game number starting process of steps S404 to S406. In the process for starting game times, first, at step S404, whether or not the common hold number CRN, which is the total of the hold hold storage numbers of the first special figure display section AS and the second special figure display section BS, is "0". To judge. When the common pending number CRN is "0", it means that the starting pending storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Therefore, the special figure game time control processing is ended as it is.

If the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the first special figure display holding area Ra or the second special figure display holding area Rb is set for variable display in step S405. After executing the data setting process for performing, the special figure fluctuation start processing for starting the variable display on the special figure display unit 43 and the variable display on the symbol display device 41 in step S406, The game time control process ends.

Here, the data setting process of step S405 and the special figure variation start process of step S406 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN stored in the second special view display holding area Rb is “0”. When the second start pending storage number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first special figure display unit in steps S502 to S506 is executed, and when the second start pending storage number RbN is not “0” In step S507 to step S512, the data setting process for the second special figure display unit is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting processing, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold storage number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the second special figure display portion BS hold information for variable display. Is stored, the data stored in the second special view display holding area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether the first startup hold storage number RaN is 1 or more. I am trying to do it. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first special figure display section holding area Ra and the second special figure display section holding area Rb, the second special figure corresponding to the second working port 34 is formed. The holding information stored in the display holding area Rb is prioritized.

In the data setting process for the first special figure display unit, first, in step S502, the first start pending storage number RaN of the first special figure display holding area Ra is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S503, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S504, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first special figure display section holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S505, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure display holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Ra1 and also to the second area Ra2→ The data in each area is shifted such as the first area Ra1, the third area Ra3→the second area Ra2, the fourth area Ra4→the third area Ra3.

In a succeeding step S506, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) which is information for causing the effect control device 82 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. .. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, the information that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the holding area Ra for the first special view display unit, that is, the first operating port 33. The special figure shift command including information indicating that the special figure shift command is selected is set, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Then, this data setting process is completed.

The special figure shift command set in step S506 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). Based on the received special figure shift command, the effect control device 82 executes a process for changing the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

In the data setting process for the second special figure display unit, first, in step S507, the second start pending storage number RbN of the second special figure display holding area Rb is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S508, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S509, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second special figure display section holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S510, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure display holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Rb1 and also to the second area Rb2→ The data in each area is shifted such that the first area Rb1, the third area Rb3→the second area Rb2, the fourth area Rb4→the third area Rb3.

In a succeeding step S511, the second special figure flag is set (stored) in the second special figure display section flag storage area (second special figure display information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The second special map flag is information for identifying that the start of the variable display this time is the variable display on the side of the second special map display BS, in other words, the game time of the second special map is executed. It is a flag that indicates that it is in the middle. The stored second special figure flag is erased when the game number of the second special figure ends.

In a succeeding step S512, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) which is information for causing the effect control device 82 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. .. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second special figure display holding area Rb, that is, the second operating port 34 A special figure shift command including information indicating that it corresponds is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Then, this data setting process is completed.

The special figure shift command set in step S512 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). In the production control device 82, based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the second hold light emitting portion 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41 are reduced in the number of holdings. Execute the process for changing in accordance with.

Next, the special figure variation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the special figure variation start process, first in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

If the second special figure flag is not stored, the success/failure determination is performed in step S602 by referring to the success/failure table for the first special figure (see FIG. 13A), and the second special figure flag is stored. If yes, then in step S603, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the second special figure (see FIG. 13B). After execution of step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the result of each of the hit/miss determinations is a jackpot result.

If the jackpot is won, it is determined in step S605 whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the second special figure flag is not stored, the jackpot type distribution determination is performed in step S606 by referring to the big hit type table for the first special figure (see FIG. 14A). On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is stored, in step S607, the jackpot classification table for the second special figure (see FIG. 14B) is referred to, and the jackpot classification is determined.

After step S606 or step S607 is executed, in step S608, a jackpot stop result setting process according to the distribution result is executed. This processing is to set a stop result for jackpot for the design in the special figure display unit 43, and if the jackpot classification is assigned to 5R jackpot result A as a result of the sorting determination in step S606, 5R. When the stop result for the jackpot result A is set and the jackpot type is distributed to the 5R jackpot result B, the stop result for the 5R jackpot result B (a stop result different from the stop result for the 5R jackpot result A) is output. Set. Further, as a result of the distribution determination in step S607, if the jackpot type is distributed to the 15 jackpot results, the stop result for the 15R jackpot result is set. As described above, the stop result of the pattern on the special figure display unit 43 is set based on the distribution result of the jackpot type, and substantially corresponds to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In that sense, the jackpot type counter C2 can be referred to as a jackpot pattern counter for drawing lots of the stop results of the symbols on the special figure display portion 43.

The result of stopping the pattern on the special figure display unit 43 may be selected based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Even in this case, the stop result of the pattern and the sorting result of the jackpot type correspond to each other. Further, the stop result of the pattern may be configured such that one kind of stop result corresponds to one jackpot type, or that a plurality of kinds of stop results correspond. The stop result may be shared between the first special figure and the second special figure. Specifically, the stop result for the 15R big hit result in the second special figure is the 5R big hit result in the first special figure. The configuration may overlap with the stop results for the A and 5R jackpot results B.

After execution of step S608, in step S609, various jackpot flags are set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 as information for identifying the jackpot type of this time. Specifically, one of the 5R flag A, the 5R flag B, and the 15R flag is set to correspond to the 5R jackpot result A, the 5R jackpot result B, and the 15R jackpot result, respectively.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S604 (it is determined that no big hit has occurred), it is determined in step S610 whether or not the result of the hit/miss determination in step S602 or step S603 is a small hit result. If the result is a small hit, it is determined in step S611 whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the second special figure flag is not stored, in step S612, the small hit type distribution determination is performed by referring to the first special figure small hit type table (see FIG. 15A). On the other hand, if the second special figure flag is stored, the small hit type sorting determination is performed in step S613 by referring to the small hit type table for the second special figure (see FIG. 15B). ..

After the execution of step S612 or step S613, in step S14, the setting process of the stop result for the small hit according to the distribution result is executed. This step is to set a stop result for small hit for the picture in the special figure display unit 43, and as a result of the sorting determination in step S612, when the small hit type is assigned to the disadvantage small hit result. , Set the stop result for the disadvantage small hit result. When the small hit type is assigned to the advantageous small hit result A in step S613, a stop result for the advantageous small hit result A is set, and the small hit type is assigned to the advantageous small hit result B. Is set to the stop result for the advantage small hit result B.

Note that the number of types of stop results for one small hit type and the fact that the stop results may be shared by the first special figure and the second special figure are the same as in the case of the big hit stop results.

After the execution of step S614, in step S615, various small hit flags are set in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 as information for identifying the small hit type of this time. Specifically, one of a disadvantageous small hit flag, an advantageous small hit A flag, and an advantageous small hit B flag is set as corresponding to the disadvantageous small hit result, the advantageous small hit result A, and the advantageous small hit result B, respectively. ..

If a negative determination is made in step S610 (it is determined that a small hit has not occurred), in step S616, a stop result corresponding to the disengagement result is set as the stop result in the special figure display unit 43.

After executing step S609, step S615, or step S616, the process proceeds to step S617, and it is determined whether or not the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The specific state flag is for the MPU 112 to grasp the period during which the game can be played by receiving the win/no win lottery of the second special diagram, and specifically, the period during which the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and the high level. After the frequency support mode ends, it is set for a period in which the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is larger than 0.

When it is determined that the specific state flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S618, and the value of the specific game number counter area OC provided in each counter area 114d of the RAM 114 is incremented by 1. The value (counter value) of the specific game number counter area OC is for the MPU 112 to specify the number of special figure game times (game times of the second special figure) in the specific state.

After execution of step S618 or when a negative determination is made in step S617, the flow advances to step S619 to execute the setting process of the special figure variation display time. Here, the process of setting the special figure variation display time will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure variation display time setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, that is, whether or not the second special figure is variable display. To judge. If it is determined that the second special map flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S702, and it is determined whether or not the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e.

When it is determined that the specific state flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S703, and it is determined whether or not the result of the present winning/non-winning lottery is a big hit or a small hit. This determination is performed by determining whether or not various types of big hit flags (step S609) or various types of small hit flags (step S615) are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e.

When it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit, the variable display time and the confirmation are determined by referring to the variable display time table A set as the variable display time table of the second special figure for the big hit or the small hit in the specific state. The display time is sorted (selected). The variable display time table A for the second special figure will be described with reference to FIG.

In the fluctuation display time table A, fluctuation pattern information (period information) corresponding to the fluctuation display time and the fixed display time is set (stored) in association with the value of the specific game number counter area OC and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. ) Has been. Specifically, after starting the high-frequency support mode, the first to eighth game times of the second special map, and the final game time in the high-frequency support mode, the ninth special game game time, and the high After the frequency support mode ends, the first to eighth times (10th to 17th times after the start of the high-frequency support mode) of the second special figure game times, the information of the variable display time and the fixed display time is the variation type. It is set in association with the value of the counter CS.

Regarding the first to eighth game times of the second special figure, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "199", the variation display time of 15 sec and the confirmed display time of 0.5 sec are selected. Is set. That is, after the start of the high-frequency support mode, when the big hit or the small hit in the first to eighth game times of the second special figure, the variable display time and the fixed display time are selected. There is. In this case, the presentation mode on the symbol display device 41 is such that a big hit or a small hit is notified after the reach display.

To explain supplementally about the reach display, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (pattern), and an open/close execution mode (big hit game state or small state). In the game machine in which the stop display result after the fluctuation display is the special display result (the big hit stop result or the small hit stop result) in the game times of the winning game state), the variable display (or the pattern) of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 (or The variable display) is a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display).

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, the winning symbol corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. It is a display state in which a reach symbol combination in which the combination is likely to be established is displayed, and in that state, variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns.

More specifically, as a pre-stage of ending the variable display of the symbols, a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and variable display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence under the situation where the reach line is formed.

More specifically, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 10). Then, the variation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display, and when the big hit game state occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. The variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is finished as is displayed on the reach line. In addition, when the small hitting game state occurs in the specific state, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line. The variable display of symbols in Z2 is terminated.

In addition, in the reach display, while the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variable display of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach is displayed by displaying a predetermined character etc. as a moving image on the background screen. Examples include those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, whether to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be determined using a random number counter for performance.

Note that the items of “state” and “effect mode” in FIG. 26 indicate the conditions under which the variable display time and the fixed display time in FIG. 26 can be set, and the variable display time and the fixed display time. It is merely added for convenience in order to make the relationship with the effect performed on the symbol display device 41 easy to understand, and is not stored as information in the variable display time table.

Regarding the ninth game play of the second special figure, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "199", the variation display time of 30 sec and the confirmed display time of 0.5 sec are selected. Is set to. In this case, the variable display time that is longer than the case of the first time to the eighth time is selected because it is the last game time of the high-frequency support mode, and therefore, in the symbol display device 41, to excite the game. This is because a production with a long production time is executed.

After the high-frequency support mode ends, for the first to eighth game times of the second special figure, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "199", the variation display time of 1 sec and 0 The fixed display time of 0.5 sec is set to be selected. In other words, after the high-frequency support mode ends, when the big hit or the small hit in the first to eighth game times of the second special figure, the short fluctuation display time is selected, and the big hit result or the small hit result is selected. It is configured to be notified promptly. Specifically, without executing reach display, after starting the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the time of stop display, main symbols with the same numbers are arranged on any of the activated lines L1 to L5.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process of the special figure variation display time of FIG. 25, if a negative determination is made in step S703 (it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is not won), the process proceeds to step S705, and the deviation for the specific state is performed. The variable display time and the finalized display time are sorted with reference to the variable display time table B set as the variable display time table of the second special figure. The variable display time table B for the second special figure will be described with reference to FIG.

Also in the variable display time table B, after the start of the high frequency support mode, the first to eighth game special game times and the high frequency support mode final game time of the ninth special special time The variation pattern information (variation display) for the game times of 1st to 8th (10th to 17th times after the start of the high-frequency support mode) after the end of the high-frequency support mode Information of time and confirmed display time) is set (stored) in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

Regarding the first to eighth game times of the second special figure, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "99", the variation display time of 15 sec and the fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected, When the fluctuation type counter CS is "100" to "199", the fluctuation display time of 4 sec and the confirmed display time of 0.5 sec are set to be selected. When the fluctuating display time of 15 sec and the fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected, as in the case of the fluctuating display time table A, the symbol display device 41 notifies the big hit or the small hit after the reach display. Further, when the variable display time of 4 sec and the confirmed display time of 0.5 sec are selected, the symbol display device 41 does not perform the reach display, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the combination of the deviations.

Regarding the ninth game game of the second special figure, when the fluctuation type counter CS is "0" to "199", the fluctuation display time of 30 sec and the fixed display time of 2.5 sec are set to be selected. Has been done. The purpose of selecting a long variable display time is the same as in the case of a big hit or a small hit. On the other hand, the fixed display time is set to be longer than in the case of the big hit or the small hit. This is a predetermined ending effect using the period of the final display of the ninth game time (the last game time of the high frequency support mode) so that the player can recognize that the high frequency support mode has ended. Is to execute.

After the high-frequency support mode ends, for the first to eighth game times of the second special figure, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "199", the variation display time of 5 sec and 0.5 sec The fixed display time of is set to be selected. That is, in each game time of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time and the fixed display time are unified except when the result of the win/loss lottery is a big hit or a small hit. ..

The variable display time and the fixed display time in the above case are set in relation to the second opening/closing pattern of the accessory opening/closing operation for the high-frequency support mode. The total (5.5 sec) is the same length as the waiting time (5.5 sec) of the second opening/closing pattern. The reason for this will be described in detail later. When the variable display time of 5 sec and the fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected, the symbol display device 41 does not perform the reach display, and the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the combination of the deviations.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process of the special figure variation display time of FIG. 25, if the negative determination is made in step S701 or step S702, the corresponding variation display time table (for example, the first special figure if the negative determination is made in step S701). Variable display time table) for selecting the variable display time and the fixed display time.

After the execution of step S704, step S705 or step S706, in step S707, the variable display time selected in each step is set in the variable display time counter area provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the variable display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19) is activated. After that, the setting process of the variable display time ends.

Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 24, after executing the variation display time setting process of step S619, the special figure variation command and the special figure type command are sent to the effect control device 82 in step S620. Set as a command to be sent. The special figure variation command includes variation display time information (including presence/absence of reach). Further, the special figure classification command includes information of a big hit type and a small hit type (and/or a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern on the special figure display portion 43).

After that, in step S621, the variable display of the design is started on the display unit corresponding to the current special figure game time among the first special figure display section AS and the second special figure display section BS. In this case, if the second special figure flag is not stored in the RAM 114, the result display section corresponding to the current special figure game time is specified as the first special figure display section AS, and the second special figure flag is specified. If is stored, it is specified that the result display section corresponding to the current special figure game time is the second special figure display section BS. Then, this fluctuation start processing is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure game time control process of FIG. 22, in the case where a negative determination is made in step S402 (determined that the variable display is being performed) or in the case of negative determination in step S403 (the determination display is not finished) Advances to step S407, and executes the game-time progression processing of steps S407 and S408. In the game time progression process, first, in step S407, it is determined whether or not the variable display time of the current special figure game time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S408. In the variable display process, display control of the result display section is performed so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display section related to the special figure game time (light emission control of each display segment. ), and ends the game number control process.

If the variable display time has elapsed, the special figure confirmation display processing (game time end processing) is executed in step S409. The special figure finalizing display process is for finalizing the design of the special figure display unit 43 based on the stop result set in the process of step S608, step S614, or step S616. Here, the special figure confirmation display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

In the special figure confirmation display process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the figure (stop result) is being confirmed and displayed on the special figure display unit 43. If it is determined that the confirmation display is not being performed, the confirmation display time is set in step S802. In this step, the confirmed display time selected in step S704, step S705, or step S706 of FIG. 25 is set in the confirmed display time counter area provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the fixed display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19) is activated.

In a succeeding step S803, fixed display start processing, that is, processing for stopping display of the pattern which is variably displayed on the special figure display portion 43 is executed. In this case, based on the stop result setting process of step S608, step S614, or step S616 of FIG. 24, the special figure display unit 43 is display-controlled so that the mode of the stop display of the pattern is the set stop result. To do.

In a succeeding step S804, a special figure variation end command is set, and thereafter, this finalized display processing is ended. The special figure variation end command includes information on the fixed display time. The set special figure fluctuation end command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). By receiving the special figure fluctuation end command, the effect control device 82 recognizes that the fixed display is started on the special figure display unit 43 and the fixed display time.

The setting process (transmission process) of the special figure variation end command may be omitted. In this case, the special figure variation command (step S620 of FIG. 24) is set so that the information of the fixed display time is included.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made (determination that the confirmation display is being performed) in step S801, the process proceeds to step S805, and it is determined whether the confirmation display time has elapsed. If the confirmed display time has elapsed, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114.

If it is determined that the second special map flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S807, and a process for ending the high frequency support mode for ending the high frequency support mode is executed. Further, in step S808, a process for ending the specific state is executed, and thereafter, in step S809, a process of clearing (erasing) the second special figure flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e is executed. The processing for ending the high frequency support mode in step S807 and the processing for ending the specific state in step S808 will be described in detail later. After execution of step S809 or when a negative determination is made in steps S805 and S806, this special figure finalization display processing ends.

The design (stop result) stopped and displayed on each special map display area AS, BS is determined when the next special figure game time (variable display) is not started on the special figure display part where the design is stopped and displayed. Even after the display time has elapsed, the stop display continues. For this reason, if the reserved memory for the next special figure game time does not exist, a new reserved memory occurs, and the result of the winning or failure lottery of the immediately preceding game time is generated until the next special figure game time is started. The corresponding stop result continues to be displayed. Also, when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is transitioned to, the special figure game that triggered the transition to the game state until these game states end and a new special figure game time is started. The result of stopping is displayed continuously.

<Small hit game transition processing>
Next, the processing for shifting to the small hitting game state in step S304 in the normal processing (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, is stored at the start of the jackpot game, and is erased when the jackpot game ends.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed (the jackpot game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether the jackpot game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hitting game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. The small hit game flag is a flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed.

When it is determined that the small hit game is not being executed (the small hit game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S903, and the various small hit flags (step S615 of FIG. 24) are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. It is determined whether it is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not the small hit is in a winning state.

When it is determined that various small hit flags are stored, it is determined in step S904 whether it is the end timing of the special figure game times. If it is not the ending timing of the special figure game times, the process of shifting to the small hitting game state is finished as it is. In addition, even if the positive determination (determined that the big hit game is being executed) in step S901 and the negative determination (determined that various small hit flags are not stored) in step S903, this small hit game state The transition processing to is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the special figure game times, in step S905, a small hit game start process is executed. In the start processing, the small hitting game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, and it is checked that the second variable winning device 32B is in the closed state before the start of the small hitting game. Further, in the present starting process, the opening period setting process for waiting without starting the opening of the second variable winning device 32B at the time of starting the small hit game is executed. In the opening period setting process, a value corresponding to the opening period is set in the first timer counter area TC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value (counter value) set in the first timer counter area TC1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In a succeeding step S906, a process of setting "1" to the round counter area RC1 provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed to set the number of times of executing the round game in the small hit game.

In the following step S907, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined effect content is executed.

In a succeeding step S908, after executing an external signal setting process, the process of shifting to the small hitting game state is ended. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the small hit signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the small hit signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the small hit signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the small hit signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device outputs the small hit signal. It is possible to understand that a hit has occurred.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination (determination that the small hit game is being executed) is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S909, and it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. When the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the process of shifting to the small hitting game state is finished as it is.

When the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S910, and a small hit opening/closing process for opening/closing the second big winning opening 351 of the second variable winning device 32B is executed. Here, the small hit opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the small hit opening/closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the second special winning opening 351 of the second variable winning device 32B is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 353 of the second variable winning device 32B. When the second special winning opening 351 is not open, it is determined in step S1102 whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is “0”, and in step S1103, the first timer counter area TC1 of the RAM 114. Is determined to be "0".

When the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" or when the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is not "0", the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC1 is not “0” and the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the advantageous small hit result is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the A or advantageous small hit B flag is stored.

If any of the advantageous small hit flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B is "900" (corresponding to 1.8 sec) in the first timer counter area TC1. Set. On the other hand, if none of the above-described advantageous small hit flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S1106, and as the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B, “50” (corresponding to 0.1 sec is set in the first timer counter area TC1). ) Is set.

After the execution of step S1105 or step S1106, in step S1107, the setting process of the upper limit winning number to the second variable winning a prize device 32B in the small hit game is performed. Specifically, a value of "10" corresponding to the maximum winning number is set in the first winning counter area PC1 provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114.

In a succeeding step S1108, the driving unit 353 for the opening/closing door 352 is brought into a driving state in order to open the second variable winning device 32B. Then, in step S1109, the opening command is set, and the opening/closing process for the small hitting ends. The set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

When it is determined in step S1101 that the second special winning opening 351 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S1110, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is "0". .. When the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is not "0", it is determined in step S1111 whether or not a prize has been awarded to the second variable winning device 32B. If no prize has been generated, the opening/closing process for this small hit is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step S1112. In a succeeding step S1113, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the small winning/closing processing for this small hit is ended as it is.

When a positive determination is made in step S1113 or step S1110, it means that the closing condition for the second special winning opening 351 is satisfied. In such a case, in step S1114, the driving unit 353 is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the second special winning opening 351.

In the following step S1115, the value of the round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and the ending start processing is executed in step S1116. In the start process, a waiting time for ending is set for ending the small hitting game without starting the next game time. Specifically, the waiting time information for ending stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

After that, in step S1117, after setting an ending command, the main winning opening/closing processing is ended. The ending command thus set is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

Returning to the description of the process for shifting to the small hitting game state in FIG. 28, after executing the small hitting opening/closing process in step S910, whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is “0” in step S911 is determined. judge. In step S912, it is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. When the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0" or when the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the process for shifting to the small hitting gaming state is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter area RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, after executing the end processing of the small hit game in step S913, this small hit game The process of shifting to the state ends. Here, the end processing of the small hit game of step S913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the small hit game ending process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a V winning flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. This V winning flag is stored in the V winning process of step S106 in the timer interrupt process of FIG.

Here, the V winning process in step S106 will be described. Further, as the processing related to the V winning, the V distribution setting processing of step S307 in the normal processing will be described.

First, the V distribution setting process of step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the V allocation setting process, first in step S1301, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small hit game. If it is the start timing, in step S1302, "500" corresponding to 1 sec is set in the second timer counter area TC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value (counter value) set in the second timer counter area TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In a succeeding step S1303, "1" is set in the distribution number counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 114d. The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution count counter area HC is used by the MPU 112 to specify the number of operations of the distribution member 358.

When a negative determination is made in step S1301 or after the processing of step S1303 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the V winning area 356 by grasping the driving state of the distribution member driving unit 359. When the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the discharge area 357, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is not "0", the main distribution setting process is ended, while when it is determined that it is "0", the distribution count counter is determined in step S1306. It is determined whether the value of the area HC is "0".

When a negative determination is made in step S1306, that is, when the value of the distribution number counter area HC is “1”, the distribution member 358 is displaced to the position on the distribution side to the V winning area 356 in step S1307. Let In subsequent step S1308, "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) is set in the timer counter TC. After the execution of step S1308 or when an affirmative decision is made in step S1306, the main distribution setting processing ends.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, that is, when the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the V winning area 356, the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is "0" in step S1309. It is determined whether or not the time period in which the distribution member 358 is positioned on the distribution side to the V winning area 356 has elapsed. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1309, the distribution member 358 is displaced to the position on the distribution side to the discharge area 357 in step S1310, and then the value of the distribution count counter area HC is decremented by 1 in step S1311. Execute the process. After execution of step S1311, or when a negative determination is made in step S1309, the main distribution setting process ends.

Next, the V winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the V winning process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1402, based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 362 provided in the second variable winning device 32B, it is determined whether or not the V winning has occurred. It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the detection area of the detection sensor 362.

When it is determined that the V winning is generated, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the V winning is valid. The valid period is a predetermined period that is set in advance, and, for example, a period during which a small hit game is executed or a V side distribution period of the distribution member 358 is set as the valid period. If it is determined that it is not within the valid period, the process proceeds to step S1404, an error command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82, and then the present V winning process is ended. The set error command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 21 ), and the effect control device 82 displays the display control device 212 so that a predetermined error notification is executed. The light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is during the valid period, the process advances to step S1405 to store the V winning flag in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. In a succeeding step S1406, a V winning command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82. The V winning command is a command for notifying the effect control device 82 that a V winning has occurred, and the set V winning command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 21). Sent. In the production control device 82, when the V winning command is received, the design display device 41, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 notify the occurrence of the V winning, or the production of celebrating the V winning is executed. The display control device 212 and the like are controlled so as to control.

After executing step S1406, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S1401 or a negative judgment is made in step S1402, the present V winning process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the ending process of the small hit game of FIG. 30, when it is determined that the V winning flag is stored in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202, and the process of setting the V winning flag corresponding to the small hit type. To execute. This processing is performed by referring to various small hit flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 and storing the V winning flag corresponding to the small hit flag in the various flag storage areas 114e. For example, the small hit game to be ended is triggered by winning the advantageous small hit result A, and when the advantageous small hit A flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, the V winning flag is obtained. The V winning flag A is stored as. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to know that the V jackpot game should be started and the type of the V jackpot game.

In a succeeding step S1203, a process of erasing the V winning flag, various small hit flags and small hit game flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e is executed. In a succeeding step S1204, a V winning command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82, and thereafter, the ending process of this small hit game is ended. The V winning command is a command for notifying the effect control device 82 that the V jackpot game is started and the type of the V jackpot game, and the set V winning command is an external output of the normal process (FIG. 21). It is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the process. In the effect control device 82, when the V win command is received, the display control device 212 is configured so that the effect of informing the V jackpot game is started and the type of the V jackpot game is executed by the symbol display device 41 or the like. Etc.

On the other hand, when a negative determination (determination that the V winning flag is not stored) is made in step S1201, the various small hit flags and small hit games stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are calculated in step S1205. The process of erasing the flag is executed, and then the ending process of this small hit game is ended.

<Transition process to jackpot gaming state>
Next, with reference to the flow chart in FIG. 33, a description will be given of the transition processing to the jackpot gaming state in step S305 in the normal processing (FIG. 21). Note that, of the various processes included in this transition process, the same processes as those included in the above-mentioned transition process to the small hitting game state will be simplified as appropriate.

In the big hit game state transition process, first in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is being executed. When it is determined that the small hit game is being executed, the transition processing to the main big hit game state is ended, while when it is determined that the small hit game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S1502, and the big hit game is Determine if it is running.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed, it is determined in step S1503 whether various V winning flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not to start the V jackpot game. If it is determined that the various V-winning flags are not stored, the process proceeds to step S1504, and it is determined whether or not various jackpot flags (step S609 of FIG. 24) are stored in the various-flag storage area 114e. That is, it is determined whether or not to start a normal jackpot game which is not the V jackpot game.

When it is determined that the various jackpot flags are not stored, the transition processing to the main jackpot gaming state is ended, while when it is determined that the various jackpot flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S1505 and the special figure. It is determined whether it is the end timing of the game game. When it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the special figure game times, the transition processing to the main jackpot gaming state is ended.

If it is determined in step S1505 that it is the end timing of the special figure game times, or if it is determined in step S1503 that various V winning flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S1506, and the jackpot game start process is executed. To do. In the start process, the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and the opening period setting process is executed.

In a succeeding step S1507, it is determined whether or not the 15R flag or the V winning flag A is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. If it is determined that these flags are stored, the flow advances to step S1508 to execute processing of setting "15" in the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. On the other hand, if it is determined that the flags are not stored, the process advances to step S1509 to execute a process of setting "5" in the round counter area RC1.

After the execution of step S1508 or step S1509, the opening command is set in step S1510, the external signal setting process is further executed in step S1511, and then the transition process to the main jackpot gaming state is ended.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the jackpot game is being executed, the process advances to step S1512 to determine whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the main jackpot gaming state is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, then the process proceeds to step S1513, and a jackpot opening/closing process for opening/closing the first big winning opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is executed. In the big hit opening/closing process, when the first big winning opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is closed, the opening/closing door 322 is driven on condition that the round number counter RC is “1” or more. The first special winning opening 321 is opened by putting the portion 323 into a driven state. When the first special winning opening 321 is open, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 321, or a predetermined number (10) of game balls are won. The driving state of the driving unit 323 is stopped and the first special winning opening 321 is closed under the condition that it is present.

After executing the big hit opening/closing process in step S1513, it is determined in step S1514 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is “0”. In step S1515, it is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. When the value of the round counter area RC1 is not “0” or when the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the transition processing to the main jackpot gaming state is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S1516, a transition process at the end of the jackpot game is executed, and then this jackpot. The process of shifting to the gaming state is ended. Here, the shift process at the end of the jackpot game in step S1516 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the transition process at the end of the jackpot game, first in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 store the 5R flag A, the 15R flag or the various V winning flags. That is, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the jackpot in which the support mode shifts to high-frequency support after the jackpot game is stored.

If it is determined that any of the above flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S1602, and processing for deleting various jackpot flags, V winning flags, and jackpot game flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e is performed. Execute. In a succeeding step S1603, a high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e. Thereby, after the jackpot game is over, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In a succeeding step S1604, the value of the high frequency game number counter area JC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to "9". The value of the high frequency game number counter area JC (counter value) is for counting the number of times of execution of the game number of the second special figure in the high frequency support mode.

In a succeeding step S1605, the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, and then in a step S1606, the high frequency support for notifying the effect control device 82 that the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. A command (high-frequency support setting information) is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After the execution of step S1606, the transition process at the end of the main jackpot game is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1601 that the 5R flag A, 15R flag or various V winning flags are not stored, the process proceeds to step S1607, various jackpot flags and jackpot games stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. Clear the flag. Then, the transition process at the end of this jackpot game is ended.

Next, the processing for ending the high frequency support mode of step S807 in the processing for displaying special figure confirmation display in FIG. 27 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the process for ending the high frequency support mode, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, the process for ending the high-frequency support mode is ended, while if it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1702. A process of subtracting 1 from the value of the high frequency game number counter area JC is executed. As a result, the number of executions of the special figure game times, which is grasped by the MPU 112, after the shift to the high frequency support mode is updated.

The process for ending the high frequency support mode is executed only when the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e in step S806 in the special figure confirmation display process of FIG. It Therefore, the number of executions of the special figure game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is updated only for the game times of the second special figure. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game or in the middle of the high frequency support mode, the suspension information of the first special map on the side disadvantageous to the player is stored and the suspension information of the second special map on the advantageous side is stored. Even if there is no situation, the number of remaining special game times in the high frequency support mode is not reduced by the game times of the first special figure. As a result, the player can favorably enjoy the profit of the high-frequency support mode in which it is easy to generate a prize in the second operating port 34 and the winning/winning lottery of the second special drawing is easily received. ..

In a succeeding step S1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the high frequency game number counter area JC is "0". When it is determined that the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is not "0", the process for ending the high-frequency game support mode is terminated, while the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is "0". If determined, the process advances to step S1704 to erase the high frequency support flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e. As a result, the high frequency support mode ends, and the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Here, the process for ending the high frequency support mode is executed when it is determined in step S805 in the process for displaying special figure confirmation display in FIG. 27 that the confirmed display time has elapsed. That is, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support is performed at the end timing of the final reference number of times in the high-frequency support mode (the ninth time after the shift to the high-frequency support mode) in the confirmation display in the game time of the second special figure. The mode is configured to end.

After the execution of step S1704, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not the variable display of the universal figure game times is being displayed. When it is determined that the variation of the universal figure game times is being displayed, it proceeds to step S1706, and it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/disapproving lottery of the universal figure game times is a result corresponding to the opening result (per universal figure). To do. If the result corresponds to the release result, the process proceeds to step S1707, and the process of changing the stop result of the universal game time to the disengagement result is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the high frequency support mode is ended during the variable display of the universal figure game time, the stop result of the universal figure game time is forcibly rewritten to the disengagement result. For this reason, even if the result corresponding to the open result is won in the universal drawing win/loss lottery performed before the end of the high frequency support mode, after the end of the high frequency support mode The accessory opening/closing game of 34a is not executed. If the high-frequency support mode ends during execution of the fixed display of the regular game time, the stop result has already been displayed, so the change of the regular game stop result is not executed.

After execution of step S1707 or when a negative determination is made in step S1706, the flow advances to step S1708 to execute processing for ending the variable display of the universal figure game times. That is, when the high-frequency support mode ends during the variable display of the universal figure game times, the variable display of the universal figure game times ends at the end timing of the support mode. As a result, the state in which the universal figure game time is preferentially ended is ended with the end of the high frequency support mode.

After execution of step S1708 or when a negative determination is made in step S1705 (judgment that the variation of the universal figure game times is not being displayed), the process proceeds to step S1709, and the effect control device 82 is notified that the high frequency support mode has ended. The high-frequency support end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After the execution of step S1709, the process for ending the high frequency support mode ends.

Next, the processing for ending the specific state in step S808 in the special figure confirmation display processing in FIG. 27 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the processing for ending the specific state, first in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. As described above, the specific state flag is for the MPU 112 to grasp the period in which the game can be played by receiving the winning/losing lottery of the second special figure, and is a flag set when the high frequency support mode is started. Yes (step S1605 in FIG. 34).

When it is determined that the specific state flag is stored, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. If the high-frequency support flag is not stored, that is, if it is determined that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, the process advances to step S1803, and it is determined whether the second start pending storage number RbN is “0”. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not the reserved memory of the second special figure does not exist.

When it is determined that the second start pending storage number RbN is "0", the value of the specific game number counter area OC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" in step S1804. .. As a result, the counting of the game times of the second special figure in the specific state ends. In a succeeding step S1805, a process of deleting the specific state flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e is executed.

After executing step S1805, if a negative determination is made in step S1801, a positive determination is made in step S1802, or a negative determination is made in step S1803, the process for ending the specific state is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, the power combination support process of step S306 in the normal process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the process for supporting electric power, the general figure game time control process is executed in step S2001, the general figure game state transition process is executed in step S2002, and the process for support is ended.

That is, the electric role support process basically has the same configuration as the process configuration of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 22) and the jackpot game state transition process (FIG. 33). That is, the universal figure game time control process of step S2001 corresponds to the special figure game time control process of FIG. 22, and the universal figure game state transition process of step S2002 corresponds to the transition process to the jackpot game state of FIG. .. Hereinafter, the processing of the game time control processing (step S2001) and the game state transition processing (step S2002) on the universal figure side will be described in detail.

<Universal game time control processing>
First, the universal figure game time control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the universal figure game time control process, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support status flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The support status flag is stored when the accessory opening/closing game of the universal electric augment 34a is started in the universal figure game state transition processing, which will be described later, and similarly, the accessory open/close game is ended in the universal figure game state transition processing. It is erased when it is made.

If it is not in the support state, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the general-purpose display unit 44 is in the variable display. Note that this determination is performed by determining whether or not the universal figure variation display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The general figure variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started on the general figure display unit 44, and is erased when the variation display ends.

If the display unit for general figure 44 is not in the variable display, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the number FN of general figure reservation storages is "0". If the number FN of the universal figure pending storage is “0”, the processing for supporting electric power is ended as it is.

When the number FN of stored universal figure reservations is not "0", a universal figure data setting process for setting the data stored in the reserve area Rc for electric use for variable display is executed in step S2104. In the universal figure data setting processing, the number FN of the universal figure reservation storages is decremented by 1 and the data stored in the first area of the electric-role reserve area Rc is moved to the execution area for the universal figure. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in each storage area of the electric-role reserve area Rc is executed. Then, the universal figure shift command, which is information for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the data in the holding area on the universal figure side has been shifted, is set.

In the following step S2105, the universal figure variation start process is executed, and thereafter, the regular figure game time control process is ended.

Here, the universal figure variation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the universal figure fluctuation start process, first in step S2201, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, then in step S2202, a determination is made (support lottery) with reference to the universal figure acceptance/rejection table for low-frequency support mode (FIG. 17(a)). If it is in the high frequency support mode, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not to refer to the general/universal winning/disabling table for the high frequency support mode (FIG. 17B). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the universal figure win/loss lot is higher than that in the low-frequency support mode, and it is easy to win the open result. Has become.

After the execution of step S2202 or step S2203, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the result of the lottery in step S2202 or step S2203 is an open result (result per ordinary figure). When the open result is won, the process proceeds to step S2205, and it is determined whether or not a high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e.

When it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, in step S2206, processing for setting a stop result for the low winning a prize combination opening/closing game (FIG. 18A) is executed. In step S2206, the MPU 112 stores a universal figure hit flag for specifying in the various flag storage area 114e that the result of this universal figure win/loss lottery is an open result.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2207, and processing for setting a stop result for the high-prize winning a prize open/close game (FIG. 18B) is executed. Further, in step S2207, a universal figure hit flag for specifying that the result of the current universal figure win/loss lottery is the release result is stored in the various flag storage area 114e.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204 (it is determined that the result is not the open result), the flow proceeds to step S2208, and processing for setting a stop result for out-of-general figure is executed.

After performing any of the processing of step S2206 to step S2208, in step S2209, setting of the figure variation display time for setting the variation display time of the present figure game times in the figure display unit 44. Execute the process.

In the process of setting the universal figure variable display time, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode is checked by checking the presence or absence of the high frequency support flag. If the high frequency support mode is set, the ROM 113 is stored. The stored general-purpose figure display time information for the high-frequency support mode is acquired, and a value corresponding to the information is set in the general-use figure display time counter area provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. In the present embodiment, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time and the fixed display time of the universal figure game times are uniform times regardless of whether or not the result of the universal figure win/loss lottery is a hit. Is set to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40, the variable display time and the fixed display time are set to 1 sec and 0.5 sec, respectively.

On the other hand, in the case of the low frequency support mode, the general figure fluctuation display time information for the low frequency support mode stored in the ROM 113 is acquired, and the value corresponding to the information is acquired as the general figure fluctuation display time counter area. Set to. When the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the variable display time of the universal figure game time is set to be a longer time (for example, 30 sec) than in the high frequency support mode. Note that the fixed display time does not necessarily have to be longer than that in the high-frequency support mode, and may be the same time.

After the process of setting the figure change display time is executed in step S2209, the figure change command and figure change type command are set in step S2210. The command for changing the general figure includes information on the display time for changing the general figure. Further, the general figure type command includes information on the type of the accessory opening/closing game (and/or the stop result of the general figure game time). The general figure variation command and general figure type command that have been set are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing.

In a succeeding step S2211, a process of starting the variable display of the picture is executed on the general-purpose display unit 44, and then the normal-diagram fluctuation start process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the universal figure game time control process (FIG. 38), when it is determined in step S2102 that the variable display is being performed, the flow proceeds to step S2106, and whether or not the variable display time of the current universal figure game time has elapsed. Determine whether.

If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S2107 to execute the variable display process. In the variable display process, display control of the general-use display unit 44 (light emission control of each display segment) is performed so that the display-use segments are turned on and off in a predetermined order. .. After that, the regular-game drawing game control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed, then the flow proceeds to step S2108, and the universal figure fixing display process is executed. In the figure finalization display process, the variable display on the display section 44 is ended so that the picture on the general figure display section 44 is stopped and displayed according to the stop result set in steps S2206 to S2208 of FIG. Let In addition, in this step, the universal figure variation end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. The universal figure fluctuation end command includes information on the fixed display time of the universal figure game times this time.

<Universal game state transition processing>
Next, the universal figure game state transition process of step S2002 in the electric power combination support process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The accessory opening/closing game flag is a flag indicating that the accessory opening/closing game of the ordinary electric accessory 34a is being executed.

When it is determined that the accessory opening/closing game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S2302, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the universal figure game time is ended. If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the universal figure game time, this game state transition processing is ended, while if it is determined that it is the end timing of the universal figure game time, the various flags are stored in step S2303. It is determined whether or not the per-universal figure flag is stored in the area 114e. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the universal figure hit/miss lottery this time is the opening result, and the accessory opening/closing game of the universal electric accessory 34a should be started.

If it is determined that the universal figure hit flag is not stored, this game state transition processing is ended, while if it is determined that the universal figure hit flag is stored, the flow proceeds to step S2304, and the accessory opening/closing Perform game start processing. In the start process, the accessory opening/closing game flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and the opening period setting process of the accessory opening/closing game is executed.

In a succeeding step S2305, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. This determination is performed by determining whether or not a high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e.

When it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S2306, and various counters of the RAM 114 are executed in order to execute the accessory opening/closing game for the low frequency support mode (low winning prize opening/closing game (FIG. 18A)). The opening/closing control counter area RC2 provided in the area 114d is set to 1. In the opening/closing control counter area RC2, the opening/closing control counter area RC2 changes the closed state from the closed state to the closed state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode, it proceeds to step S2307, the accessory opening/closing game for the high-frequency support mode (high winning prize opening/closing game (Fig. 18(b)) is executed, "4" is set in the opening/closing control counter area RC2.

After executing the processing of step S2306 or step S2307, the universal figure opening command is set in step S2308. The set universal figure opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. In addition to the opening period, the universal figure opening command includes information indicating the type of the accessory opening/closing game.

In a succeeding step S2309, external signal setting processing is executed, and thereafter, the normal/universal figure game state transition processing is ended. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the accessory output signal output terminal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the release signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the accessory release signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the accessory release signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the management control device. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the accessory opening/closing game is executed.

If it is determined in step S2301 that the accessory opening/closing game is being executed, the process advances to step S2310 to determine whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening period has not elapsed, this game state transition processing is terminated, while if it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, the flow proceeds to step S2311 and accessory character opening/closing processing is executed. .. Here, the accessory opening/closing process of step S2311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the accessory opening/closing process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the universal electric accessory 34a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is performed based on the driving state of the electric accessory driving unit 34b. When it is determined that the general electric accessory 34a is not open, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "0", and in step S2403 various counters of the RAM 114 are determined. It is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area TC3 provided in the area 114d is "0".

When the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is “0” or when the value of the third timer counter area TC3 is not “0”, the main product opening/closing process is ended while the opening/closing control counter area RC2 of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is ended. When the value is not “0” and the value of the third timer counter area TC3 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2404, and the electric accessory driving unit 34b is set to the driving state to open the general electric accessory 34a. Yes (accessory release processing).

In a succeeding step S2405, setting processing for each opening/closing control is executed. The setting process for each opening/closing control will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the setting process for each opening/closing control, first in step S2501, it is determined whether or not a high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2502, and it is determined whether or not the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is “4”, that is, the setting of the general electric appliance 34a to be set. It is determined whether or not the opening operation is the first opening in the high winning prize opening/closing game. When it is determined that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "4", "1500" (corresponding to 3 sec) is set in the third timer counter area TC3 in step S2503. The value set in the set third timer counter area TC3 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In a succeeding step S2504, as the upper limit winning number for the second operation port 34 in one character opening/closing game, the upper limit winning number corresponds to the second winning counter area PC2 provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Set the value of "4". After that, the setting process for each opening/closing control ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2502 that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is not “4”, that is, the opening operation of the setting target general electric auditors article 34a is the second or later opening in the high winning prize opening/closing game. If so, the process advances to step S2505 to set "500" (corresponding to 1 sec) in the third timer counter area TC3. After that, the setting process for each opening/closing control ends.

When it is determined in step S2501 that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2506, and in the third timer counter area TC3, “100” (0 (Corresponding to 2 sec) is set. In a succeeding step S2507, the value of the second prize winning counter area PC2 is set to "10", and thereafter, the setting process for each opening/closing control is ended.

Returning to the description of the accessory opening/closing process in FIG. 42, after executing the setting process for each opening/closing control in step S2405, the universal figure opening command is set in step S2406, and the main accessory opening/closing process is ended. The set universal figure release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process.

Further, when it is determined in step S2401 that the utility battery 34a is open, the process proceeds to step S2407, and it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area TC3 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the third timer counter area TC3 is not "0", it is determined in step S2408 whether or not the game ball has won the second operating port 34. If it is determined that no prize has been generated, the main product opening/closing process is ended, while if it is determined that a prize has been generated, the value of the second prize counter area PC2 is set to 1 in step S2409. After decrementing, it is determined in step S2410 whether or not the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is "0", and if not "0", the main product opening/closing process is ended.

If the value of the third timer counter area TC3 is "0" in step S2407, or if the value of the second prize winning counter area PC2 is "0" in step S2410, the closing condition for the universal electric vehicle 34a is satisfied. It means that you have done it. In this case, in step S2411, the electric accessory driving unit 34b is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the general electric accessory 34a (accessory closing processing).

In a succeeding step S2412, it is determined whether or not the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is "0". That is, whether the switching to the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a is caused by the lapse of the opening time in the one-time opening/closing control, or the winning number of the game balls into the second operating port 34 is the upper limit winning number. It is determined whether it is due to reaching. When it is determined that the value of the second prize counter area PC2 is not "0", that is, when the general electric officer 34a is switched to the closed state due to the passage of the opening time in one opening/closing control. In step S2413, the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and in step S2414 it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is not "0", then in step S2415 the second timer counter area TC3 is set to "2750" (5.5 sec) as a waiting period until the next opening process is executed. Equivalent) is set. In the following step S2416, a universal figure closing command for notifying the effect control device 82 that the universal electric accessory 34a is closed is set, and thereafter, the main accessory opening/closing process is ended. The set universal figure closing command is transmitted to the performance control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2414, the operation proceeds to step S2417, and the waiting time for ending the universal figure is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the waiting time is set in the opening/closing control counter area RC2. After the execution of step S2417, the main accessory opening/closing process ends.

In addition, when it is determined that the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is “0” in step S2412, that is, the number of winning game balls to the second working opening 34 reaches the upper limit winning number. When the ordinary electric accessory 34a is switched to the closed state by proceeding to step S2418, the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is cleared to "0". After that, after setting a waiting time for ending the universal figure in the above step, the opening/closing process of the main character is ended. As a result, the accessory opening/closing game ends without executing the remaining opening/closing control.

Returning to the explanation of the universal figure gaming state transition processing of FIG. 41, after executing the accessory opening/closing processing in step S2311, in step S2312, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is “0”. To judge. Then, in step S2313, it is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. When the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is not “0” or when the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, this game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "0" and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S2314, the ending process of the accessory opening/closing game is executed. In the end process, various flags such as the per-universal figure flag and the accessory opening/closing game flag are erased. Then, this game state transition processing is ended.

<About basic playability>
Next, the basic playability of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state.

In the normal gaming state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode, as described above, it is impossible to expect a prize to be awarded to the second operating port 34. Therefore, the player hits the game ball on the left route by hitting the so-called left, and aims to win the first working opening 33.

When a winning is generated in the first working opening 33, the winning/winning lottery of the first special figure (big hit probability 1/200) is executed. Then, when the big hit is won by the win/no win lottery, the big hit game in which the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed for a plurality of rounds (5 rounds) is executed (transition route 401). Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can be won in the first variable winning device 32A, the player increases the turning operation amount of the firing handle 60 and launches the game ball to the right route. Will be done (so-called right-handed).

Where 5R jackpot result B and 5R jackpot result A are set as jackpot types in the first special diagram, when the jackpot type is assigned to 5R jackpot result B, the support mode after the jackpot game is infrequent The support mode is entered, and the normal game state is restored (transition route 402). In this case, the player returns the shooting mode of the game ball to left-handed, and plays again with the aim of generating the big hit of the first special figure.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is assigned to the 5R jackpot result A, the support mode after the jackpot game is over is shifted to the high frequency support mode, and the winning state is likely to occur in the second working port 34 ( Transition route 403). This state continues until the game number of the second special figure of the ending reference number of times (9 times) is completed, and during this time, the player is likely to receive the win/loss lottery of the second special figure. Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can be won in the second operating port 34, the player will continue to hit the right and play the game after the jackpot game is over.

Where the winning/winning lottery of the second special map includes the small hitting lottery, when the small hitting lottery is won by the winning/winning lottery of the second special map, the high distribution mode (FIG. 16(b)) is used. A small hit game in which the 2 variable winning device 32B is opened and closed is executed (transition route 404). Since only the game balls flowing down the right route can be won in the second variable winning device 32B, if a small hit occurs, the player will hit the right and play. When a V prize is generated in the small hit game, a V large hit game in which the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed for a plurality of rounds (15 rounds or 5 rounds) after the small hit game is finished. It is executed (transition route 405).

When the small hit game is executed in the high distribution mode, the opening time (1.8 sec) of the second variable winning device 32B is longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, and the game ball is in the normal mode. If it is fired, it is possible to easily generate a prize in the second variable winning device 32B. Further, under the high distribution mode, the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state and the period in which the distribution member 358 is arranged on the V winning region 356 side overlap with each other, so that the second variable winning is achieved. It is easy for the game balls that have won the device 32B to be distributed to the V winning area 356 side. Therefore, by generating a prize in the second variable winning device 32B, a V prize is always generated or almost generated. That is, it is possible to almost certainly expect the occurrence of the V jackpot due to the occurrence of the jackpot winning.

In this way, the probability of occurrence of the V jackpot is the same as or close to the probability of the small hit in the win/win lottery of the second special map, but the probability of the small win is the same as that of the big win in the win/win lottery of the first special map. It is 1/10, which is higher than the probability. Therefore, in the situation where the support mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the big hit (V big hit) can be generated with high probability. That is, the high-frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 is a gaming state equivalent to a high-probability mode (so-called probability variation state or high-probability state) in which the winning probability of the jackpot is increased, as the player's sense.

Furthermore, when a V jackpot is generated, the jackpot type is distributed, although there are 16RV jackpot results and 6RV jackpot results with different round numbers, but in both cases, the support mode after the V jackpot game is over is switched to the high frequency support mode. (Transition route 406). That is, when a V jackpot occurs in a situation where the support mode is shifting to the high frequency support mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode again after the V jackpot game ends. For this reason, a game in which a V jackpot is generated under the high-frequency support mode is looped, and a gaming state in which the jackpot occurrence probability is increased (a specific state in which a game can be played in the second special map) is repeated. By the way, the probability of winning the small hit (probability of winning the small hit in any of the nine winning and losing lots) in the winning and losing lottery of the second special diagram, that is, the continuation rate for continuing the specific state is It is about 61%.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a holding function that sets the upper limit number to four for the second special figure. Therefore, if four pieces of the hold information of the second special map are stored at the end of the high frequency support mode (at the end of the ninth game time of the second special map), even after the end of the high frequency support mode. It is possible to win or fail the lottery of the second special figure four times (transition route 407). In other words, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode, and even if it is in the normal game state internally, the above-mentioned specific state is extended by the number of reserved memories of the second special figure at the end of the high-frequency support mode. Can be (continued). By the way, the probability of winning the small hit (the continuation rate of the specific state) is about 34% among the four winning and losing lottery of the second special diagram. Then, the total continuation rate in the specific state including the high frequency support mode (nine times) is about 75%, and the continuation rate can be significantly increased compared to the case without the holding function of the second special figure. It will be possible.

In addition, in the win/loss lottery of the second special map, a big hit lottery is also performed together with the small hit lottery, and the big hit may be won. In this case, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed is executed (transition route 408), and after the jackpot game is over, the support mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode (transition route 409). In other words, even in the high frequency support mode, by winning the jackpot by the win/no win lottery of the second special figure, it is possible to loop the gaming state in which the V jackpot can be generated with high probability. However, the jackpot winning probability in this case is 1/200, which is lower than the jackpot winning probability, so if the support mode is shifting to the high frequency support mode, the jackpot winning is generated. , V is the main game to generate big hits.

When the reserved memory of the second special figure is used up without generating both the small hit and the big hit, the above-mentioned specific state is ended and the normal game state is restored (transition route 410). In this case, the player returns the shooting mode of the game ball to left-handed, and plays again with the aim of generating the big hit of the first special figure.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, since the winning/winning lottery of the first special figure also includes the small hit lottery, a small hit based on the winning/winning lottery of the first special drawing may occur in the normal gaming state. However, in the small hit game in this case, since the second variable winning device 32B is controlled to be opened and closed in the low distribution mode (FIG. 16(a)), the V prize is not generated and the V big hit game is not executed. Has become.

<About the flow of games>
Next, the flow of the game will be described. First, the flow of the game when the support mode is the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. Here, it is assumed that the results of each universal figure win/loss lot are open results.

After the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode at the timing t1, when the player makes a right hit and a game ball wins the through gate 35, the universal figure game time is executed (timing t2 to timing t3). More specifically, after the pattern of the general-use figure display unit 44 is variably displayed for 1 second which is the general-use figure variation display time, it is stopped and displayed with the stop result corresponding to the opening result, and the state is the general figure confirmation display time. It continues for a certain 0.5 seconds.

At the timing t3, when the universal figure game time ends, the accessory opening and closing game in which the universal electric accessory 34a is opened is executed. Since the accessory opening/closing game in this case is the high winning prize opening/closing game (FIG. 18(b)), first, the universal electric product 34a is opened for 3 seconds which is the opening time of the first opening/closing pattern. Thus, the accessory opening/closing game is executed. In this case, 3 seconds, which is the opening time of the general electric accessory 34a, is the firing cycle (0.6 seconds) of the game ball and the upper limit number of winnings to the second working port 34 which is one of the end conditions of the accessory opening/closing game. Since it is equal to or more than the product of (4 pieces) (2.4 sec), the number of winnings to the second operation port 34 is equal to or more than the upper limit winning number in the opening time.

When the first winning a prize for the second operating port 34 occurs at the timing t4, the hold information of the second special figure is stored. In this case, since the number of reserved memories of the second special figure immediately before the winning is 0, the game time of the second special figure is started based on the occurrence of the winning. In addition, when a winning is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out.

After that, when a total of three gaming balls win the second operating port 34 at each timing of timings t5 to t7, the winning number of gaming balls to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit winning number, and the accessory opening/closing game is executed. finish. That is, even when there is a remaining period of the opening time, the general electric accessory 34a is closed and the accessory opening/closing is performed without executing the second opening/closing pattern scheduled after the first opening/closing pattern. The game is over.

In addition, after the game number of the second special figure is started, three game balls enter the second operating port 34, so that the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is increased to three (timing t7).

When the accessory opening/closing game is completed at the timing t7, the next universal figure game time is executed (the winning to the through gate 35 occurs between the timings t2 and t7, and the number of reserved memories of the universal figure is 1 or more. Assumed). Then, at the timing t8, when the universal figure game time is completed, the high winning a prize open/close game of the ordinary electric prize a 34a is executed again. In this case as well, before the open time of the first opening/closing pattern of 3 seconds elapses, the winning number of game balls to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit winning number, and the accessory opening/closing game ends. At this time, if the first first prize occurs during execution of the first special figure game time started at timing t4, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure increases by 1 due to the prize. , Reaches the upper limit of 4 (timing t9).

Further, at timing t10, when the first special figure game time is finished, the second special figure game time is started. As a result, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is reduced by one to three, but immediately after that, at timing t11, the third game ball wins the second operating port 34, and thus the second special figure is obtained. The pending information in the figure is replenished, and the number of pending storages again reaches the upper limit of 4.

After that, at timing t12, the fourth gaming ball wins the second working opening 34, but the winning in this case is the winning when the number of reserved memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit, The hold information based on the winning is not stored, and the winning is invalid.

In this way, the accessory opening/closing game of the universal electric accessory 34a executes the first opening/closing pattern capable of winning the upper limit winning number of game balls in the second operation port 34 before the second opening/closing pattern. Due to the aspect, it is possible to frequently generate a prize for the second operation port 34. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to satisfactorily play the game without setting the number of reserved memories of the second special figure to 0, in other words, without interrupting the game times of the second special figure. In addition, when a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out each time, so that the player can play a game without reducing the number of balls that he holds. That is, it is possible for the player to play a game in the high frequency support mode in a state in which the superiority of the high frequency support mode is suitably exerted.

Next, the flow of the game at the end of the high frequency support mode and after the end will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, at timing t1 prior to the end (timing t3) of the high-frequency support mode, the accessory opening/closing game (high prize winning accessory opening/closing game) is started at the timing t1, and the accessory opening/closing game is started. It is assumed that the included first opening/closing pattern ends at timing t2, which is earlier than the end timing (timing t3) of the high-frequency support mode. Further, at the end of the high-frequency support mode, it is assumed that the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is four, which is the upper limit number.

When the high-frequency support mode ends at timing t3, one reserved memory of the second special figure held at that time is consumed, and the first game game of the second special figure after the high-frequency support mode ends is started. To be done. This game time is continued until timing t7 after 5.5 seconds which is a total of 5 seconds which is the variable display time and 0.5 seconds which is the fixed display time.

Also, at timing t4 after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the first opening/closing control in the second opening/closing pattern (the second opening/closing control in the high-prize winning combination opening/closing game) is started, and the general electric product 34a is opened. Can be switched. This open state is continued for a release time (1 sec) that is equal to or longer than the game ball firing period (0.6 sec) and shorter than the period (1.2 sec) of the two firing periods, so that the normal power During the period in which the accessory 34a is switched to the open state, one gaming ball wins the second operating port 34 (timing t5). As a result, one reserved memory of the second special figure is added, and the number of memories reaches the upper limit again.

Then, when the opening time elapses at the timing t6, the general electric accessory 34a is switched to the closed state, and the state is continued for the waiting time of 5.5 sec (timing t8). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, since the execution period of the game time of the second special figure is set to the same length as the standby time, the second opening/closing control in the second opening/closing pattern (high winning prize opening/closing game) Before the timing t8 when the third opening/closing control in) is started, the first game play of the second special figure ends (timing t7). That is, at timing t7, which is earlier than the start timing (timing t8) of the second opening/closing control, the oldest hold information of the second special maps is used, and the second special map of the second special maps is used. The game time is started.

Then, when the second opening/closing control in the second opening/closing pattern is started at the timing t8, the general electric accessory 34a is switched to the open state. Since the opening in this case is also performed for the opening time (1 sec) which is equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and shorter than the period of two cycles of the firing cycle, one game ball is won in the second working opening 34. (Timing t9). At the timing immediately before the winning, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is three, and there is one vacancy up to the upper limit number (four). Therefore, due to the occurrence of the above winning, one piece of the holding information of the second special figure is added, and the number of holding memories becomes four again.

After that, in the state where the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is three, the third opening/closing control in the second opening/closing pattern is executed (timing t10 to timing t12), and one game ball in this period. The second operation port 34 is won (timing t11). As a result, one reserved memory of the second special figure is added, and the number of memories becomes 4 again.

In this way, the second opening/closing pattern is executed after the high-frequency support mode is ended, and the universal electrician object 34a is brought into the open state three times. Therefore, the second special feature is given in the game after the mode is ended. It is possible to add three pieces of reservation information in the figure. Therefore, after the high-frequency support mode ends, it corresponds to 4 times, which is the number of pending storages at the end of the high-frequency support mode (4), and an additional amount (3) after the high-frequency support mode ends. It is possible to execute the game times of the second special figure over 7 times which is a total of 3 times. By the way, the probability of winning the small hit (the continuation rate of the specific state) out of the seven special lottery draws of the second special figure is about 52%. That is, the number of game times of the second special figure executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode is smaller than the number of reserved memories (4 times) at the end of the high-frequency support mode (about 34%). The probability of winning is greatly increased.

It should be noted that the number of additional game times of the second special figure after the end of the high frequency support mode does not uniformly become 3 times, but varies depending on the progress degree of the accessory opening/closing game at the end timing of the high frequency support mode. Occurs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47(a), during the execution of the game time of the first special special drawing after the end of the high frequency support mode, the opening operation for the third time of the high winning a prize combination opening/closing game. In the case of the degree of progress in which (the second opening operation in the second opening/closing pattern) is performed, it is possible to add the game times of the second special figure twice after the high-frequency support mode ends. In this case, the game times of the second special figure can be executed 6 times after the high-frequency support mode ends, and the probability of winning the small hit is about 47% as shown in FIG. 48.

Also, as shown in FIG. 47(b), during the execution of the game play of the above-mentioned first special drawing, the opening operation of the fourth time of the high prize winning prize opening/closing game (the third opening in the second opening/closing pattern) In the case of the degree of progress in which (operation) is performed, it becomes possible to add one game time of the second special figure after the end of the high frequency support mode. In this case, the game times of the second special figure can be executed five times after the high-frequency support mode ends, and the probability of winning the small hit is about 41% as shown in FIG. 48.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the waiting time between the first opening/closing pattern and the second opening/closing pattern is set to the same length as the waiting time between each opening of the second opening/closing pattern. As shown in FIG. 5, if the progress degree is such that the high-frequency support mode ends during execution of the first opening/closing pattern, it is possible to add four game times of the second special figure. In this case, the game times of the second special figure can be executed eight times after the high-frequency support mode ends, and the probability of winning the small hit is about 57% as shown in FIG. 48.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47(d), when the opening operation for the fourth time of the high winning a prize open/close game is performed during execution of the final display in the final game time of the high frequency support mode, It is not possible to add the game times of the second special figure after the frequency support mode ends. In this case, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to execute the four game times, which is the hold amount at the time of ending the mode, but the probability of winning the small hit is about 34 as shown in FIG. %.

In this way, the probability of winning a small hit in the specific state (the continuation rate of the specific state) changes greatly depending on the degree of progress of the accessory opening/closing game at the end timing of the high-frequency support mode, so that the accessory opening/closing game and It is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress of the game times of the second special figure, the deviation (phase difference) between them, etc., and it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, after the high-frequency support mode is finished, the ordinary electric accessory 34a is opened in a manner in which a prize can be won in the second operating port 34, thereby adding a game time of the second special figure. However, if it is only possible to win a prize in the second working opening 34 after the mode is finished, the high winning a prize is achieved only by the first opening/closing pattern without intentionally providing the second opening/closing pattern. It is also conceivable to configure an opening and closing game. This is because, if all or part of the first opening/closing pattern is executed after the high-frequency support mode is finished, a winning for the second operating port 34 can be generated.

However, in the above case, in the period in which the game time of the second special figure is executed once, the winning of the upper limit winning number (4) which is one of the ending conditions of the accessory opening/closing game may occur. For example, when the high-frequency support mode ends when the number of reserved memories of the second special figure has reached the upper limit number, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is at the time when the first winning occurs. Although one is added, the remaining prizes are invalid prizes, and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is not added. On the other hand, even though it is an invalid winning, it is counted for the number of winnings to the second working opening 34, so the remaining number up to the upper limit winnings is reduced, and when the fourth winning occurs, opening and closing the accessory The game will be ended. In this case, even if there is a vacancy in the number of reserved memories when the next game time is started, the character opening/closing game has already been completed, so the general electric auditors a thing 34a is not opened after the start of the next game time. Therefore, new reserved storage does not occur, and the number of additional game times after the end of the high frequency support mode is limited to one.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the second opening/closing pattern is a mode in which it is impossible to generate the upper limit number of winnings in the period in which the game time of the second special figure is executed once. It is suppressed that the accessory opening/closing game is ended while the number of game times is executed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34a over a plurality of game times, and it is possible to add the game times of the second special figure a plurality of times after the end of the high frequency support mode.

In particular, the opening time of the universal electric accessory 34a in one opening operation is set to a length that allows the winning to the second operating port 34 to occur only once, and such opening operation has the second characteristic. Since it is a configuration that can occur only once during execution of the game times in the figure, it is possible to replenish the reserved memory of the second special figure one by one while making the reserved memory number of the second special figure empty. As a result, it is possible to efficiently add pending information while suppressing the occurrence of invalid prizes (decrease in the number of remaining prizes up to the maximum number of prizes), and to secure the maximum number of game times that can be added. Become.

In such a case, it is not limited to the configuration in which the standby time of the second opening/closing pattern is the same length as the execution period of the game times of the second special figure (FIG. 49(a)) as in the present embodiment, As shown in FIG. 49(b), even if the standby time is set to be longer than the execution period, the reserved storage numbers of the second special figure are increased one by one while the reserved storage numbers of the second special figure are made vacant. Can be replenished. However, in this case, since the time period in which the general electric officer 34a is maintained in the closed state becomes long, if the player continues to shoot the game balls, the number of useless balls that do not win the second working opening 34 increases, There is a possibility that the decrease in the number of balls will be promoted.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the standby time of the second opening/closing pattern is the same length as the execution period of the game time of the second special figure, so that the general opening of the general electric accessory 34a and the next It is suppressed that the opening is executed across the game times of the second special figure. Therefore, the opening can be generated once in each game time (see FIG. 49(a) and FIG. 46), and the second addition that can be performed while suppressing the generation of a dead ball (reduction of the ball held) It is possible to secure the maximum number of special game times.

The second opening/closing pattern is not limited to the configuration in which the standby time is the same length as the game time execution period of the second special figure, and the former may be shorter than the latter. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress the opening of the normal electric utility article 34a from the beginning and the subsequent opening thereof to be executed across the game times of the second special figure. However, if it is made too short, the upper limit number of winnings can occur in the period in which the game time of the second special figure is executed once, and the number of game times that can be added is only once. Therefore, it is preferable that the standby time be set shorter than the execution period in a range in which the upper limit winning number of prizes cannot be generated in a period in which one game is executed. As a result, it is possible to add the game times of the second special figure a plurality of times while suppressing the generation of dead balls.

By the way, in the case shown in FIG. 46, during the period (timing t1 to timing t2) in which the universal electric accessory 34a is controlled to be opened and closed by the first opening and closing pattern (timing t1 to timing t2), the gaming ball is continuously aimed at the second actuation opening 34, When the game balls of the upper limit winning number (4) are won in the operation opening 34, the high winning a prize combination opening/closing game ends at that time. In this case, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the universal electric accessory 34a is not controlled to be opened/closed in the second opening/closing pattern, and it becomes impossible to add the hold information of the second special figure. Further, even if the number of winnings to the second operation port 34 generated during the above period is less than the upper limit winning number, the remaining number up to the upper limit winning number is reduced. In this case, even though the second opening/closing pattern is executed after the execution of the first opening/closing pattern, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric utility article 34a is smaller than that in the case where no winning is caused in the above period, As a result, the number of game times that can be added after the mode ends will be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of advantage of the game after the mode ends is changed depending on the shooting mode of the game ball in the final game time of the high frequency support mode (the winning situation to the second operating port 34). ing. For example, regardless of how the game is played during the high-frequency support mode, if the configuration is such that the mode is ended by playing a predetermined number of times, it is only hoped that a hit occurs during the mode. It may be a thing to perform a firing operation indiscriminately. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to add not only a game aiming to generate a hit but also a fun of launching a game ball in a mode in which the degree of advantage of the game after the mode ends becomes high, and high frequency support is provided. It is possible to excite the game during the mode. Not only that, it also expands the scope of technical intervention of the player, and has the advantage of suitably improving the player's concentration on the game.

In the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 and the speaker unit 64, by launching the game ball in a mode that does not launch the game ball in the middle of the final game round in the high frequency support mode or wins the second working opening 34, It is advisable to give a notice indicating or suggesting that the degree of advantage of the game of ending the mode is enhanced. As a result, the player can know the existence of the function, and it is possible to prevent the significance of the function from being lost.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

If the high-frequency support mode ends in the middle of the high-prize winning combination opening/closing game, the continuation of the high-prizing winning combination opening/closing game shall be executed even after the end of the mode, and the high-winning winning combination opening/closing game opens and closes first. The configuration includes a pattern and a second opening/closing pattern.

Of these, the second opening/closing pattern has a long waiting time between each opening of the general electric accessory 34a (see FIG. 18(b)), and the frequency of winning in the second operating port 34 is relatively suppressed. Has become. Therefore, the generation of an invalid prize (a prize to the second operation port 34 that occurs when the number of reserves RbN of the second special diagram has reached the upper limit and the reserve information corresponding to the prize is not stored) is generated. It is possible to generate a prize for the second operation port 34 while suppressing the above. Therefore, in the situation where the high winning a prize combination opening/closing game started before the end of the high frequency support mode continues after the mode ends, if the second opening/closing pattern is to be executed after the mode ends, the maximum winning number ( It is possible to generate a prize for the second working port 34 while suppressing a decrease in the number of remaining balls until the second working port 34 for ending one winning and opening game is reached. That is, it is possible to continue to add the hold information while continuing the game of opening and closing the accessory after the end of the mode for a long time, and the player can expect the addition of a large number of the hold information.

And, the effect when the holding information can be added after the mode ends (and by extension, the game times of the second special diagram) is as described above with reference to FIG. 48, and has a great influence on the game thereafter. It is something to give. Therefore, the player can greatly enjoy the game at the end of the high-frequency support mode and after the end, and it is possible to suitably enhance the fun.

However, on the other hand, if the high winning prize opening and closing game is composed of only the second opening and closing pattern, the reserved number RbN of the second special figure does not accumulate in the game during the high frequency support mode, and the reduction of the number of balls held is promoted. There is a risk that the player will be dissatisfied.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, apart from the second opening/closing pattern in the high winning prize opening/closing game, the first opening/closing pattern in which the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the second operating port 34 is increased (see FIG. 18B). ) Is provided. As a result, the opportunity to store the reserved information and pay out the prize balls in the high-frequency support mode is favorably secured, and the number of reserved balls RbN and the number of balls held are reduced. Moreover, the first opening/closing pattern is executed prior to the second opening/closing pattern in the high winning prize opening/closing game, and the upper limit winning number of winnings to the second working port 34 can be won. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, if the player shoots a game ball in a normal operation mode, the maximum winning number is reached before the end of the first opening/closing pattern, and naturally before the start of the second opening/closing pattern. The high-win prize open/close game is over. As a result, the implementation of the second opening/closing pattern can be avoided, and the configuration can be made equivalent to that in which the pattern does not exist. That is, the demerit of the second opening/closing pattern (the number of reserves RbN and the decrease in the number of balls held are easily promoted) can be absorbed by the first opening/closing pattern, and the high frequency support mode in which the winning of the second working opening 34 is favored. It is possible for the player to enjoy the benefits of.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a game in which the hold information can be added after the mode ends, while favorably achieving compatibility with the game in the high frequency support mode. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably enhance the fun of the game after the mode ends without impairing the superiority of the mode.

Regarding the second opening/closing pattern executed after the first opening/closing pattern, it is impossible to generate the winning number of the upper limit winning number in the period in which the game time of the second special figure is executed once after the high frequency support mode ends. And In this case, the second opening/closing pattern can be executed across one game time, and the second opening/closing pattern can be continued even after the start of the next game time. In the variable display time table storage area 113c, the number of holdings RbN of the second special figure is decreased by one when the game time is started. According to this configuration, not only during the execution of one game time, but also the next time It becomes possible to supplement the hold information even during the execution of the game game. In other words, it becomes possible to supplement (add) the hold information a plurality of times, and it is possible to suitably excite the game after the end of the high frequency support mode.

Regarding the second opening/closing pattern that suppresses the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the second working port 34, the above winnings are more likely to occur than the low winning a prize combination opening/closing game for the low frequency support mode (FIG. 18A). .. According to this configuration, even though the second opening/closing pattern can be generated after the high-frequency support mode ends, at the same level as the low-frequency support mode, the winning of the second operation port 34 does not occur. Occurrence can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the motivation to generate the second opening/closing pattern after the high-frequency support mode ends, and to remarkably increase the fun of the game as compared with the game in which the mode is simply digested. Further, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 60 during the high frequency support mode, the second opening/closing pattern may be executed during the mode, but even in such a case, the number of reserves RbN of the second special figure is 0. It is possible to prevent the individual from becoming sharp or suddenly decreasing.

Regarding the second opening/closing pattern, each opening time of the utility battery 34a is set to be equal to or longer than the game cycle of the game ball and twice the cycle of the game cycle or less. According to this configuration, since each opening time is equal to or longer than the game ball firing cycle, it is possible to reliably generate a prize in the second operating port 34. On the other hand, since each opening time is less than twice the firing cycle, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from winning in the second working port 34, and reduce the number of remaining balls up to the maximum winning number. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second opening/closing pattern performed after the high-frequency support mode is finished from being ended promptly, and it is possible for the player to easily enjoy the game after the end of the mode.

Regarding the second opening/closing pattern, the waiting time between each opening is set to be equal to or less than the execution period of the game time of the second special figure after the end of the high frequency support mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to replenish the holding information one by one at each time of the game, and it is possible to replenish the holding information efficiently.

When the high winning prize opening and closing game is executed across the end of the high frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 side does not control the launch mode of the game ball so that the second opening and closing pattern occurs after the end of the mode. It is configured to be entrusted to the player's firing operation. That is, the player can select whether to aim for winning in the second operating port 34 under the first opening/closing pattern or aiming for winning in the second operating port 34 under the second opening/closing pattern. As a result, the room for technical intervention is expanded, and compared to a game in which a player simply aims to win a prize in the second operation port 34 during the execution of a high-prize winning combination opening/closing game, the interest level and the degree of concentration on the game are made suitable. Can be increased.

Further, the above-mentioned configuration can be said to be a game property in which the degree of advantage of the game after the mode is changed is changed depending on the shooting mode of the game ball in the final game time of the high frequency support mode. With such a configuration, the game of the final game time is suitably excited, and it becomes possible to enjoy the game until the end of the high frequency support mode. In addition, since the last game time is targeted, it is possible to play the game time until immediately before that in a normal operation mode, and it is possible to preferably suppress adverse effects on the game in the original high frequency support mode.

<Second Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an effect is added in accordance with whether or not a game time can be added after the high-frequency support mode is finished and the number of game times that can be added. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In these figures, the same components as those in the above-mentioned respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special effect executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 as the above notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a schematic view showing a display example of special effects.

The special effect is executed at the end timing of the high frequency support mode. In the special effect, the first effect display 501 and the second effect display 502 are displayed on the display screen G.

The first effect display 501 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen G. A first display area 504 and a second display area 505 are provided in the first effect display 501. In the first display area 504, the number H of stored memories of the second special figure at that time, that is, the number of images H for the number of memories corresponding to the number of game times of the second special figure whose implementation has been confirmed is displayed. To be done. On the other hand, in the second display area 505, the additional number images L corresponding to the number of game times of the second special figure that can be added after the high frequency support mode is finished are displayed.

The additional number image L is displayed in a display mode different from that of the stored number image H, and can be distinguished from the stored number image H. For example, the additional number image L is displayed in a mode having higher transparency than the stored number image H, and is in a mode in which it is less noticeable than the image H. In addition, the sizes, shapes, and colors of the images H and L may be different.

It should be noted that the additional number image L indicates the number of game times that are expected to be added thereafter, and does not indicate the number actually added.

The second effect display 502 is displayed on the right side of the display screen G below the first effect display 501. In the second effect display 502, together with a predetermined female character, a first image 506 that teaches the number of reserved memories of the second special figure at that time, and a game of the second special figure that can be added after the end of the high frequency support mode. A second image 507 for teaching the number of times is displayed. In these images 506 and 507, the number of pending storages and the number of addable storages are indicated by numbers.

It should be noted that the display mode of the special effect is not limited to the above, and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure at that time and the number of game times of the second special figure that can be added after the end of the high frequency support mode. Other display modes may be used as long as the player can recognize the number of times.

<Special effect processing>
Next, the special effect process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed as part of the regular process started by the MPU 242 every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec).

In the special effect process, first in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the special effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special effect flag is stored in each flag storage area of the RAM 244. The special effect flag is for the MPU 242 to specify that the special effect is being executed, is stored when the special effect is started, and is erased when it is ended.

When it is determined that the special effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S3002, and it is determined whether or not a high frequency support command is received as a transmission command from the main control device 81. The high-frequency support command is sent when the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, and in this step, the current support mode is determined by determining whether or not the high-frequency support command is received. It is determined whether the high frequency support mode is set.

When it is determined that the high frequency support command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3003, and the game time being executed is the last game time in the high frequency support mode (the ninth game time of the second special map). Determine whether there is. In this determination, for example, a transmission command (for example, a variation start command or the like) from the main control device 81 includes information indicating how many times the game is, and how many times the game is based on the command. May be grasped and performed. Further, the number of times the game times of the second special figure are executed after the shift to the high frequency support mode may be counted by the MPU 242, and the number of times may be performed based on the result.

If it is determined that it is the last game time, the process proceeds to step S3004, and the number of reserved RbN of the second special figure at that time is grasped. In this step, based on a command for hold display control (hold command or shift command) transmitted from the main control device 81, a process of grasping the hold number RbN is executed.

In a succeeding step S3005, it is determined whether or not the reserved number RbN of the second special figure is "0". When it is determined that the reserved number RbN of the second special figure is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S3006, and it is determined whether it is the start timing of the special effect. In the present embodiment, the start timing of the special effect is the start timing of the final game time finalization display in the high frequency support mode. Due to the characteristic that the special effect directs the game after the end of the high-frequency support mode, such an effect, for example, is displayed before the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 are stopped and displayed in the final game time (the result of the win or fail). If it is started before the notification), there is a possibility that it will function as an indication in advance that the result of the final game play is a miss result. In order to suppress this, in this embodiment, the start timing of the special effect is set as described above.

When it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special effect, the special effect process is ended. In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S3002 (determination that a high-frequency support command has not been received), a negative determination in step S3003 (determination that it is not the final game time), or an affirmative determination in step S3005 (second special feature). Even when it is determined that the number RbN of reservations in the figure is “0”), this special effect process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the special effect, the process proceeds to step S3007, and the number of game times (addable reserve number SA) of the second special diagram that can be added after the end of the high frequency support mode is set. Perform processing to understand. Here, the process for ascertaining the number SA of reserves that can be added will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the grasping process of the number SA of reserves that can be added, first, in step S3101, the degree of progress (degree of progress or progress) of the accessory opening/closing game at the start timing of production is grasped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the elapsed period Ta from the timing t1 when the accessory opening/closing game of the ordinary electric accessory 34a is started to the timing t2 which is the start timing of the special effect is grasped.

In a succeeding step S3012, each execution period is grasped for each game time of the second special figure executed after the end of the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, for the game times of the second special figure executed after the end of the high frequency support mode, the execution time period of the game times (the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time) when the result is a deviation is uniform. Where it is set to 5.5 sec (see FIG. 26), the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82 stores information indicating the execution period of the game times of the second special figure. In this step, based on the information indicating the execution period of the game times of the second special figure, the start timing and the end timing of each game time after the end of the mode are specified, and the grasping process is executed.

Specifically, it is assumed that all the game times of the second special figure executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode are out of results, and then the first game time after the end of the mode is started from the effect start timing. Understand the elapsed period (time period from timing t2 to timing t3) Tb1 and the elapsed period until the first game time described above (period from timing t2 to timing t5) Tb2. For the second and subsequent game times, the elapsed times Tb3 and Tb4 from the effect start timing to the end of the game time are grasped.

It should be noted that the number of game times until which each of the above elapsed times is grasped may be determined based on the length of the executable time of the accessory opening/closing game and the length of the execution period of each game time. As in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility of holding addition only up to the fourth game time (see FIG. 48(c)), it is sufficient to grasp each of the above elapsed times up to the fourth game time. ..

In a succeeding step S3103, the number of game times in which the ordinary electric accessory 34a is opened during the execution of the game times is grasped. This process is the grasped result of the step S3101 and time information of the accessory opening/closing game stored in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82 (the number of times of opening the general electric officer 34a related to the high-frequency accessory opening/closing game, each opening time and Information indicating each waiting time, etc.).

Specifically, based on the elapsed time Ta grasped in step S3101 and the time information of the accessory opening/closing game, the elapsed time from the production start timing to the start of the first opening after the end of the high frequency support mode. (Period of timing t2 to timing t4) Tc1 is grasped. When there is a second or later opening after the mode ends, the elapsed time Tc2, Tc3 from the effect start timing to the start of each opening is also grasped.

After that, for each of the grasped elapsed periods Tc1 to Tc3, it is sequentially compared with the execution period (elapsed period Tb1 to Tb4) of each game time grasped in the above step S3012, and the normal operation is executed for each game time executed after the mode ends. It is determined whether the accessory 34a is released. For example, when the elapsed time period Tc1 up to the first opening is compared with the elapsed times Tb1 and Tb2 of the first game time, and when there is a relationship of Tb1<Tc1<Tb2, the general electric vehicle 34a is opened in the first game time. To determine. Then, when it is determined that the general electric utility object 34a is opened, the number of game times in which the general electric officer object 34a is opened is incremented by 1, and finally the total number of such game times is derived.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the game time and the aspect of the character opening/closing game of the second special figure are set so that the opening of the normal electric role object 34a occurs once in each game time after the mode ends. Is set. Therefore, in the above total number, the number of times of opening in the character opening and closing game is set to n, and the order of opening of the ordinary electric object 34a (the number of opening) which occurs in the first game time after the mode ends is set to m. In this case, it can also be derived by (n−m)+1.

In a succeeding step S3104, the number of game times (total number) grasped in step S3103 is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 244 as the addable hold number SA, and thereafter, the process of grasping the addable hold number SA is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the special effect process in FIG. 51, after the process for grasping the addable hold number SA in step S3007 is executed, whether or not the value of the addable hold number SA is “1” or more in step S3008. That is, it is determined whether or not the hold information (game times) can be added after the high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, as a case where it is not possible to add the hold information after the high-frequency support mode ends, there is a case where the high-prize winning a prize opening/closing game being executed at the start timing of the special effect ends before the high-frequency support mode ends. ..

When it is determined that the value of the number SA of reserveable additions is not "1" or more (when it is "0"), this special effect processing is ended as it is, and the special effect is not executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the number SA of reserves that can be added is “1” or more, production start processing is executed in step S3009. In this step, special effect flags are stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 244.

In a succeeding step S3010, display processing of the effect start display DR1 is executed. The effect start display DR1 is a special effect base display, and is specifically an effect display in the display mode shown in FIG. In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the effect start display DR1 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the effect start display DR1 from the character ROM 276, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

In step S3010, the audio data for special effect stored in the ROM 243 is read out, and the speaker unit 64 is drive-controlled so that the effect sound such as “chance time” is output.

When an affirmative determination (determination that the special effect is being executed) is made in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3011, and it is determined whether or not it is the game timing start timing of the second special figure. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the fluctuation start command for the second special figure is received from the main control device 81.

When it is determined that it is the start timing of the game number of the second special figure, the process proceeds to step S3012, and the image H for the number of memories displayed in the special effect (the second special figure which is actually stored in the reserved state) is displayed. The display process of the subtraction display DR2 is executed in order to reduce the number of (display indicating the number of hold information). In the subtraction display DR2, as shown in FIG. 53A, one of the memory number images H displayed in the first effect display 501 is erased, and the subtraction display DR2 is displayed in the first image 506 of the second effect display 502. The display is made by subtracting 1 from the number (the number indicating the number of the hold information of the second special figure which is actually held and stored).

In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the subtraction display DR2 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 receiving the command reads the image data for the subtraction display DR2 from the character ROM 276, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

After execution of step S3012 or when a negative determination is made in step S3011, it is determined in step S3013 whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is being opened. This determination is performed by determining whether the universal figure opening command is received as a transmission command from the main control device 81, or whether the universal figure closing command is received after receiving the universal figure opening command.

When it is determined that the general electric accessory 34a is being opened, the process proceeds to step S3014, and the display process of the guidance display DR3 is executed. In the guide display DR3, as shown in FIG. 53(b), for example, "chance! Aim for electric chute" or the like in order to prompt a shooting operation of the game ball aiming at the universal electric accessory 34a (second operation port 34). The guide image 509 in which the characters are displayed is displayed.

In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the guidance display DR3 is output to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads the image data for the guide display DR3 from the character ROM 276 and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. Further, the speaker unit 64 is drive-controlled so as to output a predetermined effect sound for guidance.

In a succeeding step S3015, it is determined whether or not the reserved number RbN of the second special figure has increased. This determination is made based on the hold display control command transmitted from main controller 81. If it is determined that the reserved number RbN of the second special figure has increased, the process proceeds to step S3016, and the display process of the addition display DR4 is executed. In the addition display DR4, as shown in FIG. 53(c), an addition-time image 510 for notifying that the game number of the second special diagram has been added and the number of added game numbers is displayed. In addition, in order to update the display content of the first effect display 501 to the display content corresponding to the addition of the game times of the second special figure, one of the additional number images L is stored image H Change to. Further, in order to update the number displayed on the first image 506, the number is changed to a number corresponding to the number of displayed images H for storage. Note that when the number of game times is added, the number of game times that can be added after that is decreased by one, so in the addition display DR4, the number displayed in the second image 507 is decreased by one. To change the display content.

In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the addition display DR4 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 receiving the command reads the image data for the additional display DR4 from the character ROM 276, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. Further, the speaker unit 64 is drive-controlled so as to output a predetermined effect sound for guidance.

In step S3016, the audio data for special effect stored in the ROM 243 is read out, and the speaker unit 64 is drive-controlled so that the effect sound such as “Yatta!” is output.

After the execution of step S3016, if a negative determination is made in step S3013 (it is determined that the general electric accessory 34a is not open), or a negative determination is made in step S3015 (the holding number RbN of the second special map is not increased). If yes, in step S3017, it is determined whether or not the game number of the second special figure has ended. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special figure variation end command for the second special figure is received from the main control device 81.

When it is determined that the game time of the second special figure is ended, it is determined in step S3018 whether the number RbN of reservations of the second special figure is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the specific state has ended. When it is determined that the reserved number RbN of the second special figure is “0”, the process proceeds to step S3019, and the display process of the effect end display DR5 is executed. In the effect end display DR5, as shown in FIG. 53(d), an end time image 511 for notifying that the special effect has ended is displayed.

In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the effect end display DR5 is output to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads the image data for the production end display DR5 from the character ROM 276, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. Further, the speaker unit 64 is drive-controlled to output a predetermined effect sound for ending.

In a succeeding step S3020, an effect ending process for deleting the special effect flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 is executed, and thereafter, this special effect process is ended. Also, when a negative determination is made in step S3017 or step S3018, this special effect process is ended.

<About the flow of special production>
Next, the flow of special effects will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is an illustration for explaining the flow of special effects. Here, the number of reserves RbN of the second special figure at the start of the special effect (at the start of the final game time confirmation display in the high-frequency support mode) is four, and the game is repeated three times after the high-frequency support mode ends. The case where it is possible to add times will be described as an example. Since the operation other than the special effect is almost the same as the case of FIG. 46, the description will be appropriately omitted or simplified.

At the timing t1 which is the start timing of the special effect, the effect start display DR1 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In this case, the reserved number RbN of the second special figure is four, and it is possible to add three game times after the end of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, in the effect start display DR1, the first effect display 501 in which the four memory number images H and the three additional number images L are displayed is displayed. In addition, the first image 506 that informs that the number of game times of the second special map that is decided to be implemented is four times, and the game time of the second special map that can be added after the high-frequency support mode ends. The second image 507 for notifying that the number of times is 3 is displayed.

Thereby, the player can understand that the game time of the second special figure can be executed four times after the end of the high frequency support mode, and that there is a possibility that the game time can be additionally executed three times. .. Regarding the latter of these, since the addition has not been finalized at the time of displaying the effect start display DR1, the player performs the subsequent game with the goal of actually adding these three game times. be able to.

At the timing t2, when the first game time after the end of the high frequency support mode is started, the subtraction display DR2 is displayed on the display screen G. In the subtraction display DR2 in this case, as shown in FIG. 53A, one memory number image H displayed in the first effect display 501 is deleted, and the number display 506a of the first image 506 is displayed. It is updated from "4" to "3". Further, in the subtraction display DR2, an execution number display 512 for notifying that it is the first game game after the mode is finished, that is, the first chance game is displayed. Note that the subtraction display DR2 is not displayed only for a moment at the timing t2, and continues to be displayed while the display content does not need to be changed during the special effect execution period.

When the general electric accessory 34a is opened at the timing t3, the guide display DR3 shown in FIG. 53(b) is displayed on the display screen G. The guidance display DR3 basically continues to be displayed while the general electric accessory 34a is opened.

After that, at timing t4, when the winning of the second working opening 34 occurs and the new hold information of the second special figure is stored, the addition display DR4 is displayed on the display screen G. In the addition display DR4 at this time, as shown in FIG. 53(c), one of the three additional number images L displayed in the first effect display 501 is changed to the stored number image H. Is displayed. Further, the number display 506a of the first image 506 is changed from "3" to "4", and the number display 507a of the second image 507 is displayed so as to be changed from "3" to "2". Further, in the addition display DR4, an additional-time image 510 for notifying that the game time of the second special figure has been added once is displayed.

By such a display, the player is informed that the game times of the second special figure have been added, and more specifically, that one of the displayed possible additions has been actually added. As a result, the joy of the player is aroused, and the motivation for the game is suitably increased.

The addition display DR4 is displayed for a predetermined period, and after the display is finished, the effect start display DR1 (base display) in which the holding number RbN and the addable holding number of the second special figure at that time are reflected. Is displayed. After that, the subtraction display DR2 is displayed each time the game time of the second special figure is started, and the addition display DR4 is displayed each time new hold information of the second special figure is stored. With these displays, the player can sequentially know the remaining number of game times that are determined to be implemented, the remaining number of addable times, and the number of added game times.

Then, at timing t5, when the variable display of the final game time (the seventh game time after the end of the high-frequency support mode) in the specific state ends, the effect end display DR5 shown in FIG. 53(d) is displayed on the display screen G. Is displayed. As a result, the player is notified of the end of the specific state. The effect end display DR5 is displayed for a predetermined period. The effect end display DR5 may be displayed after the end of the final game time (for example, at the time of ending the finalized display).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

At the start timing of the special effect, the progress of the high winning prize opening/closing game is grasped, and the special effect is executed when it is determined that the opening/closing game is continued after the end of the high frequency support mode. In this case, the player can understand that the opening/closing control, which has not been actually executed in the opening/closing game, is performed after the mode is executed by executing the special notification. In this way, if it becomes possible for the player to know in advance whether or not it is possible to generate a prize for the second operating port 34 after the mode ends, there is an expectation for the development of the game after the mode ends. Not only is it easier to hold, you can also enjoy the game with the goal of achieving a prize. As a result, it becomes possible to further enhance the game in which the hold information can be added after the mode ends, and to appropriately increase the player's motivation for the game.

Based on the result of grasping the degree of progress, the number of game times that can be added after the mode is finished is grasped, and the result is notified by a special effect. According to this configuration, the player can previously know the number of game times that can be added after the mode ends. For example, when a large number is notified as the number of additional game times, the expectation for the subsequent game is increased or the mood is raised, which makes the game enjoyable. Further, when the number can be grasped in such a manner, it is possible to expect the maximum number of additions or to aim for it and play, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of the special effect. ..

Based on the result of grasping the degree of progress and the result of grasping the execution period of each special figure game time whose execution is suspended at the performance start timing, the number of game times that can be added after the mode ends is determined. .. By grasping the execution period of each game time of which execution is suspended, it is possible to grasp the start timing of each game time of which future execution is confirmed. Since the start timing of each of these game times is a future timing when the number RbN of holdings of the second special figure decreases, by adding the holdable information in consideration of the results of grasping these timings, addition of holding information It is possible to derive the addable number by not including the winning (ineffective winning) to the second operation port 34 that is not connected to. Therefore, it is possible to derive an addable number commensurate with the actual number, and it is possible to perform highly reliable notification.

The first image 506 and the second image 507 are displayed in the special effect so that the player can recognize the number of game times that can be added and the number of game times that have been actually added. These displays can provide the player with the information of the target value and the actual value in the case of playing the game with the same number of additions as the target, and also make the player aware of the target achievement level. As a result, the game in which the number of game times is added after the mode is finished can be heaped up, and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that notification is made according to the degree of achievement of the target at the end of the special effect (for example, the end screen). For example, when the addition of the same number as the number of possible additions is realized, the notification such as “very successful” is given, while when the addition is less than that, the notification such as “Do your best” is given. It is good to have a configuration. In that case, if the number of additions is less than the number that can be added, but a certain number of additions or more is realized, a middle level notification such as “Good work” is given, and if the number of additions is less than the predetermined number, “Next It may be configured to provide a lower level notification such as "Do your best."

The special effect is executed after the final display of the final game times in the high-frequency support mode is started. Where the special effect relates to the situation after the end of the high-frequency support mode, if such notification is given before the notification of the winning/losing lottery result in the final game time in the mode, the result of the final game time is lost. It functions as a suggestion that it is a result, and there is a concern that it is difficult for the player to hit the final game time and expect a result. In this respect, in this configuration, since the special effect is executed after the result of the winning/winning lottery in the final game time is notified, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the execution period of the game time of the second special figure is prefetched and the special effect is executed using the result. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63. In these figures, the same components as those in the above-mentioned respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variable display time table B of the second special figure for disconnection in the specific state according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

When the variable display time table B of the present embodiment is compared with the variable display time table B according to the first embodiment of FIG. 26(b), each game time (specific game) after the high-frequency support mode ends. This is different in that a plurality of types of variable display time and fixed display time are provided for the game times when the value of the number counter area OC is 10 to 17. That is, in the first embodiment, the execution period is set to be 5.5 seconds uniformly for each game time after the end of the high frequency support mode, but in the present embodiment, the execution time of each game time is set. The execution period can be varied.

Specifically, after the high-frequency support mode ends, for the first to eighth game times of the second special figure, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "169", a variation display of 2 seconds The time and the fixed display time of 0.5 sec are set to be selected. When the variation type counter CS is "170" to "189", the variation display time of 5 sec and the fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected, and the variation type counter CS is "190" to "199". In some cases, the fluctuating display time of 15 sec and the confirmed display time of 0.5 sec are set to be selected.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 in the present embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for working port>
The winning process for the operating port according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this figure, the same steps as those of the operation port processing of FIG. 20 are designated by the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After the setting process of the second hold command in step S212 is executed in the process for the operation port, the hold confirmation process is executed in step S3201. Based on the pending information of the second special figure that is stored in the hold, the processing for holding confirmation starts the execution of the game times based on the result or execution period (variable display time and confirmed display time) of the winning or failure lottery of the game times. This is a so-called pre-reading process that is determined before the execution. Here, the hold confirmation process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

<Hold confirmation processing>
In the hold confirmation process, first, in step S3301, the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold storage number area of the hold ball storage area 114b is read, and the information of the hold number is stored in the register of the MPU 112. In the following step S3302, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the fluctuation type counter CS are grasped from the hold information acquired in step S211 (FIG. 20) based on the current winning of the second operating opening 34.

In a succeeding step S3303, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in the step S3302 corresponds to the jackpot winning or the jackpot winning. Specifically, referring to the hit/miss table for the second special figure in FIG. 13B, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped above matches the value of the random number corresponding to the jackpot or the value corresponding to the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is.

When it is determined that it does not correspond to the big win or the small win, that is, it corresponds to the out-of-court result, the process proceeds to step S3304, and the hold obtained based on the present winning of the second working opening 34 is held. It is determined whether the information corresponds to the game times in the specific state. When it is determined that the game time corresponds to the game time in the specific state, the variable display time table B shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in step S3305, and the variable display time of the game time corresponding to the acquired hold information. And grasp the fixed display time.

When a negative determination is made in step S3303 or step S3304, the flow proceeds to step S3306, refers to another corresponding variable display time table, and grasps the variable display time and the fixed display time of the game times corresponding to the acquired hold information. To do.

After the execution of step S3305 or step S3306, in step S3307, the information on the grasped variable display time and confirmed display time is stored in the register of the MPU 112. In a succeeding step S3308, a prefetch command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82, and thereafter, the present holding confirmation process is ended. The pre-read command is for the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 to specify the pre-read variable display time and confirmed display time, and the command specifies time information indicating the variable display time or the like or the variable display time or the like. Identification information is included. The prefetch command set in step S3308 is transmitted to the performance control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

In the present embodiment, both the variable display time and the fixed display time are pre-read as the information corresponding to the execution period of the game time, but the fixed display time is standardized or the variable display time When it is possible to specify without confirming beforehand, such as when the fixed display time is uniquely determined from the information, only the variable display time may be prefetched.

<Special effect processing>
Next, the special effect process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58. In this figure, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the special effect process of FIG. 51, and the description thereof is omitted.

If it is determined in step S3006 that it is the start timing of the special effect, the process proceeds to step S3401, and the number of game times (additional reserve number SA) of the second special diagram that can be added after the end of the high frequency support mode is grasped. Perform the processing to do so. Here, the process of grasping the number SA of reserves that can be added will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The basic idea of each process in the grasping process is the same as the case shown in FIG. 52(b), and therefore will be described with reference to FIG. 52(b).

In the grasping process of the number SA of reserves that can be added, first, in step S3501, the degree of progress (degree of progress or degree of progress) of the accessory opening/closing game is grasped at the effect start timing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the elapsed period Ta from the timing t1 when the accessory opening/closing game of the ordinary electric accessory 34a is started to the timing t2 which is the start timing of the special effect is grasped. Further, in this step, the grasped elapsed time Ta and time information of the accessory opening/closing game stored in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82 (the number of times of opening the general electric officer 34a regarding the high-frequency accessory opening/closing game, each opening time). And the information indicating the standby time and the like), the elapsed period (time period from timing t2 to timing t4) Tc1 from the effect start timing to the start of the first opening after the end of the high frequency support mode is grasped. When there is a second or later opening after the mode ends, the elapsed time Tc2, Tc3 from the effect start timing to the start of each opening is also grasped.

In the following step S3502, 1 is assigned (set) to the variable k. Next, in step S3503, the execution period of the k-th second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode is grasped. This process is performed by specifying the variable display time and the fixed display time of the k-th game time based on the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 81.

The execution period of the k-th game time is a period from the start timing to the end timing of the game time, and in this step, these timings are specified respectively. Specifically, first, for the first (k=1) game time of the second special figure after the end of the mode, the variable display time and the fixed display are specified based on the prefetch command. Then, based on this identification result, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the elapsed period from the effect start timing to the start of the first game time (the period from timing t2 to timing t3) Tb1 and the first time Grasping the elapsed period (the period from timing t2 to timing t5) Tb2 until the game number of is finished. In this embodiment, since the special effect is started at the start timing of the final display in the final game time (the ninth game time) of the high-frequency support mode, the elapsed period Tb1 is the same as the last game time. Use the fixed display time.

In a succeeding step S3504, it is determined whether or not the universal electric accessory 34a is opened during the k-th game time. This determination is performed using the degree of progress of the accessory opening/closing game ascertained in step S3501 and the execution period of the k-th game time ascertained in step S3503. For example, when the variable k is 1 and the first game time is targeted, the elapsed periods Tc1 to Tc3 grasped in step S3501 are compared with the elapsed periods Tb1 and Tb2 grasped in step S3503, and the elapsed period is compared. It is determined whether any of Tc1 to Tc3 is longer than the elapsed period Tb1 and shorter than the period Tb2. Then, if such an elapsed period Tc exists, it is assumed that the general electric auditors a thing 34a is opened during the execution of the first game time, and conversely, if it does not exist, the first game time is being executed. It is specified that the ordinary electric accessory 34a is not opened.

If it is determined in step S3504 that the universal electric accessory 34a is opened during execution of the kth game time, the process proceeds to step S3505, and 1 is added to the value of the addable hold number SA. After execution of step S3505 or if a negative decision is made in step S3504, the flow advances to step S3506 to add 1 to the value of the variable k.

In a succeeding step S3507, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable k is larger than the reserved number RbN of the second special figure. If it is determined that the value of the variable k is less than or equal to the number of reservations RbN, the process returns to step S3503, and thereafter, the processes of steps S3503 to S3506 are repeated until the value of the variable k becomes greater than the number of reservations RbN. That is, with respect to all the holding information (holding information of the second special map) existing at the start timing of the special effect, whether or not the general electric auditors a is released during the game times corresponding to the holding information. Is determined, and the value of the number SA of reserves that can be added is updated based on the result. At this time, the elapsed period Tb grasped in step S3503 becomes the elapsed period Tb3 (FIG. 52(b)) when k=2, and becomes the elapsed period Tb4 (FIG. 52(b)) when k=3.

If it is determined in step S3507 that the value of the variable k is larger than the number RbN of reservations, the process advances to step S3508 to clear the value of the variable k to zero. Then, the process of grasping the number SA of reserves that can be added is ended.

Returning to the description of the special effect process in FIG. 58, after the process in step S3401 is executed, it is determined in step S3008 whether the value of the addable hold number SA is “1” or more.

In addition, in step S3015, it is determined that the pending information of the second special figure has increased (the pending information is added), and after the display processing of the addition display DR4 in step S3016 is performed, the addition is performed in step S3402. The update processing of the available reservation number SA is executed. Here, the process of updating the addable hold number SA will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the update processing of the addable hold number SA, and FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the update processing.

As shown in FIG. 60, first, in step S3601, the progress (progress or progress) of the accessory opening/closing game is grasped at the timing when the addition of the hold information occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61, the elapsed period Td1 from the timing t1 when the accessory opening/closing game of the general electric auditors a is started to the timing t2 which is the addition timing of the hold information is grasped.

In a succeeding step S3602, the end timing of the accessory opening/closing game is grasped. Specifically, the elapsed time period Td1 grasped in step S3601 and time information of the accessory opening/closing game stored in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82 (the number of times of opening the general electric auditors product 34a regarding the high-frequency accessory opening/closing game, Based on the information indicating each opening time, each waiting time, etc.), the remaining time period (time period between timing t2 and timing t4) Td2 in the accessory opening/closing game is grasped.

In a succeeding step S3603, the start timing of the game number corresponding to the additional suspension is grasped. Specifically, the elapse period (the period from timing t2 to timing t3) Te1 from the addition timing of the suspension information to the start timing of the game time corresponding to the additional suspension is grasped. If the game time of the second special figure is not being executed at the timing of adding the hold information, the elapsed time Te1 is grasped as 0 sec.

In a succeeding step S3604, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game is ended before the game time corresponding to the additional suspension is started. In this step, the elapsed period Te1 grasped in the above step S3603 is compared with the remaining period Td2 grasped in the above step S3602, and if the former is the latter or more, it works before the start of the game times corresponding to the additional suspension. It is assumed that the object opening/closing game ends, and if the former is smaller than the latter, it is specified that the accessory opening/closing game does not end before the start of the game times corresponding to the additional suspension.

If it is determined in step S3604 that the accessory opening/closing game is finished, the update processing of the number SA of reserves that can be added is finished, while if it is determined that it is not finished, the process proceeds to step S3605, and the game time corresponding to the additional reserve is finished. Understand the execution period of. The execution period of the game times corresponding to the additional suspension is the period from the start timing to the end timing of the game times. Since the start timing has already been grasped in step S3603, the end timing in this step. Grasp process. Specifically, based on the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 81, the variable display time and the fixed display time of the game time corresponding to the additional hold are specified, and the game time corresponding to the additional hold is added from the addition timing of the hold information. The elapse period (the period from the timing t2 to the timing t6) Te2 until the end timing is grasped.

In a succeeding step S3606, it is determined whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is opened during the execution of the game times corresponding to the additional suspension. In this step, first, the elapsed period (the period from timing t2 to timing t5) Td3 from the addition timing of the holding information to the opening timing of the general electric accessory 34a is grasped. Then, the grasped elapsed time period Td3 is compared with the elapsed time periods Te1 and Te2, and if the elapsed time period Td3 is greater than the elapsed time period Te1 and less than the time period Te2, the general electric utility during the execution of the game times corresponding to the additional suspension. 34a is identified as open.

When it is determined that the general electric accessory 34a is opened, the process proceeds to step S3607, and 1 is added to the value of the number SA of addable reservations. In subsequent step S3608, a display process of update display DR6 is executed. In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the update display DR6 is output to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads the image data for the update display DR6 from the character ROM 276 and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. Further, the speaker unit 64 is drive-controlled to output a predetermined effect sound. It should be noted that the update display DR6 updates the display of the number of reserveable additions in the special effect, the details of which will be described later. After the execution of step S3608 or if a negative decision is made in step S3606, the update processing of the addable hold number SA is ended.

Returning to the description of the special effect process in FIG. 58, after the execution of step S3402, or when a negative determination is made in step S3013 or step S3015, the process proceeds to step S3017, and the game time of the second special figure is ended or not. To judge.

<About the flow of special production>
Next, the flow of special effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the special effect, and FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display example of the special effect. Here, a case will be described as an example where the number RbN of reservations in the second special figure is 3 at the time of starting the special effect (at the time of starting the final game time confirmation display in the high-frequency support mode).

At the timing t1 which is the start timing of the special effect, the effect start display DR1 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In this case, the reserved number RbN of the second special figure is three, and it is determined that the game times of the second special figure are executed three times after the end of the high frequency support mode. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads the hold information stored in the hold and grasps the execution period for each of the three game times. Then, based on the grasped execution period of each game time and the degree of progress of the accessory opening and closing game at that time, it is determined whether or not the general electric auditors product 34a is opened during the execution of each game time.

In the example shown in FIG. 62, since the general electric auditors a thing 34a is opened during the execution of the first and third game times, respectively, the number of holdable additions is grasped as two. As a result, in the effect start display DR1 displayed at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the first memory image H for storing three images H and the image L for additional number of two are displayed. A performance display 501 is displayed. In addition, the first image 506 that informs that the number of game times of the second special map that is determined to be implemented is three times, and the game time of the second special map that can be added after the high-frequency support mode ends. The second image 507 that notifies that the number of times is 2 is displayed.

At the timing t2, when the first game time after the end of the high frequency support mode is started, the subtraction display DR2 is displayed on the display screen G. In the subtraction display DR2 in this case, as shown in FIG. 63(b), one memory number image H displayed in the first effect display 501 is deleted, and the numeral display 506a of the first image 506 is displayed. Updated to "2". Further, in the subtraction display DR2, an execution number display 512 for notifying that it is the first game game after the mode is finished, that is, the first chance game is displayed. Note that the subtraction display DR2 is not displayed only for a moment at the timing t2, and continues to be displayed while the display content does not need to be changed during the special effect execution period.

After that, at timing t3, when a winning is generated in the second operating port 34 and the new hold information of the second special figure is stored, the addition display DR4 is displayed on the display screen G. In the addition display DR4 at this time, as shown in FIG. 63(c), one of the two additional number images L displayed in the first effect display 501 is changed to the stored number image H. Is displayed. Further, the number display 506a of the first image 506 is changed from "2" to "3", and the number display 507a of the second image 507 is displayed so as to be changed from "2" to "1". Further, in the addition display DR4, an additional-time image 510 for notifying that the game time of the second special figure has been added once is displayed. This addition display DR4 is displayed for a predetermined period. With this display, the player is notified that the game times of the second special figure have been added.

Further, when the hold information is added, the pachinko machine 10 prefetches the added hold information and grasps the execution period of the game times (the period of timing t4 to t5) corresponding to the additional hold. Then, based on the grasped execution period and the degree of progress of the accessory opening/closing game at that time, it is determined whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is opened during the game time corresponding to the additional suspension. In the example shown in FIG. 62, since the universal electric device 34a is released during the execution of the additional game times, it is specified that the number should be increased by 1 with respect to the current number of addable reservations.

On the display screen G, after the display of the addition display DR4 is finished, the update display DR6 in which the specification of the number of addable reservations is reflected is displayed. In the update display DR in this case, as shown in FIG. 63(d), one additional number image L is added in the first effect display 501, and the number display 507a of the second image 507 is "1." Is displayed so that it changes from "2" to "2". Further, in the update display DR, for example, a character display such as “stockable number+1!” is added, and the update-time image 513 for notifying the increase in the number of reserveable additions and the increase is displayed. With such a display, the player is informed that the number of additions that can be added is increased, that is, the number of additions that can be added is further increased by generating a prize in the second operation port 34. As a result, the joy of the player is aroused, and the motivation for the game is suitably increased.

After the update time image 513 is displayed for a predetermined period, the effect start display DR1 (base display) in which the number of reserves RbN and the number of addable reserves of each second special figure are reflected is displayed.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it easier to understand the significance of pre-reading the variable display time of the game times after the mode ends, a plurality of types of variable display times of different lengths are provided, but the second embodiment described above Even in the configuration in which the variable display time is standardized as in the above form, the variable display time may be pre-read and the special effect may be executed based on the result.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

It is configured to pre-read the execution period of each special figure game time, which is suspended at the start timing of the special effect, and to grasp the number SA of reserves that can be added based on the result. As a result, even when the execution period of each game time is not uniform as in the second embodiment and becomes fluid as in the present embodiment, the number of additions that can be added according to the actual situation Can be derived, and highly reliable notification can be performed.

When a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 after the high-frequency support mode ends, it is determined whether or not new hold information can be added during the execution period of the game times corresponding to the prize, and possible. In such a case, the addable hold number SA is updated. In this case, the number of addables notified by the special effect (the number of images L for additional number in the first effect display 501 and the number display 507a of the second image 507) can be increased during the special effect. As a result, the joy of the player can be evoked suitably, and it is possible to play the game after the mode ends with the expectation that the number that can be added will increase, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the expectation.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the second and third embodiments in that an effect corresponding to the continuable period of the specific state after the end of the high frequency support mode is executed. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. In these figures, the same components as those in the above-mentioned respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Special effect processing>
The special effect process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64. In this figure, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the special effect process of FIG. 51, and the description thereof is omitted.

In step S3006, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the special effect. In the present embodiment, the start timing of the special effect is the start timing of the final game time finalization display in the high frequency support mode. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the special effect, the process proceeds to step S3701, and determination processing for the remaining period is executed. Here, the remaining period determination processing in step S3701 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 65 and the explanatory diagram in FIG. 66.

In the remaining period determination process, first in step S3801, the degree of progress (degree of progress or progress) of the accessory opening/closing game at the start timing of the special effect is grasped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66, the elapsed period Ta from the timing when the accessory opening/closing game of the ordinary electric accessory 34a is started to the timing when the special effect is started is grasped.

In a succeeding step S3802, the elapsed period Tm1 (FIG. 66) from the start timing of the special effect to the end timing of the high frequency support mode is grasped. In the present embodiment, the special effect is started at the start of the final game time confirmation display in the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is ended at the end of the final game time confirmation display. The final game time fixed display time is used as the elapsed period Tm1.

Next, in step S3803, the remaining period of the accessory opening/closing game is grasped, and thereafter, the grasp processing of the remaining period is ended. In this step, the sum (Ta1+Tm1) of the elapsed period Ta1 grasped in step S3801 and the elapsed period Tm2 grasped in step S3802 is subtracted from the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game, and after the end of the high frequency support mode. The remaining period Tm2 of the accessory opening/closing game in is derived. The remaining period Tm2 is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state in that the opening/closing control is executed and the general electric accessory 34a is switched to the open state, so that a prize can be expected in the second operating port 34. However, in addition to the shorter period than the high-frequency support mode, the minimum period as in the high-frequency support mode is not guaranteed, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the high-frequency support mode. ..

When executing step S3803, the execution period of the character opening/closing game (the required period from the start to the end of the character opening/closing game) is the time information of the character opening/closing game stored in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82 (high frequency character object). Information indicating the number of times of opening/closing the opening/closing game, each opening time, each waiting time, etc.) is used. Further, the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game varies depending on the winning situation to the second operating port 34, but the execution period in this step is the maximum period (22. 5 sec) is used. Therefore, the period derived as the remaining period Tm2 is not a commitment to continue the accessory opening/closing game, and is the maximum remaining period that can be executed. Since the opening period and the ending period are short, these are not considered in FIG. 66, but the opening period and the ending period may be included in the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game.

Returning to the description of the special effect process in FIG. 64, after the execution of step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3008 to execute the effect start process. In this step, special effect flags are stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. In a succeeding step S3702, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game continues even after the end of the high frequency support mode, that is, whether or not the remaining period Tm2 is larger than 0 sec. When it is determined that the accessory opening/closing game does not continue (the remaining period Tm2 is 0 sec), this special effect processing is terminated and the special effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory opening/closing game continues (remaining period Tm2 is longer than 0 sec), the process proceeds to step S3703, and display processing for special effect display is executed. Here, the special effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a schematic view showing a display example of special effects.

In the present embodiment, the first effect display 501 is not displayed during the special effect, and only the second effect display 502 is displayed. Then, in the second effect display 502, a predetermined notification 521 corresponding to the length of the remaining period Tm2 grasped in step S3803 is displayed.

In step S3702 of FIG. 64, it is determined whether the remaining period Tm2 grasped in step S3803 is a predetermined period or longer. As the predetermined period, for example, 7.5 sec, which is a period in which the game times of the second special map can be added twice (the required period from the start of the third opening to the end of the high-prize winning combination opening/closing game) To use. Then, when the remaining period Tm2 is equal to or longer than the predetermined period (when it is possible to add three times in FIG. 66), as shown in FIG. 67(a), the predetermined notification 521 is, for example, “a great chance!!” or the like. The control is performed so that the first notification with a letter is given. On the other hand, when the remaining time period Tm2 is less than the predetermined time period (when passing once in FIG. 66 is possible), as shown in FIG. 67(b), a character such as “chance!” is given as the predetermined notification 521. The control is performed so that the attached second notification is given.

In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the special effect is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the effect start display DR1 from the character ROM 276, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. In step S3702, the audio data for special effects stored in the ROM 243 is read out, and the speaker unit 64 is drive-controlled so that, for example, the same dialogue as the character displayed as the predetermined notification 521 is output by voice.

Note that the present embodiment does not mention the variable display time table regarding the game times of the second special figure in the specific state, but regarding the table, the variable display time of FIG. 26(b) according to the second embodiment described above. The table B (the variation display time and the finalization display time of the game times of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode may be unified) may be used, or in FIG. 55 according to the third embodiment. The variable display time table B (the variable display time and the fixed display time of the game times of the second special figure after the end of the high frequency support mode are fluid) may be used.

Further, the present embodiment is applied to the second embodiment or the third embodiment, and the first effect display 501 is displayed in the special effect, or the second image 507 is displayed together with the predetermined notification 521. Alternatively, the first image 506 may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the remaining period Tm2 grasped in step S3803 is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the first notification is uniformly displayed as the predetermined notification 521. However, whether or not to display the first notification The lottery process may be performed, and the first notification may be displayed more easily than when the remaining period Tm2 is less than the predetermined period. In this case, the second notification may be executed when the remaining time period Tm2 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time period, or the first notification may be executed when the remaining time period Tm2 is shorter than the predetermined time period. , Or both.

In the embodiment described in detail above, as in the second embodiment, the special effect is executed when the high winning a prize combination opening/closing game continues after the end of the high frequency support mode. For this reason, the player can understand that the special electric product 34a is in the open state after the mode is ended by executing the special effect, and the player can come to the game with a sense of expectation in the development after the mode is ended. It will be possible. Moreover, it is configured to give a notification corresponding to the duration of the high winning a prize open/close game after the mode ends. By knowing the length of the duration, the player can grasp or infer the degree of advantage of the game after the end of the mode.For example, when a notification corresponding to a long duration is given, joyful high frequency support is provided. The end of the mode can be reached. With the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy the end game in the high-frequency support mode and improve the fun.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode ends at the start timing of the final game time confirmation display in the high frequency support mode, and the accessory opening/closing game of the general electric officer 34a in the high frequency support mode is executed. This embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in that a plurality of types having different periods are provided. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 83. In these figures, the same components as those in the above-mentioned respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Process for confirming special map>
First, the special figure confirmation display processing executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68. This processing is executed in step S409 of the special figure game time control processing of FIG. 22, and is executed in place of the special figure finalization display processing of FIG. Note that, in FIG. 68, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the special figure confirmation display processing of FIG. 22, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the special figure confirmation display process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the figure (stop result) is being confirmed and displayed on the special figure display unit 43. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the confirmed display. If it is determined that the fixed display is not being performed, that is, if it is the start timing of the fixed display, the fixed display time setting process is executed in step S802.

Here, the distribution table for selecting the fixed display time, that is, the variable display time table will be described with reference to FIG. 69. The variable display time tables other than the variable display time table B of the second special figure for deviation in the specific state are the same as those in the above-mentioned respective embodiments, and therefore only the variable display time table B will be described.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the variable display time table B for disengagement according to the present embodiment, variation pattern information (variation display time and confirmation) for game times in which the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is 1 to 15. Display time) is set (stored). Of these, the variable display time and the fixed display time for the game times in which the value of the high frequency game number counter area JC is 1 to 8 are the variable display time table B according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 26 ( b)) is the same as that of the first embodiment, except for the game display in which the value of the high frequency game number counter area JC is 9, that is, the final display time of the final game number in the high frequency support mode. It is 4.5 sec, which is longer than the variable display time table B. Also, in the variable display time table B according to the present embodiment, the number of game times in which the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is 10 to 15 (the first special time to the sixth special time after the high-frequency support mode ends) The game time) is the same as that of the variable display time table B according to the first embodiment.

Returning to the description of the special figure finalization display process of FIG. 68, in the process of step S802, the finalization display time selected by referring to the variable display time table in step S704, step S705, or step S706 of FIG. It is set in the fixed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d. In a succeeding step S803, a confirmation display start process is executed, and thereafter, in a step S4001, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The second special figure flag is a flag that indicates that the current game time is the game time of the second special figure.

If it is determined that the second special map flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S807, and the process for ending the high frequency support mode is executed. In the process for ending the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 35, the value of the high frequency game number counter area JC (the number of times the game number of the second special figure is executed in the high frequency support mode) is updated and It is determined whether the value of the counter area JC is "0" (step S1702, step S1703). Then, when the value of the counter area JC is “0”, that is, when it is the start timing of the final display in the final game time (the ninth game time), it is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The high frequency support flag is erased, and the high frequency support mode is ended (step S1704). That is, in the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode is ended (the support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode) at the start timing of the confirmation display.

After performing the process of step S807 of FIG. 68, the process proceeds to step S4002, and a process of clearing (erasing) the second special figure flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e is performed.

Next, various counters for the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 to perform various lottery will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of accessory opening/closing games are set as the accessory opening/closing games (high-prize prize opening/closing games) of the ordinary electric accessory 34a during the high-frequency support mode. An open type counter C5 is provided as a random number for selecting one of the accessory opening/closing games from these.

The open type counter C5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. The opening type counter C5 is periodically updated and is stored in the electric power reserve holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35.

The distribution destination of the game result (feature opening/closing game) to the opening type counter C5 is stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 113 as an opening type table for general figures. Here, the contents of the open type table for general drawings will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As the open type table, an open type table A (FIG. 71(a)) and an open type table B (FIG. 71(b)) are provided. The open type table A is referred to when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and the open type table B is referred to when the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

In the open type table A for the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 71(a), "0" to "99" correspond to the low winning a prize combination opening/closing game. That is, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the opening result (per drawing) is obtained in the universal figure winning/disapproving lottery, the universal electric accessory 34a is always opened/closed in the low winning prize opening/closing game. As shown in FIG. 18(a), in the low winning prize opening/closing game, the opening period of the universal electric member 34a in one opening is extremely short (specifically, shorter than the game cycle of the game ball). ), it is an opening/closing mode in which it is almost impossible to expect a prize to enter the second operating port 34.

As shown in FIG. 71(b), in the open type table B for the high frequency support mode, "0" to "74" correspond to the first high winning a prize combination opening/closing game, and "75" to "89". Corresponding to the second high winning prize opening and closing game, "90" to "99" corresponds to the third high winning prize opening and closing game. In both of these cases, the opening period of the normal electric utility product 34a in one opening is longer than that in the low prize winning product opening/closing game (specifically, longer than the firing cycle of the game ball), and the second operation It is an opening/closing mode in which a prize is easily generated in the mouth 34.

Here, various high winning prize opening and closing games will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72(a), in the first high winning prize opening/closing game, opening/closing control of the universal electric product 34a is performed twice from the start to the end of the winning/opening game. In this case, the opening time is set to 1 sec in all cases. In addition, the waiting time between each opening is set to 1 sec, and the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game (the period from the start to the end of the accessory opening/closing game) is 3 sec. That is, the execution period of the first high winning a prize combination opening/closing game is shorter than the final display time (4.5 sec) of the final game time in the high frequency support mode.

In addition, the opening time and the waiting time in the first high winning prize opening and closing game are not limited to the above, and the winning easily occurs in the second working opening 34 (longer than the game ball firing cycle) opening. Is at least once, and its execution period is shorter than the final game time fixed display time in the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), in the second high winning prize opening/closing game, opening/closing control is set to be executed four times from the start to the end of the winning/opening game. The opening/closing control for the first time is a combination of opening for 2 seconds and closing (standby) for 1 second, so that the opening/closing pattern is different from the opening/closing control for the first opening/closing game for the first prize winning prize. Is set to. The remaining opening time from the second opening to the fourth opening and the waiting time for each opening are 1 sec. The execution period of the second high winning a prize open/close game is 8 seconds, which is longer than the final display time of the final game time in the high frequency support mode.

The opening time and the waiting time in the second high winning a prize combination opening and closing game are not limited to the above, and there is at least one opening in which the winning is likely to occur in the second operating port 34, and the execution period thereof. Is arbitrary as long as it is longer than the finalized display time of the final game time in the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), in the third high winning prize opening/closing game, the opening/closing control is set to be executed 6 times from the start to the end of the winning/opening game. The first opening/closing control is a combination of opening for 0.5 sec and closing (standby) for 2.5 sec. The first high winning prize opening/closing game and the second high winning prize opening/closing game. The opening/closing pattern is set to be different from the opening/closing control for the first time. The remaining opening time from the second opening to the sixth opening and the waiting time for each opening are 1 sec. The execution period of the third high winning prize object opening/closing game is 12 seconds, which is longer than the final display time of the final game time in the high frequency support mode and longer than the execution period of the second high winning prize object opening/closing game. There is.

In addition, the opening time and the waiting time in the third high winning a prize combination opening/closing game are not limited to the above, and there is at least one opening in which the winning is likely to occur in the second operating port 34, and the execution period thereof. Is optional as long as it is longer than that of the second accessory opening/closing game.

Further, although the opening period and the ending period are set to 0 sec for convenience in each of the above high winning a prize opening and closing games, the time may be longer than 0 sec in a range satisfying the above respective conditions regarding each high winning a prize opening and closing game.

In the open type table B for the high-frequency support mode of FIG. 71(b), the selection probability of each high winning prize opening/closing game is 75% for the first high winning prize opening/closing game, and the second high winning prize opening/closing game. The game is 15%, and the prize winning prize opening/closing game in Section 3 is 10%. That is, the first high-winning prize object opening/closing game is most easily selected, and the third high-winning prize object opening/closing game is most difficult to be selected. The above selection probabilities are merely examples, and other probabilities may be used.

The distribution process of the winning/closing game is executed by the stop result setting process for the high winning prize opening/closing game in step S2207 of the universal figure variation starting process (FIG. 39). In step S2207, reference is made to the opening type table B for high-frequency support mode (FIG. 71(b)), and the accessory opening/closing game corresponding to the obtained opening type counter C5 is selected. Then, the flag corresponding to the type of the selected accessory opening/closing game is stored in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. For example, if the selected winning and opening game is the first high-winning winning and opening game, a first high-winning winning and opening flag is stored.

In addition, in step S2207, a stop result for the high winning prize opening/closing game is set based on the distribution result of the winning/closing game or the opening type counter C5. This processing is to set a stop result for the release result (per general figure) for the picture in the general figure display portion 44, and the set stop result corresponds to the type of the assigned accessory opening/closing game. It has become a thing. In this sense, the opening type counter C5 can be referred to as a per-university-drawing picture counter for drawing lots of the result of stopping the picture in the general-purpose picture display unit 44. It should be noted that the stop result of the pattern may have a configuration in which one stop result corresponds to one accessory opening/closing game (opening type), or a plurality of stop results may correspond. Further, the stop result may be shared with the first and second special maps, but in order to enhance the distinctiveness between the special map and the general map, the stop result is the same as that of the first and second special maps. It is preferable to have a configuration that does not overlap.

In addition, after executing the stop result setting process for a general figure as described above, a general figure type command including information on the presence/absence of a general figure and the distribution result of the accessory opening/closing game is sent to the effect control device 82. Set as a transmission target. The set universal figure type command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

<Universal game state transition processing>
Next, the universal figure game state transition processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this figure, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the normal game playing state transition process of FIG. 41, and the description thereof is omitted.

If it is determined in step S2305 that the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the process advances to step S4101, and it is determined whether or not the current bonus game opening/closing game is the first high winning bonus game product opening/closing game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first high winning a prize combination open/close flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The first high-win prize combination opening/closing flag indicates that the current high-win prize opening/closing game is the first high-win prize opening/closing game, and step S2207 of FIG. 39 (stop result for high-win prize opening/closing game) It is stored in the various flag storage area 114e in the setting process) and is erased when the accessory opening/closing game ends.

When it is determined that the present game opening/closing game is the first high winning prize game opening/closing game, the process proceeds to step S4102, and "2" is set in the open/close control counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. set. The opening/closing control counter area RC2 is for counting the number of executions of the opening/closing control in which the normal utility product 34a is changed from the closed state to the open state and then brought to the closed state.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4103, and it is determined whether or not the current bonus game opening/closing game is the second high winning bonus game opening/closing game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second high winning a prize combination open/close flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. The second high-win prize winning combination opening/closing flag indicates that the current prize opening/closing game is the second high-winning winning combination opening/closing game.

When it is determined that the present prize opening/closing game is the second high winning prize opening/closing game, the process proceeds to step S4104, and "4" is set in the opening/closing control counter area RC2. In addition, when it is determined that the present character opening/closing game is not the second high winning prize opening/closing game, this means that the current character opening/closing game is the third high winning prize opening/closing game. In this case, Advances to step S4105 to set "6" in the opening/closing control counter area RC2.

After executing step S2306, step S4102, step S4104, or step S4105, in step S2308, a universal figure opening command setting process is executed.

If it is determined in step S2310 that the opening period has elapsed, the accessory opening/closing process is executed in step S4106. Here, the accessory opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In this figure, the same steps as those of the accessory opening/closing control of FIG. 42 are designated by the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After the accessory release process of step S2404 is executed, each open/close control setting process is executed in step S4201. As shown in FIG. 75, in the setting process for each opening/closing control, first in step S4301, it is determined whether a high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, the process advances to step S4302, and "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set in the third timer counter area TC3 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S4303, and it is determined whether or not the current bonus game opening/closing game is the second high winning bonus bonus product opening/closing game. When it is determined that the game is the second high-winning prize opening/closing game, in step S4304, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "3", that is, the second high-winning prize opening/closing game. It is determined whether or not it is the first opening timing in. When it is determined that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "3", "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) is set in the third timer counter area TC3 in step S4305.

If a negative determination is made in the above step S4303 (it is determined that the current character opening/closing game is not the second high winning character opening/closing game), the processing proceeds to step S4306, and this character opening/closing game is the third high winning combination. It is determined whether the game is an object opening/closing game. If it is determined that the game is a third high-winning prize opening/closing game, whether or not the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "6" in step S4307, that is, the third high-winning prize opening/closing game. It is determined whether or not it is the first opening timing in. When it is determined that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "6", "250" (corresponding to 0.5 sec) is set in the third timer counter area TC3 in step S4308.

When a negative determination is made in step S4306, step S4307 or step S4304, the flow advances to step S4309 to set "500" (corresponding to 1 sec) in the third timer counter area TC3.

After the execution of step S4302, step S4305, step S4308 or step S4309, the value of the second prize counter area PC2 is set to "10" in step S4310, and thereafter, the setting process for each opening/closing control ends.

Returning to the description of the accessory opening/closing process in FIG. 74, after the execution of step S4201, the universal figure opening command setting process is executed in step S2406.

If it is determined in step S2413 that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is not "0", that is, the number of winning game balls to the second operating port 34 is one of the conditions for ending the accessory opening/closing game. When it is determined that the number does not reach the certain upper limit winning number (10), the process proceeds to step S4202, and it is determined whether or not the current bonus game opening/closing game is the third high winning bonus game opening/closing game. If it is determined that the game is a third high-winning prize opening/closing game, in step S4203, whether the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "5", that is, the third high-winning prize opening/closing game. It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first standby in. If it is determined that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "5", the flow advances to step S4204 to set "1250" (corresponding to 2.5 sec) in the third timer counter area TC3.

If a negative determination is made in step S4202 or step S4203, the flow advances to step S4205 to set "500" (corresponding to 1 sec) in the third timer counter area TC3. After the execution of step S4204 or step S4205, the process advances to step S2416 to execute the universal figure close command setting process.

<Public game time production>
Next, the universal figure game time effect executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. 76 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the universal figure variation display control process, and FIG. 78(a) is for explaining the flow of the universal figure game time effect. And (b) is a flowchart showing processing for starting the universal figure variation.

As shown in FIG. 76, a region which does not overlap with each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the reserved display regions Ga and Gb in the display screen G, more specifically, in the upper portion of the display screen G, the variable display of the universal game time is displayed. The general figure display area P is set as the area. The general figure display area P is composed of a plurality of (two) display portions, and variable display is possible by switching display colors in these display portions. Further, the public figure display area P is smaller than the variable display area in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and each display unit in the public figure display area P is smaller than each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol).

The general figure display area P corresponds to the general figure display section 44, and when the general figure display section 44 displays variable display, the general figure display area P also displays variable display. Then, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 35 is displayed in the general figure display area P together with the general figure display portion 44.

The variable display of the universal figure game times effect on the display screen G is performed by switching the display colors of the two display portions in the universal figure display area P. For example, as shown in FIG. 78(a1), when the general/university game time is started from the situation where the display colors of the two display parts are displayed in the same or substantially the same display color (for example, white), As shown in FIG. 78(a2), the display color of one display unit can be switched to a second display color (for example, blue) which is a color different from the colors up to then (in the figure, the color difference of the display unit is hatched. Are displayed differently). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(a3), the color of the display unit on the side switched to the second display color is switched to the original first display color, and the color of the other display unit is changed to the first display color. To the second display color, and the colors of the respective display portions are switched again as shown in FIG. 78(a4). Basically, the variable display of the game play times is basically repeated by switching the display colors of these two display parts (FIG. 78(a2)→FIG. 78(a3)→FIG. 78(a4)→FIG. 78(a2). Repeated). The switching of the display color is set to make one round in about 0.5 sec, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish the respective displays before and after the switching.

When the variable display time of the universal figure game time effect elapses, as a result of the game operation of the universal figure game time effect, notification is given as to whether the result is an opening result or a disengagement result that shifts to the accessory opening/closing game. In the case of the opening result, as shown in FIG. 78(a5), both of the two display parts become the second display color, and the variable display ends. This stop display is continued for a period (fixed display time) during which the general-use picture display is stopped and displayed on the general-purpose display unit 44.

In the present embodiment, there are provided a plurality of types of accessory opening/closing games, which are low winning prize opening/closing games and first to third high winning prize opening/closing games as types of opening/closing games. In the universal figure game time effect in the area P, the same stop result (winning symbol) is displayed in a stopped state even when any of these accessory opening/closing games is executed. For this reason, when the player visually recognizes the universal figure display area P, it is possible to identify that the regular figure is in variable display, the regular figure is in fixed display, and whether or not there is a release result, but it is open. In the case of the result, it is not possible to identify which accessory opening/closing game controls the opening/closing of the general electric auditors a thing 34a. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of inferring how the opening/closing control of the general electric accessory 34a is controlled.

On the other hand, in the universal figure game time executed on the universal figure display unit 44, as already described, the stop result corresponding to the type of the accessory opening/closing game is displayed. The general-purpose display unit 44 is apart from the central portion of the game board 24 and is not conspicuous. Therefore, even with such a configuration, it is assumed that the above-mentioned presumed interest is unlikely to be disturbed. Further, by stopping and displaying the stop result corresponding to the type of the accessory opening/closing game on the general-purpose display unit 44, there is an effect that it can contribute to the early detection of the misconduct. For example, although the result of the actual internal lottery is not the high winning prize opening/closing game, the act of operating the ordinary electric prize product 34a in the high winning prize opening/closing game is performed by some fraud. In this case, an employee of the game hall can find that the result of the actual internal lottery does not match the operation of the general electric accessory 34a by looking at the general-purpose display section 44.

On the other hand, when the result of the universal figure winning/disapproving lottery is a miss result, as shown in FIG. 78(a1), in the universal figure display area P, both of the two display parts are changed to the first display color and variably displayed. Ends. The stop result corresponding to the disengagement result is also stopped and displayed on the general-purpose display unit 44.

<Universal figure variable display control processing>
Next, as the processing related to the universal figure game times effect in the universal figure display area P, the universal figure variation display control processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77. This process is executed as part of the regular process started by the MPU 242 every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec).

In the universal figure fluctuation display control process, first in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the universal figure game time is being executed. If it is determined that the universal figure game game is not being executed, the process advances to step S4402, and it is determined whether the universal figure variation command (step S2210 in FIG. 39) has been received from the main control device 81. If it is determined that the general-purpose figure change command has not been received, the general-use figure variation display control processing ends, while if it is determined that the general-use figure variation command has been received, the general figure display area is displayed. In order to start the ordinary figure game time effect in P, the ordinary figure change start process of step S4403 is executed. Here, the universal figure fluctuation starting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 78(b).

In the routine figure variation start process, first, in step S4501, the variation display time in the current routine figure game time is grasped based on the routine figure variation command from the main control device 81. Further, in step S4501, it is determined based on the universal figure type command from the main control device 81 whether or not the result of the universal figure win/loss lot is an open result (a universal figure result). In addition, as already explained in the general figure game time production in the general figure display area P, since the stop result corresponding to the type of the accessory opening/closing game is not displayed, it is not necessarily from the general figure type command to the type of the accessory opening/closing game. Although it is not necessary to specify, if, for example, a different effect (for example, different background images are displayed on the display screen G or the general figure display area P) is executed depending on the type of the accessory opening/closing game, this step is performed. It is advisable to specify the type of accessory opening and closing game.

In a succeeding step S4502, a process of setting a stop result in the present universal game playing time effect is executed based on the result of winning in step S4501. That is, when the information specified in step S4501 is the release result, the stop result is set so that the two display units are stopped and displayed in the second display color, and when the result is the disconnection result, Sets the stop result so that the two display parts are stopped and displayed in the first display color. It should be noted that the setting of the stop result may be performed after the start of the general/universal game time production, until the variable display time elapses (until the fixed display is started). May be

In a succeeding step S4503, a process of outputting a command to the display control device 212 is executed so as to start the ordinary figure game time effect, and then the regular figure change start process is ended. On the basis of the received command, the MPU 272 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the universal figure game time effect is started in the universal figure display area P.

Returning to the description of FIG. 77, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4401 (judgment that the universal figure game game is being executed), the flow proceeds to step S4404 and it is determined whether or not the universal figure variation display time has elapsed. In this determination, the MPU 242 measures (understands) the elapsed time after the start of the ordinary game play effect (or the reception of the universal command change command), and the elapsed time is specified in step S4501. This is performed by determining whether or not the variable display time of has been reached. If it is determined that the general figure fluctuation display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4405, the general figure fluctuation in-progress processing is executed, and then the general figure fluctuation display control processing is ended. In the normal figure changing process, the display of the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the display colors of the two display parts are repeatedly switched in the normal figure display area P.

When a negative determination is made in step S4404, the flow proceeds to step S4406, and the universal figure fixing display process is executed. In the process for displaying a figure-to-be-fixed, the stop display of the area P is started so that the display part of the figure-to-be-displayed area P is displayed with the stop result set in step S4502 of FIG. It continues until the fixed display time of the universal game time has passed. After the execution of step S4406, the general-universal-drawing variable display control process ends.

<About the flow of games>
Next, the flow of the game when the high frequency support mode ends and after the end will be described.

As in the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the high-frequency support mode ends when the final game number finalization display in the high-frequency support mode ends, in the high-frequency support mode end timing and after the end of the mode. The start timing of the game time of the first second special figure becomes the same time. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the high-frequency support mode ends when the final game time final display is started as in the present embodiment, the first second is delayed by the final display time from the end of the high-frequency support mode. The game time of the special figure will be started. That is, after the end of the mode, until the first game play of the second special figure is started (in other words, after the end of the mode, until the reserved number RbN of the second special figure is reduced first) , A grace period of a length corresponding to the fixed display time occurs. In the present embodiment, this grace period is utilized to make the degree of advantage of the game different after the end of the high frequency support mode.

First, a case where the high-frequency support mode ends during the variable display of the picture in the universal figure game time will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

At timing t1 in the high-frequency support mode, when the accessory opening/closing game that has been executed up to that point is completed, one universal figure holding memory is consumed, and the universal figure winning/missing lottery is executed, and the universal figure game time is Be started. In this case, the result of the win/no win lottery shall be the open result.

After that, before the variable display of the picture of the normal game cycle is finished, the variable display of the last game cycle (the ninth special game cycle of the second special figure) in the high-frequency support mode is finished, and the confirmation display is started. Then, the high-frequency support mode ends. In this case, the result of the winning/disapproving lottery of the universal figure game time, which is started at the timing t1, is changed to the miss result. As a result, at the timing t3 after the end of the high frequency support mode, even if the universal game time ends, the universal electric accessory 34a is not opened.

Further, at the timing t3, with the end of the universal figure game time, the next universal figure game time is started, but this game time is after the support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the variable display time is long (for example, 30 sec), and the winning probability of the universal figure winning/winning lottery is lower than that in the high frequency support mode. For this reason, it is difficult to expect that the general electric accessory 34a will be in the open state before the number of reserved memories in the second special figure becomes zero. Even if the result of the win/no win lottery is the open result, since the opening/closing control of the low-win prize auction open/close game (FIG. 18(a)) is performed on the ordinary electric prize auction 34a, the prize for the second working port 34 is won. I can't expect it.

As a result of the above, even if the first game time (game time of the second special map) is started after the mode is finished and the reserved memory of the second special map is vacant, the game ball is in the second operating port 34. It is not possible to add the game times of the second special figure without winning the prize.

Next, a case where the first high winning a prize combination opening/closing game is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a case where the high-frequency support mode ends at the end of the variable display of the universal figure game times will be described as an example.

At timing t1, when the variable display of the ninth game play of the second special figure is finished and the confirmation display is started, the high frequency support mode is finished. After that, the special figure stop result which is stopped and displayed by the start of the fixed display is continuously displayed until timing t4 when the fixed display time (4.5 sec) elapses.

Further, when the variation display of the universal figure game times ends at the timing t1, the universal figure stop result is stopped and displayed for the fixed display time (0.5 sec) for the universal figure, and then the stop display end timing. At a timing t2, the first high winning a prize combination opening/closing game of the ordinary electric prize product 34a is started. This first high winning a prize combination opening and closing game is continued until the execution period of 3 seconds elapses (timing t3).

Here, the period TA2 (3 sec), which is the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game, is the final display time (4.5 sec) from the final game time of the second special diagram to the final display time (0.5 sec) of the general game time. It is shorter than the period TA1 (4 sec) obtained by subtracting. For this reason, the first high-win prize opening/closing game does not continue beyond the fixed display time (grace period), and is absorbed during the fixed display time (grace period). In other words, after the first high-prize winning combination opening/closing game ends, the first (first) second special figure game time after the mode ends will be started (timing t3, timing t4). After the start of, the remaining opening of the accessory opening and closing game does not occur. Therefore, even if the number of reserves RbN of the second special figure is reduced by the start of the first game time and a vacancy occurs in the second special figure display reserve area Rb, the game ball wins the second working opening 34. Without it, it is not possible to add the game times of the second special map.

By the way, since the special figure game times and the special figure game times are performed independently and are proceeding asynchronously, the variation ending timing of the second special figure and the variation ending of the ordinary figure are performed as in the example shown in FIG. 80. It is rare that the timing coincides with each other, and as shown in FIG. 81, the phase of the game time of the second special figure and the general game time (the open/close game of the general electric product 34a) greatly deviate. Most of the time. Even in that case, the example shown in FIG. 80 is the timing at which the start of the universal game game time is the most delayed as the result of the universal figure win/loss lot in the high-frequency support mode is valid, and thus the accessory opening/closing game Although the end timing of may be earlier than the illustrated timing, it is not further delayed. Therefore, when the first high winning a prize combination opening/closing game is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode, no matter how the phase between the special figure game time and the general figure game time is deviated, after the mode ends. The accessory opening/closing game does not continue until after the first game time starts, and the game time of the second special figure cannot be added.

Then, in the high-frequency support mode, when the result of the universal figure winning/missing lottery is an open result, the probability that the first high-prize winning a prize open/close game is selected as the type of the open/close game is the highest (FIG. 71). (B)). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game times of the second special figure cannot be basically added after the mode ends.

By the way, when the number RbN of reservations in the second special figure at the end of the high-frequency support mode is less than the upper limit, it is possible to supplement the reservation storage of the second special figure in the period TA2. That is, the execution period of the final display in the final game times of the high-frequency support mode (waiting period until the first game time after the mode ends) is the last to earn the number of executions of the game times of the second special map. It will be an opportunity.

Next, a case where the second high winning a prize combination opening/closing game is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In order to facilitate the comparison with the case of FIG. 80, a case where the high-frequency support mode ends at the end of the variable display of the universal figure game times will be described as an example.

At the timing t1, when the variation display of the ninth game play of the second special figure ends, the high-frequency support mode ends, and then the fixed display time (4.5 sec) elapses until the timing t3 for the second special figure. The stop result continues to be displayed as a stop.

Further, when the variation display of the universal figure game times ends at the timing t1, the universal figure stop result is stopped and displayed for the fixed display time (0.5 sec) for the universal figure, and then the stop display end timing. At the timing t2, the second high-win prize auction open/close game of the ordinary electric power auction 34a is started. This second high winning a prize combination opening and closing game is continued until the execution period of 8 seconds elapses (timing t4).

Here, during the period TA2 (8 sec) which is the execution period of the second high winning a prize combination opening/closing game, from the fixed display time (4.5 sec) in the final game time of the second special map to the fixed display time of the regular game time (( It is longer than the period TA1 (4 sec) after subtracting 0.5 sec). Therefore, the second high-prize winning combination opening/closing game cannot be completely absorbed during the fixed display time (grace period), and the second high-winning winning combination opening/closing game can continue even after the fixed display time elapses. In other words, after the first (first) game time of the second special figure after the mode is finished and a vacancy has occurred in the second special figure display holding area Rb, the rest of the second high winning a prize combination opening/closing game Opening will occur.

Further, the period TA2 is shorter than the period TA3 (9.5 sec) from the timing t2 until the second game time (game time of the second special figure) is started after the mode is ended, so the second time is the second time. The opening and closing game of the accessory does not continue until after the start of the game time. Therefore, when the second high winning a prize combination opening and closing game is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode, after the mode ends, the game time of the second special map starts and then the game time of the second special map once. It becomes possible to add.

In the example shown in FIG. 82, as in the example shown in FIG. 80, the result of the universal figure win/loss lot in the high-frequency support mode is valid, and the start of the universal figure game time is most delayed. Has become. Therefore, in the actual game, when the phase of the game time of the second special figure and the general game time (the character opening and closing game of the general electric auditors a) shifts, the end timing of the character opening and closing game is the timing shown in the figure. It may be faster than it is, but not even later. In other words, when the second high-prize winning a prize open/close game is selected as the open/close game at the end of the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to add the game times of the second special map at most once.

In this way, the second high winning a prize combination opening and closing game is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the first high winning a prize combination opening and closing game is executed. In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the first opening of the second high-prize winning combination opening/closing game is made different from that of the first high-winning winning combination opening/closing game. The opening/closing pattern is different between the second high-winning prize object opening/closing game and the first high-winning prize object opening/closing game. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the behavior of the general electric auditors a thing 34a to identify whether the first high winning prize object opening/closing game is executed or the second high winning prize object opening game is executed. be able to. That is, it is possible to add an interesting feature of determining or inferring the type of the accessory opening/closing game from the behavior of the general electric auditor product 34a, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

In that case, whether the start of the character opening/closing game is specified by the player, or whether the closed state of the general electric auditors product 34a is due to the standby state during the character opening/closing game, or the execution of the universal figure game time Although it is assumed that it is necessary to identify the above, in the present embodiment, since the display area P is provided, the above identification can be easily performed by visually recognizing the area P. become. In that case, since the stop result stopped and displayed in the display area P is common to the first high-prize winning combination object opening/closing game and the second high-winning winning object opening/closing game, the type of the accessory opening/closing game based on the stop result. Cannot be determined. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the type of the accessory opening/closing game from being recognizable by the player visually recognizing the display area P, and to eliminate the amusement that is determined from the behavior of the general electric auditors a thing 34a.

Next, a case where the second high winning a prize combination opening/closing game is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 83. In order to facilitate the comparison with the cases of FIG. 80 and FIG. 82, a case where the high frequency support mode ends at the end of the variable display of the universal game time will be described as an example.

When the variation display of the game number of the second special figure of the 9th time is finished at timing t1, the high-frequency support mode is finished, and then the special figure stop result is stopped until timing t3 when the fixed display time (4.5 sec) elapses. Continue to be displayed.

Further, when the variation display of the universal figure game times ends at the timing t1, the universal figure stop result is stopped and displayed for the fixed display time (0.5 sec) for the universal figure, and then the stop display end timing. At the timing t2, the third high-win prize auction open/close game of the ordinary electric power auction 34a is started. This third high winning a prize combination opening and closing game is continued until the execution period of 12 seconds has passed (timing t4).

On the other hand, since the execution period of the game times of the second special figure after the mode ends is 5.5 seconds (except in the case of a big hit or a small hit), the second game time after the mode ends is started. Is the timing t3 when 9.5 sec has elapsed from the timing t2. Therefore, the accessory opening/closing game continues not only after the start of the first game time but also after the start of the second game time. That is, the period TA2 (12 sec), which is the execution period of the third high winning a prize combination opening/closing game, is from the timing t2 until the second game time (game time of the second special map) after the mode ends is started. Since it is longer than the period TA3 (9.5 sec), the remaining opening of the second high winning a prize combination opening/closing game is carried out in each of the first game time and the second game time.

Further, the period TA2 is shorter than the period TA4 (14 sec) from the timing t2 until the third game time (game time of the second special figure) is started after the mode ends, so the third game is performed. The game of opening and closing a character does not continue until after the start of the game. Therefore, if the third high winning a prize combination opening/closing game is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode, after the mode ends, after the game time of the second special figure starts, the game time of the second special figure is performed twice. It becomes possible to add.

Also in this case, the end timing of the accessory opening/closing game is illustrated in the actual game while the phase of the game time of the second special figure and the general game game time (game opening/closing game of the general electric auditors product 34a) are deviated. It may be earlier than the timing, but not even later. In other words, when the third high winning prize opening/closing game is selected as the opening/closing game at the end of the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to add the game times of the second special diagram at most twice.

In addition, the opening time of the first opening and the closing time of the first waiting of the third high winning a prize opening and closing game are different from those of the first and second high winning a prize opening and closing games, and the universal power in one opening and closing control. The opening/closing pattern of the accessory 34a is different from that of other high winning prize opening/closing games. Therefore, it is possible to add an interesting feature of determining or inferring the type of the accessory opening/closing game from the behavior of the general electric accessory 34a.

It should be noted that, in FIGS. 82 and 83, the case where the second high-prize winning combination opening/closing game or the third high-winning winning combination opening/closing game is executed at the end of the high-frequency support mode is illustrated. It may also be executed during high-frequency support mode. In this respect, the second and third high winning prize opening/closing games have a shorter waiting time than the second opening/closing pattern according to the first embodiment, and the winning of the second working opening 34 is likely to occur. Therefore, even if these accessory opening/closing games are executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to play the games without significantly reducing the number of balls held.

It should be noted that any one of the above second to fourth embodiments is applied to this embodiment, and after the mode ends, the game time of the second special figure that can be added after the start of the game time of the second special figure is added. The number may be notified, or a notification corresponding to the duration of the accessory opening/closing game after the mode is finished may be performed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The high-frequency support mode ends at the start of finalized display of the final game time, and the first game time of the mode is started after the fixed display time has elapsed from the end of the mode. After that, it is assumed that the accessory opening/closing game can be executed over the end of the mode, and further, in the mode of the accessory opening/closing game executed during the mode, an executable period is longer than the fixed display time. It is assumed that a long specific mode (a second high winning prize object opening/closing game and a third high winning prize object opening/closing game) is included.

In this case, the execution timing of the accessory opening/closing game is the timing at which the accessory opening/closing game is executed over the end of the mode, and the specific aspect is executed as the aspect of the accessory opening/closing game at that time. For example, the remaining opening/closing control of the accessory opening/closing game can be generated after the start of the first game time. Therefore, it is possible to generate a winning in the second operating port 34 in a state where the number of reserved RbN of the second special figure is reduced, and it is possible to add the reserved information (and by extension, game times). As a result, even though the high-frequency support mode is internally ended, it is equivalent to extending the mode until after the first game play is started, and the player has an expectation after the mode ends. It becomes possible to continue playing.

The aspect of the winning/closing game executed during the high-frequency support mode is configured to further include the first high-prize winning combination opening/closing game whose executable period is shorter than the fixed display time.

In this case, even if the character opening/closing game is executed so as to stride over the end of the mode, if it is the first high-prize winning character opening/closing game, the character opening/closing game ends before the start of the first game time. However, after the start of the game, the opening of the general electric accessory 34a does not occur. In other words, in order to be able to add the hold information, not only the execution timing of the character opening/closing game but also the type of the character opening/closing game at that time is required, and the luck of the player is more strongly reflected. .. As a result, the player's sense of accomplishment and happiness when the addition of the hold information can be achieved is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably enhance the fun.

Further, in the above-described configuration, except for the execution timing of the accessory opening/closing game, it becomes possible to intentionally generate a state in which the hold information can be added after the mode ends by the control of the pachinko machine 10. By adjusting the selection ratio of each period in the development or design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to equip a function that allows addition of hold information after the mode ends, while maintaining a profit balance with the game hall, and in actual operation. A more preferable configuration can be obtained.

As the character opening/closing game in the high-frequency support mode, the first high winning prize object opening/closing game is more easily selected than the specific mode. In this case, since the ratio of cases where the pending information cannot be added and ends is high, the value of the event in which the pending information can be added can be increased. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority and sense of accomplishment when the addition can be achieved, and suitably increase the game motivation.

The opening and closing control pattern is made different between the first high winning prize opening and closing game and the specific mode. In this case, it is possible for the player to infer which mode of the accessory opening/closing game is being executed by watching the movement of the universal electric accessory 34a. As a result, it is possible to add an interesting feature of inferring whether or not it is possible to add the hold information based on the behavior of the general electric accessory 34a.

In the above-mentioned specific mode, the waiting time between each opening is set to be equal to or less than twice the firing cycle of the game ball, excluding the first waiting time of the third high winning a prize opening and closing game.

The specific feature character opening/closing game may be performed not only in the final stage of the high-frequency support mode but also in the opening stage and the middle stage. In such a situation, the length of the waiting time is less than or equal to twice the firing cycle of the game ball, so in the waiting time of the accessory opening/closing game of the specific aspect, two game balls are consecutively operated in the second operation port. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of events that do not win the prize. As a result, even if a specific aspect accessory opening/closing game is carried out in the mode, it is possible to prevent the reserved number RbN of the second special figure from sharply decreasing, and the original game playability of the mode is hindered. This can be suppressed.

It should be noted that all the waiting times do not necessarily have to be less than twice the firing cycle of the game ball, and at least one waiting period has only to be less than twice the firing cycle.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode ends at the start timing of the final game time final display in the high frequency support mode, and a plurality of types of final display with different lengths in the final game time of the high frequency support mode. The difference from each of the above embodiments is that time is provided. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. In these figures, the same components as those in the above-mentioned respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, an accessory opening/closing game of the universal electric accessory 34a according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the accessory opening/closing game of the universal electric accessory 34a in the high frequency support mode is only the third high winning prize opening/closing game as shown in FIG. 84(b). The execution period of the third high-win prize opening/closing game (the period from the start of the first opening/closing control to the end of the final opening/closing control) is 12 sec (see FIG. 72(c)).

Next, the variable display time table B (the variable display time table of the second special figure for deviation in the specific state) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84(a).

In the variable display time table B of the present embodiment, a plurality of fixed displays are provided for the game times of the second special figure in which the value of the specific game number counter area OC is "9", that is, the final game times of the high frequency support mode. The time is set (stored). One of these plural fixed display times is selected based on the acquired variation type counter CS. Since the fixed display time is stored together with the variable display time, it is selected together with the variable display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS.

Specifically, when the variation type counter CS is “0” to “149”, the variation display time of 30 sec and the confirmed display time of 15 sec are selected, and the variation type counter CS is “150” to “179”. In the case of, the variable display time of 30 sec and the confirmed display time of 9 sec are selected. When the variation type counter CS is "180" to "199", the variation display time of 30 sec and the confirmed display time of 4.5 sec are selected. That is, in the present embodiment, the grace period according to the fifth embodiment is not uniform, and changes among three types of 15 sec, 9 sec, and 4.5 sec.

The variable display time and the fixed display time when the value of the specific game number counter area OC is “1” to “8”, “10” to “15” are the variable display table B shown in FIG. It is similar to the case of.

The variable display time table B of FIG. 84(a) is referred to in step S705 in the setting process of the special figure variable display time of FIG. 25, and the variable display time and the fixed display time are selected. When selecting the variable display time and the fixed display time, the reserved number RbN of the second special figure at that time is not referred to (the so-called time saving function is not activated).

<About the flow of games>
The flow of the game at the end of the high frequency support mode and after the end will be described. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, as in the case of the above-described fourth embodiment, a case in which the high-frequency support mode ends at the end of the variable display of the universal figure game times will be described as an example.

First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 85 where the final display time of 15 sec is selected in the final game time of the high frequency support mode.

At timing t1, when the variable display of the ninth game play of the second special figure is finished and the confirmation display is started, the high frequency support mode is finished. After that, the special figure stop result which is stopped and displayed by the start of the fixed display is continuously displayed until timing t4 when the fixed display time (15 sec) elapses.

Further, when the variation display of the universal figure game times ends at the timing t1, the universal figure stop result is stopped and displayed for the fixed display time (0.5 sec) for the universal figure, and then the stop display end timing. At the timing t2, the third high-win prize auction open/close game of the ordinary electric power auction 34a is started. This third high winning a prize combination opening and closing game is continued until the execution period of 12 seconds has passed (timing t3).

On the other hand, the first game time of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode starts at the timing t4 when the final game time confirmation display ends, and this timing is the third high winning a prize. It is delayed from the timing t3 which is the end timing of the opening/closing game. In other words, the third high winning a prize combination opening and closing game ends before the first game play of the second special figure after the mode ends is started.

That is, the period TA5 (15 sec), which is the final display time of the final game time, is the period TA6 (12. Since it is longer than 5 sec), the remaining opening of the accessory opening/closing game does not occur after the start of the game time. Therefore, even if there is a vacancy in the reserved memory of the second special figure due to the start of the first game round, the game ball does not win the second operating port 34, and the game round of the second special figure is added. I can't.

In the example shown in FIG. 85, similar to the example of FIG. 81 according to the fifth embodiment, it is assumed that the result of the universal figure win/loss lot in the high frequency support mode is valid, and Is the most delayed start. Therefore, in the actual game, when the phase of the game time of the second special figure and the general game time (the character opening and closing game of the general electric auditors a) shifts, the end timing of the character opening and closing game is the timing shown in the figure. It may be faster than it is, but not even later. Therefore, no matter how the phases of both game times are deviated, when the final display time of 15 sec is selected in the final game time, after the mode ends, after the game time of the second special figure starts, The special game times cannot be added.

Next, a case where the confirmed display time of 9 seconds is selected in the final game time of the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

When the variation display of the game number of the second special figure of the 9th time is finished at the timing t1, the high-frequency support mode is ended, and then the special figure stop result is stopped and displayed until the timing t3 when the fixed display time (9 sec) elapses. to continue.

Further, when the variation display of the universal figure game times ends at the timing t1, the universal figure stop result is stopped and displayed for the fixed display time (0.5 sec) for the universal figure, and then the stop display end timing. At the timing t2, the third high-win prize auction open/close game of the ordinary electric power auction 34a is started. This third high winning a prize combination opening and closing game is continued until the execution period of 12 seconds has passed (timing t4).

On the other hand, the first game time of the second special figure after the high frequency support mode ends is started at the timing t3 at which the final game time confirmation display ends, and this timing is the third high winning a prize. The opening/closing game comes before the end timing t4. That is, the accessory opening/closing game is continued over the start timing of the first game time. That is, the period TA5 (9 sec), which is the final display time of the final game time, is the period TA6 (12. Since it is shorter than 5 sec), the remaining opening of the accessory opening/closing game occurs during the execution of the first game time.

Further, the period TA7 (14.5 sec), which is the period TA5 (9 sec) plus the execution period (5.5 sec) of the first game time, is longer than the period TA6 (12.5 sec), and thus the second time The character opening/closing game does not continue until after the game time starts. Therefore, when the final display time of 9 seconds is selected in the final game time, the game time of the second special map can be added at most once after the mode ends and after the game time of the second special map starts. It will be possible.

Next, a case where the confirmed display time of 4.5 sec is selected in the final game time of the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 87. Note that the specific operation timings of the game time of the second special figure, the game time of the universal figure, and the general electric accessory 34a are the same as those in the case of FIG. 83 according to the above-described fourth embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be made. Omit it.

As shown in FIG. 87, when the confirmed display time of 4.5 sec is selected, the period TA5 (4.5 sec) which is the confirmed display time of the final game time is the execution period (12 sec) of the accessory opening/closing game. Since it is shorter than the period TA6 (12.5 sec) including the fixed display time (0.5 sec) of the universal game time, the remaining opening of the accessory opening/closing game occurs during the execution of the first game time. .. Furthermore, the period TA7 (10 sec) obtained by adding the execution period (5.5 sec) of the first game time to the period TA5 (4.5 sec) is shorter than the period TA6 (12.5 sec). The remaining opening of the accessory opening/closing game occurs even during the execution of the second game time.

In addition, since the period TA8 (15.5 sec) obtained by adding the execution period (5.5 sec) of the second game time to the period TA7 (10 sec) is longer than the period TA6, after the start of the third game time. The character opening and closing game does not continue until. Therefore, when the final display time of 4.5 sec is selected in the final game time, after the mode ends, the game time of the second special figure is added up to two times after the start of the game time of the second special figure. It will be possible.

As described above, in the present embodiment, depending on which length of the final display time is selected in the final game time of the high-frequency support mode, whether or not the game time of the second special diagram is added and the number of the game times that can be added are determined. The number changes, and the degree of advantage of the player in the game after the mode ends is different.

In the above embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, the type of the accessory opening/closing game in the high frequency support mode is one type, but this embodiment is combined with the fourth embodiment, It may be configured to include a plurality of types of accessory opening and closing games with different execution periods. Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the variable display time of the final game time is set to be the same length, but it may be configured to be different.

Further, any one of the second to fourth embodiments described above is applied to this embodiment, and after the mode ends, the game time of the second special figure that can be added after the start of the game time of the second special figure is added. The number may be notified, or a notification corresponding to the duration of the accessory opening/closing game after the mode is finished may be performed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The high-frequency support mode ends at the start of finalized display of the final game time, and the first game time of the mode is started after the fixed display time has elapsed from the end of the mode. After that, it is assumed that the accessory opening/closing game can be executed over the end of the mode, and the final game time final display time is diversified.

In this case, in relation to the length of the fixed display time (grace period), whether or not the character opening/closing game continues until after the start of the first game time, and the length of the continuation period when it continues may vary. To do. For example, if the character opening/closing game continues even after the first game time is started, it is possible to generate a prize for the second working port 34 in a state where the reserved number RbN of the second special figure is reduced. It becomes possible to add hold information (and by extension, game times). As a result, even though the high-frequency support mode is internally ended, it is equivalent to extending the mode until after the first game play is started, and the player has an expectation after the mode ends. It becomes possible to continue playing.

As the final display time of the selectable final game times, the first period (4.5 sec, 9 sec final display time) shorter than the executable time (12 sec) of the accessory opening/closing game, and the first period longer than the executable time. Two periods (confirmed display time of 15 sec) are provided, and the period selected by lottery is set as the confirmed display time.

In the above configuration, except for the execution timing of the accessory opening/closing game, it becomes possible to intentionally generate a state in which the hold information can be added after the mode ends, by the control of the pachinko machine 10. By adjusting the selection ratio of each period in the development or design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to equip a function that allows addition of hold information after the mode ends, while maintaining a profit balance with the game hall, and in actual operation. A more preferable configuration can be obtained.

The second period is more easily selected than the first period. In this case, since the ratio of cases where the pending information cannot be added and ends is high, the value of the event in which the pending information can be added can be increased. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority and sense of accomplishment when the addition can be achieved, and suitably increase the game motivation.

The fixed display time is selected regardless of the reserved number RbN of the second special figure. For example, the first period is selected as the confirmed display time or the first period is set to the first period when the number RbN of reservations is equal to or more than a certain number (for example, 4 which is the upper limit number or 3 which is less than 4). If the configuration is selected more easily than the two periods, if an illegal act that increases the number of reservations RbN is performed, it is not limited to the illegal acquisition of the reservation information (game times), and the illegal game due to the selection of the first period is performed. There is a concern that it will be realized in conjunction with the gain of advantage, and that it will promote fraud. In this respect, in the present configuration, since the fixed display time is selected regardless of the number RbN of holdings, even if a fraudulent act of increasing the number RbN of holdings is performed, the effect thereof is the length of the fixed display time (and the end of the mode). Whether or not it is possible to add the hold information later), and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot (type of jackpot symbol) when the special figure big hit that triggered the transition to the high frequency support mode, a game of the second special figure that can be added after the high frequency support mode ends This is different from each of the above embodiments in that the number of times is changed. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 96. In these figures, the same components as those in the above-mentioned respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the accessory opening/closing game in the high-frequency support mode is provided only with the third high winning prize opening/closing game as in the sixth embodiment.

First, the configuration of the first special figure display portion AS will be described with reference to FIG. 88. 88A is a front view of the first special view display portion AS, and FIG. 88B is a vertical cross-sectional view of a region including the first special view display portion AS and the front side thereof.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), a segment indicator 601 is provided in the first special figure display portion AS. A display area 605 is formed on the display surface of the segment display device 601, and the display area 605 is provided with seven display segments SG1 to SG7. Each of the display segments SG1 to SG7 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the individual light sources to be turned on and off, only one arbitrary display segment is turned on or any combination thereof is used. It is possible to light up a plurality of display segments. Since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the display segments SG1 to SG7 display in a single color.

Each of the display segments SG1 to SG7 has a linear shape when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and in the display area 605, each of the display segments SG1 to SG7 is arranged in the shape of a numeral “8”. Are arranged. Then, by controlling which of the display segments SG1 to SG7 is turned on, it is possible to display a plurality of types of patterns having different appearances.

In the display area 605, each of the display segments SG1 to SG7 is repeatedly turned on and off with the winning of the first operation opening 33 as a trigger, and variable display (variable display or switching display) of the pattern is performed. Then, after the variable display is performed, the display segments SG1 to SG7 set as the lighting target are continuously lit for the stop display period, and the design as the stop result is displayed. As a result, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first working opening 33 is clearly shown.

As shown in FIG. 88B, the segment display 601 is mounted on the display substrate 602. The display substrate 602 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 through electrical wiring, and when a drive signal is output from the main control device 81 to the display substrate 602, the display segments SG1 to SG7 are turned on. It The display substrate 602 is positioned with respect to the decorative member 39 so that the entire display area 605 of the segment display 601 is exposed from the opening 39a provided in the decorative member 39, and is fixed from the back side of the decorative member 39. ing.

In front of the segment display device 601, a cover panel 603 is provided so as to face the display area 605. The cover panel 603 is arranged so as to close the opening 30 of the decorative member 39 from the rear side and is translucent so that the display in the display area 605 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 and the cover panel 603. Has been formed. Specifically, the cover panel 603 is made of black translucent synthetic resin.

By making the cover panel 603 semi-transparent in this way, the display on the first special figure display portion AS can be made visible while the display on the first special figure display portion AS is visible, as compared with the case where the cover panel 603 is colorless and transparent. Can be made inconspicuous. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the display on the symbol display device 41 rather than the display on the first special figure display portion AS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover panel 603 may be formed to be colorless and transparent, or the cover panel 603 may not be provided.

Although not shown, the second special figure display portion BS also has the same configuration as described above.

Next, a stop result table for selecting the stop result for the big hit (big hit symbol) of the first special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 89. The first special figure stop result table for the jackpot result is stored in the stop result table storage area provided in the ROM 113 of the main controller 81. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2 is assumed to loop in the range of "0" to "21".

As shown in FIG. 89, in the first special figure stop result table for big hit results, stop result data corresponding to each stop result is stored in association with the value of the big hit type counter C2. In the present embodiment, 22 kinds of stop results SD0 to SD21 are provided as the stop results of the first special figure for the big hit result, and the value of the big hit type counter C2 is assigned to each stop result one by one. ing.

As described above, the first special figure display portion AS is provided with a plurality of display segments SG1 to SG7 as a means for displaying the stop result, and the stop result data includes the display segments SG1 to SG7. Among them, the information indicates which display segment is turned on and which display segment is turned off. For example, the stop result data corresponding to the stop result SD0 when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “0” is for turning on the display segments SG1, SG6, SG7 while turning off the display segments SG2 to SG5. Has become. Therefore, when the stop result SD0 is set as the stop result, a pattern similar to the number "7" is displayed on the first special figure display area AS.

Each pattern shown in the "result display" column of FIG. 89 shows a pattern displayed by each stop result data. Note that the "result display" item is merely added for convenience in order to make it easy to understand which pattern each stop result data corresponds to, and is stored as stop result information in the stop result table. It is not something that will be done.

The process of setting the stop result when the big hit is generated by the winning/winning lottery of the first special diagram is executed by the stop result setting process for the big hit result in step S608 of the special diagram variation start process (FIG. 24). In step S608, the stop result corresponding to the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is selected with reference to the stop result table shown in FIG. 89. Here, as shown in FIG. 90A, in the jackpot type table for the first special figure (a table for selecting the jackpot type when the big hit of the first special figure occurs), the jackpot type counter C2 "0" to "11" correspond to the 5R jackpot result A, and "12" to "21" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 5R jackpot result B.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89, the stop results SD0 to SD11 associated with “0” to “11” of the jackpot type counter C2 become a 5R jackpot result A (a jackpot pattern), The stop result associated with “11” to “21” of the jackpot type counter C2 becomes a pattern indicating that SD12 to SD21 are the 5R jackpot result B.

In the present embodiment, the stop result and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are made to correspond one-to-one, but if the values of the jackpot type counter C2 do not overlap between the stop results, one stop result is obtained. Alternatively, a plurality of jackpot type counters C2 may be associated with each other.

After the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed as described above, a stop result command including information on the stop result is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82. This process is performed in step S620 of FIG. The set stop result command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). The production control device 82 can specify and select the selected stop result (big hit symbol) by receiving and analyzing the stop result command.

<Special figure fluctuation display time setting process>
Next, the special figure variation display time setting process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. In this figure, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the setting processing of the special figure variation display time of FIG. 25, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If it is determined that the second special map flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S702, and it is determined whether or not the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. That is, by executing the processing of steps S701 and S702, it is determined whether or not the current game time is the game time of the second special figure in the specific state. Here, the specific state is a game state in which a game can be played by receiving a win/no win lottery of the second special figure, and specifically, after the high frequency support mode is started and after the mode is finished, the second special figure is suspended. It is a game state until the number RbN becomes 0.

When it is determined that the specific state flag is stored in step S702, the process proceeds to step S703, and the result of the current win/loss lottery (win/win lottery of the second special map of this time in the specific state) is a big hit or a small hit. Determine whether there is. When it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is not won, the process proceeds to step S4701, and it is determined whether or not the first hit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The first hit flag is stored when a big hit that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs. Specifically, the first hit flag is a big hit in the winning/losing lottery of the first special diagram and is selected at that time. It is stored when the jackpot type is the 5R jackpot result A. Since the first hit flag need only be stored by the start of the specific state, it does not necessarily have to be stored when the big hit occurs, and the big hit game corresponding to the big hit win from the start of the game time that is the big hit win. It may be stored at any timing until the end of (the start of the specific state). The initial hit flag is erased when the specific state ends.

If it is determined that the first hit flag is not stored, the process advances to step S4702 to refer to the variable display time table B1 of the second special figure for deviation and sort (select) the variable display time and the fixed display time. To do.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the present embodiment, two types of tables are provided as the variable display table of the second special figure for deviation in the specific state, and the variable display time table B1 is one of them. .. The variable display time table B1 will be described with reference to FIG.

The variable display time table B1 is the same as the variable display table B (FIG. 84(a)) according to the sixth embodiment, and the value of the specific game number counter area OC is “9”. A plurality of fixed display times are set (stored) for the game time of the special figure, that is, the final game time of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, three types of fixed display time of 15 sec, 9 sec, and 4.5 sec are set. Then, as described in the sixth embodiment, when the final display time of 15 sec is selected in the final game time of the high frequency support mode, after the mode ends, the first game time starts after the first game time starts. If you cannot add 2 special game times and 9sec or 4sec final display time is selected, add 2nd special game time after starting the first game time after the mode ends. It will be possible. That is, by selecting the latter fixed display time, the player can advantageously proceed with the game after the mode ends, as compared with the former fixed display time being selected. The specific correspondence relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and each confirmed display time is the same as that of the fluctuation display time table B1 of FIG. 84(a) according to the sixth embodiment, and therefore the description will be given. Omit it.

Returning to the description of the setting process of the special figure variation display time of FIG. 91, when it is determined in step S4701 that the initial hit flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S4703, which is a trigger for shifting to the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not the jackpot (the jackpot of the first special figure) jackpot pattern (stop result) is one of the stop results SD0 to SD5. Here, as shown in FIG. 89, the stop result corresponding to the 5R big hit result A in which the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the big hit game is 12 kinds of the stop results SD1 to SD11. The results SD0 to SD5 are the results of stopping some of them.

In this step, the above determination is performed by determining whether or not the specific symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The specific symbol flag indicates that the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is one of the stop results SD0 to SD5. This flag is stored at any timing from the start of the game time when the jackpot is won to the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot win (the start of the specific state), and at the end of the specific state Erased.

When it is determined that the jackpot pattern of the jackpot that has triggered the transition to the high frequency support mode is one of the stop results SD0 to SD5, the process proceeds to step S4702, and the variable display time table B1 is referred to and variable display is performed. Distribute (select) time and confirmed display time. That is, when any of the stop results SD0 to SD5 is selected as the stop result at the time of the big hit that triggered the transition to the high frequency support mode, the final display at the final game time of the high frequency support mode is displayed. The time is selected from three types of 15 sec, 9 sec, and 4.5 sec. In this case, by selecting the confirmed display time of 9 seconds or 4.5 seconds, it is possible to add the game time of the second special figure after the mode ends and the first game time starts.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot pattern is not one of the stop results SD0 to SD5, that is, if it is one of the stop results SD7 to SD11, the process proceeds to step S4704, and the variation of the second special map for disengagement. The variable display time and the fixed display time are sorted (selected) with reference to the display time table B2. The variable display time table B2 is one of a plurality of types of tables provided as the variable display table of the second special figure for deviation in the specific state. The variable display time table B2 will be described with reference to FIG.

The variable display time table B2 has only one type of fixed display time of 15 sec for the game number of the second special figure in which the value of the specific game number counter area OC is "9", that is, the final game number in the high frequency support mode. Is set. Then, as described in the sixth embodiment, when the fixed display time length in the final game time of the high frequency support mode is 15 sec, after the mode ends and after the start of the first game time. It is not possible to add the game times of the second special map. That is, if the jackpot design is one of the stop results SD7 to SD11, it is not possible to add the game times of the second special figure.

The variable display time and the fixed display time when the values of the specific game number counter area OC are "1" to "8" and "10" to "15" are the variable display time table shown in FIG. It is similar to the case of B1.

After the execution of step S4702 or step S4704, in step S707, the variable display time selected in each step is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114.

<Special figure fluctuation display control processing>
Next, the special figure variation display control processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93. This process is executed as part of the regular process started by the MPU 242 every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec).

First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the special figure game time is being executed. When it is determined that the special figure game times are not being executed, the process proceeds to step S4802, and it is determined whether the special figure variation command (step S620 of FIG. 24) is received from the main control device 81.

When it is determined that the special figure variation command has not been received, the special figure variation display control processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure variation command is received, in order to start the special figure game times effect (variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, etc.) on the symbol display device 41, step S4803 is performed. The special figure fluctuation start process is executed, and then the special figure fluctuation display control process is ended. Here, the special figure variation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the special figure variation start processing, first, in step S4901, the special figure variation command received this time is read out, and the variation display time information is specified from the command. Moreover, in step S4901, the information of the jackpot symbol confirmed and displayed on the special figure display unit 43 is specified based on the stop result command transmitted from the main control device 81. Further, in step S4901, from the above-identified information, information on whether or not a reach occurs, information on whether or not a jackpot is won, information on a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, information on whether or not a jackpot is won, and a jackpot win. In some cases, the small hit type information is grasped and stored in the holding storage area provided in the RAM 244.

In a succeeding step S4902, based on the information grasped in the step S4901, it is determined whether or not this special figure game time is a winning result (a big hit result or a small hit result). When it is determined that the result is a hit, the process proceeds to step S4903, and a big hit stop result setting process is executed. In this step, the stop result of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 that are variably displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is set based on the information of the winning symbol grasped in step S4901. In this step, when it is determined that the big hit is generated in the win/no win lottery of the first special figure, the big hit pattern (stop result) displayed in the first special figure display portion AS is shown in FIG. 95. The stop results of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are set so as to have a correspondence relationship. For example, when the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol are the stop results SD0 and SD1, the stop result that the combination of the main symbols of "7" is lined up on one effective line L1 to L5 is established as the stop result of this time. decide.

In a succeeding step S4904, a winning effect setting process is executed. In the winning effect setting process, a process of setting an effect pattern for winning such as normal reach or super reach is executed by referring to the variable display time of the game time to be executed this time.

When a negative determination is made in step S4902, the process proceeds to step S4905, and it is grasped whether or not reach is generated in the current game. If a reach occurs, the process advances to step S4906 to execute a stop result setting process for reach. In the stop result setting process for reach, the stop result that the combination of the reach symbols is established on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 is set as the stop result of this time. In this case, the types of combinations of out-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In a succeeding step S4907, production setting processing for reach generation is executed. In the process, the process of setting the effect pattern for the out-reach such as the normal reach or the super reach is executed by referring to the variable display time of the game time to be executed this time.

If a negative determination is made in step S4905, the flow advances to step S4908 to execute a stop result setting process for normal disconnection. In the normal disengagement stop result setting process, the stop result of this time is set so that the symbol combination corresponding to the result is not stopped on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the disengagement reach symbol combination is not stopped. To do. In a succeeding step S4909, an effect setting process for normal disconnection for setting an effect pattern for normal disconnection in which reach is not generated is executed.

After executing the processing of step S4904, step S4907 or step S4909, the process proceeds to step S4910, and the commands including the information of the determined stop result and effect pattern are output to the display control device 212 as a stop symbol command and a pattern command, respectively. To execute the process. In the MPU 272 of the display control device 212, based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the symbol display device 41 is subjected to display control for executing the effect in this special figure game time.

In a succeeding step S4911, after executing a process for starting the effect for special figure game reproduction, this special figure variation start process is ended. Specifically, the speaker unit 64 and the display light emitting unit 63 are drive-controlled based on the determined effect pattern, and the effect for special figure game use is started.

Returning to the description of the special figure variation display control process in FIG. 93, if an affirmative decision is made in the step S4801 (determination that the special figure game times are being executed), the flow proceeds to step S4804 and the special figure variation display time has elapsed. It is determined whether or not. In this determination, the MPU 242 measures (understands) the elapsed time from the start of the special figure game time effect (or the special figure variation command is received), and the elapsed time is the variation display time specified in step S4901. This is done by determining whether or not it has reached. If it is determined that the special figure variation display time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S4805, the special figure variation in-progress processing is executed, and then the special figure variation display control processing ends. In the special figure changing process, the display control device 212 is controlled so as to execute the special figure game time effect with the effect contents determined in the special figure changing start process. At this time, before the predetermined time when the special figure variation display time elapses, each of the symbol rows is arranged such that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with the stop result set in step S4903, step S4906 and step S4908 of FIG. The variable display of Z1 to Z3 is sequentially ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S4804, the flow advances to step S4806 to execute the special figure confirmation display processing. In the special figure confirmation display processing, each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed is confirmed and displayed, and the state is continued until the confirmation display time elapses. After the execution of step S4806, the special figure variation display control process is ended.

<About the flow of games>
Next, the flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop result stopped and displayed on the first special figure display portion AS and the variable display time table of the second special figure selected in the specific state, (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop result of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the variable display time table of the second special figure selected in the specific state. is there.

In the game of the first special diagram before the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs, a jackpot result is obtained, and when the stop result displayed at that time is the stop result SD0 or SD1, FIG. 96(a) ), the variable display time table of the second special figure selected in the specific state becomes the variable display time table B1. This variable display time table B1 is, as shown in FIG. 92(a), the final display times of the final game times (the game times when the value of the specific game number counter area OC is "9") are 15 sec, 9 sec, It is selected from three types of length of 4.5 sec. Of these, the confirmed display times of 9 seconds and 4.5 seconds allow the addition of the hold information of the second special figure after the high-frequency support mode ends. On the other hand, in the variable display time table B2, as shown in FIG. 92(b), the fixed display time is only 15 sec, and the fixed display time of 15 sec is the second after the high-frequency support mode ends. The special reservation information cannot be added.

Therefore, when the stop result of the first special figure is the stop result SD0 or SD1 and the confirmed display time of the second special figure is determined by referring to the variable display time table B1, the pending information can be added. It becomes a special state where the gracefulness is favored, and it becomes easy to add hold information in the game after the mode ends. When the stop result SD0 or SD1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display area AS, the main symbol "7" is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 96(b). The stop result lined up in any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is displayed. In this case, the player shifts from the stop result of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G to the high-frequency support mode in the special state after the jackpot gaming state ends, that is, after the mode ends. It is possible to recognize that there is a high expectation that it will be possible to add hold information in a game.

Even when the stop result SD2 is stopped and displayed in the jackpot of the first special figure before the shift to the high frequency support mode, the fixed display time of the second special figure is determined by referring to the variable display time table B1 as in the above. Thus, the degree of expectation that the hold information can be added in the game after the mode ends becomes high. Further, when the stop result SD6 is stopped and displayed in the jackpot of the first special figure, the fixed display time of the second special figure is determined by referring to the variable display time table B2, and the hold information is given in the game after the mode ends. Cannot be added. Then, in both cases where the stop results SD2 and SD6 are stopped and displayed, the stop result in which the main symbol "3" is arranged in any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. It In this case, the player cannot uniquely determine whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode which is the special state, from the stop result of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. Therefore, it is possible to add fun to play by guessing whether to shift to such a high frequency support mode.

In addition, when the stop results SD3 and SD7 are stop-displayed on the first special figure display portion AS (the stop result is the stop result where the main symbols of "5" are lined up on the display screen G), the stop results SD4, SD8 and SD9 are When the stop display is displayed (the stop result is the stop result in which the main symbols of "1" are lined up on the display screen G), when the stop results SD5, SD10, SD11 are stop displayed (the main display of "9" is displayed on the display screen G) Even if the symbols are stopped), it is not possible to unambiguously determine whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode that is the special state based on the stop result of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. It is possible to play by guessing whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode.

However, when the stop results SD4, SD8, and SD9 are stopped and displayed, it is one of the stop results SD4 that the fixed display time of the second special figure is determined by referring to the variable display time table B1. On the other hand, the final display time of the second special figure is determined by referring to the variable display time table B2 for the two stop results SD8 and SD9. That is, compared to the case where the stop results SD3 and SD7 are stopped and displayed, the ratio of the special state is low, and the expectation that the hold information can be added in the game after the mode ends is low. .. This also applies to the case where the stop results SD5, SD10, and SD11 are stopped and displayed.

Therefore, from the player's point of view, when the stop result in which the main symbols of "7" are lined up is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, the expectation that the hold information can be added in the game after the end of the high frequency support mode is the highest. , When the stop result in which the main symbols of “3” or “5” are lined up is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned degree of expectation is low in the order of the stop result in which the main symbols of “1” or “9” are lined up Become. Therefore, the player can play in the game of the first special diagram before the transition to the high frequency support mode, expecting that the stop result advantageous for himself is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to clarify the difference between the variable display time table B1 and the variable display time table B2, the variable display time table B2 does not have a fixed display time that allows addition of pending information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration is provided in which both the variable display time tables B1 and B2 are provided with fixed display times that allow addition of pending information, and the variable display time table B1 is more likely to be selected than the variable display time table B2. May be In addition, the fixed display time of 4.5 sec, which increases the number of addable items, is provided only in the variable display time table B1, or the fixed display time is provided in both the variable display time tables B1 and B2, and then the variable display time table is added. B1 may be more easily selected.

Further, in the present embodiment as well, any one of the above second to fourth embodiments is applied, and after the mode ends, the game time of the second special figure that can be added after the start of the game time of the second special figure is added. The number may be notified, or a notification corresponding to the duration of the accessory opening/closing game after the mode is finished may be performed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

As the variable display time table of the second special diagram, the variable display time table B1 and the variable display time table B2 having different expectations that allow the addition of the hold information after the end of the high frequency support mode are provided, and the final game of the above mode is provided. When selecting the fixed display time of the number of times, which of the variable display time tables B1 and B2 is to be referred to is switched depending on the type of the stop result at the time of the big hit of the first special figure that triggered the transition to the above mode. And

According to this configuration, it is possible to create a special state in which the above-mentioned degree of expectation is favored, so that the player shifts to the high-frequency support mode with a strong sense of expectation for such a special state. You can play the game times before playing. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game before shifting to the high frequency support mode as well as the game at the end or after the end of the high frequency support mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of the stop result (big hit pattern) that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 43 at the time of a big hit, which is a trigger to shift to the high frequency support mode, after the end of the high frequency support mode. It can also be said that the degree of advantage of the game changes. In conventional pachinko machines, the type of jackpot design is only related to the degree of advantage of the jackpot gaming state and the advantage of the high frequency support mode, but with this configuration, it affects the degree of advantage of the game after the high frequency support mode is finished. It is possible to provide an unprecedented novel gameplay. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to favorably increase the game motivation and the degree of attention to the game.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or a part or all of the configurations may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Further, it is possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments and modified examples. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is secured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration including a combination of the embodiment and the modified examples, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, a so-called 1-kind 2-kind mixing machine is illustrated as a pachinko machine, but a 1-kind type pachinko machine without a V jackpot may be used. In this case, in addition to the high-frequency support mode, the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is applied to a high-probability mode (so-called probability change state or high-probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal gaming state. Good. The high-probability mode can be applied to a so-called ST in which the mode ends when the number of game times executed after the mode is switched reaches a predetermined number.

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration may be used in which the universal utility product 700 having the following configuration is provided in place of the universal service product 34a.

As shown in FIG. 97, the universal electric accessory 700 includes a bulging portion 701 that bulges forward from the front portion of the game board 24. The front surface portion 701a of the bulging portion 701 faces the window panel 62 in the game machine front-rear direction, and the distance between the front surface portion 701a and the window panel 62 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents the game ball from passing in front of the bulging portion 701.

The bulging portion 701 is formed with a second operating port 34 into which a game ball can enter so as to open upward, and a shutter as a movable body that covers the second operating port 34 from above. 702 is arranged. The shutter 702 has a flat plate shape, and is held in a state of being slidable in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 24. That is, the shutter 702 has a projecting position (forward position) that projects forward from the front surface of the game board 24, and a retracted position (retracted position) that retracts rearward from the projecting position and that suppresses the amount of projection to the front of the game machine. It can be displaced to and. The shutter 702 is driven by the electric accessory driving unit 34b described above.

As shown in FIG. 97A, when the shutter 702 is located at the projecting position, the shutter 702 covers the second operation port 34 from above. As a result, the second operating port 34 (universal electric component 700) is closed, and even if the game ball flowing down the right side region PE3 reaches the upper region of the second operating port 34, the operating port 34 cannot be won. Becomes The height position of the shutter 702 is set so that the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702 is substantially flush with the upper surface portion 701b of the bulging portion 701 when the shutter 702 is located at the protruding position.

Although illustration is omitted, on the right side of the bulging portion 701, a guide portion such as a nail for guiding the game ball flowing down the right side region PE3 onto the upper surface portion 701b of the bulging portion 701 is provided. For this reason, the game ball that has reached the universal utility product 700 in the state where the second operating port 34 is in the closed state is placed on the upper surface portion 701b of the bulging portion 701 and then the upper surface portion of the shutter 702 as a ball receiving means. 702a. There is also a game ball that flows down from above the upper surface 702 of the shutter 702 and can be directly received by the upper surface 702 of the shutter 702 without passing through the upper surface 701b of the bulging portion 701. Then, the game ball received by the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702 rolls on the upper surface portion 702a so as to move from the right side to the left side as shown in FIG. 97(b).

It should be noted that in the configuration shown in the figure, the game ball is not allowed to win the second operating port 34 when it is in the closed state, but it is possible to win in a range where it is difficult to win compared to the open state described later. May be

As shown in FIG. 97C, when the shutter 702 is located at the retracted position, the shutter 702 retracts from above the second operating port 34, and the second operating port 34 is opened upward. As a result, the second operating port 34 is opened, and the game balls in the upper region of the second operating port 34 can win the operating port 34. If the game balls are placed on the upper surface 702a of the shutter 702 when the position of the shutter 702 is switched from the projected position to the retracted position, those game balls fall downward as the shutter 702 retreats. , Win the second working port 34.

As shown in FIG. 97A, a plurality of projecting portions 703 projecting upward are provided on the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702. These projecting portions 703 are arranged at the front end portion of the upper surface portion 702a and are arranged at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction of the gaming machine. Further, on the front surface of the game board 24, a plurality of protruding portions 704 protruding forward corresponding to the protruding portions 703 are provided. The projecting portion 704 is arranged so as to alternate with the projecting portion 703 in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and the projecting portions 703 and 704 form a meandering route on the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702. Therefore, the game ball received by the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702 moves in a meandering manner while moving at a reduced speed due to collision with the projecting portions 703 and 704, so that the stay period on the upper surface portion 702a is reduced. It will be prolonged. That is, the projecting portions 703 and 704 constitute a staying means capable of staying the game ball on the upper surface portion 702a or a speed reducing means for reducing the moving speed of the game ball. The staying means or the decelerating means is not limited to meandering the game ball as described above. For example, a plurality of protrusions extending in the front-rear direction and projecting upward are provided on the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702. Other configurations may be used.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the game ball that has been launched in the state where the second working port 34 (universal electric component 700) is in the closed state (specifically, the game ball that has reached the upper region of the second working port 34). It is possible to win at least a part of the above) into the second operating port 34. Therefore, particularly in the second opening/closing pattern according to the first embodiment described above, even if the player continues to shoot the game balls continuously, there is a dead ball (the game ball does not win the second operating port 34 and is out. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the phenomenon (guided to the mouth 37). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort for the player to adjust the firing timing of the game ball by observing the timing of the open state and the period of the open state, and it is possible to make the game easy to play.

In the above configuration, since the disadvantages of the second opening/closing pattern (the reduction of the number of reserves RbN and the number of balls held is easily promoted) are alleviated, the first opening/closing pattern is not provided in the first embodiment. Good. Further, with respect to the first opening/closing pattern, the winning up to the upper limit number is not guaranteed, but the second opening/closing pattern may be changed to a mode in which winning is more likely to occur than in the second opening/closing pattern.

Further, in the above configuration, the residence time on the upper surface portion 702a is not particularly limited, but the waiting time in the second opening/closing pattern (if there are a plurality of waiting periods in the second opening/closing pattern, at least one of them) One waiting time or each waiting time), in other words, in the period from the end of one opening in the second opening/closing pattern to the start of the next opening, the upper surface portion of the shutter 702. It is advisable to set the time length such that all the game balls that have reached 702a can be won in the second operating port 34 by the next opening. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the fifth to seventh embodiments, the waiting time in the accessory opening/closing game for the high frequency support mode (at least one of them when there are a plurality of waiting periods) One waiting time or each waiting time). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the generation of dead balls.

In addition, the plurality of protruding portions 703 may be formed on the front cover portion (or the front decorative body) provided on the front surface portion 701a of the bulging portion 701 instead of the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702. Specifically, a plate-shaped front cover portion whose lateral dimension is at least longer than the lateral dimension of the shutter 702 is provided integrally or separately on the front surface portion 701a of the bulging portion 701, and the upper end portion of the front cover portion is provided. Is positioned above the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702. At this time, the front cover portion is such that at least a part of the shutter 702 can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and more specifically, the front cover can be visually recognized so that the player can recognize the opening and closing of the shutter 702. At least a part of the portion is a colored or colorless transparent transparent portion. Then, above the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702, the above-mentioned protruding portion 703 is formed on the inner side surface (the surface facing the protruding portion 704) of the front cover portion so as to protrude toward the game board 24 side. In this case, each projecting portion 703 may be extended in the vertical direction similarly to the projecting portion 704 on the game board 24 side. Even with such a configuration, the game ball rolling on the shutter 702 can be meandered (decelerated), and the same operational effect as that of the general electric accessory 700 shown in FIG. 97 can be achieved. The protruding portion 703 may be provided on both the inner surface of the front cover portion and the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, only the high-prize winning combination opening/closing game is performed in the high-frequency support mode. However, in addition to the high-winning winning combination opening/closing game, a low winning combination opening/closing game (for example, , The accessory opening/closing game shown in FIG. 18(a) may be performed. However, in order to secure the superiority of the high-frequency support mode, the high winning prize opening and closing game is configured to be more easily executed. In addition, in the low frequency support mode, a high winning a prize opening and closing game as well as a low winning auction opening and closing game may be performed. Also in this case, in order to secure the superiority of the high frequency support mode, the low winning a prize combination opening/closing game is configured to be more easily executed.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, there are cases where the high-frequency support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode is not switched, but after the high-hit game is terminated, the high-frequency support mode is always transferred. It may be configured. In other words, it may be configured to shift to the high-frequency support mode without using the jackpot type at the time of jackpot winning as a condition.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, when the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, the high frequency support mode is entered, and the high frequency support flag is erased from the various flag storage area 114e. In this case, the high-frequency support mode is terminated, but when the information corresponding to the first value is stored in the specific storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 114e, the high-frequency support mode is entered, The high frequency support mode may be terminated when information corresponding to a second value different from the first value is stored in the specific storage area. Further, the high frequency support mode may be terminated when information corresponding to a second value that is the same as or different from the first value is stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area.

(6) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when a V jackpot occurs, it is configured to always shift to the high-frequency support mode after the V jackpot game ends, but when the V jackpot game does not shift to the high-frequency support mode There may be a configuration. At this time, the probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode may be higher than the probability of shifting to the mode at the time of first hit.

(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the V jackpot is almost certainly generated in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit of the second special figure, but it may be generated with a predetermined probability when it does not occur. Good. In this case, the probability of occurrence may be higher than the probability of not occurring, or vice versa.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the number of executions of the game times in the high frequency support mode is counted only for the game times of the second special figure, but both the first special figure and the second special figure are played. The number of times may be counted as the target. That is, the high frequency support mode may be terminated when the total number of the game times becomes 9. By the way, 9 times is just an example, and the reference number of times of ending the game times in the high-frequency support mode (so-called shortened number of times) is not particularly limited.

(9) The configuration of each of the above embodiments (feature opening and closing game) is applied to the opening and closing game of the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B (big hit game, small hit game, round game during big hit game) You may.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the high frequency support mode is ended during execution of the variable display of the universal game time, the result of winning or failing the game time is forcibly changed to the disengagement result. The configuration may not be changed.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, only the game ball flowing down the right route can pass or win the through gate 35, the second operating port 34, and the universal electric vehicle 34a, but the left route flows down. The game balls may be passed or won, or the game balls may be passed or won from either the right route or the left route. However, in adding a distinctiveness to the game, only the game ball flowing down one of the right route and the left route can enter the first operating port 33, and only the game ball flowing down one of the right route and the left route is the through gate. 35, the second operating port 34, and the universal electric accessory 34a may be allowed to pass through or win a prize.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the winning number is generated in the second operating port 34 in the state where the number RbN of holdings of the second special map is the upper limit number, the holding information is not acquired. The information may be acquired and not stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b. This also applies to the first special figure.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit number of the reserved number RbN in the second special figure is set to four, but may be three or less, or may be five or more. The same applies to the number of reservations RaN of the first special figure and the number of reservations of the general figure.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the second working port 34 is more advantageous to the player than the first working port 33 in winning/winning lottery, jackpot type sorting, and small jackpot type sorting. The first operating port 33 may be configured to be more advantageous than the second operating port 34, or the operating ports 33 and 34 may not be provided with a difference in degree of advantage.

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game times of the second special figure based on the winning of the second operating port 34 are prioritized over the game times of the first special figure based on the winning of the first operating port 33. Although it is configured to be executed, the game times of the first special figure may be executed with priority over the game times of the second special figure. Further, the game times may be executed in the order in which a prize is generated in the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, without prioritizing one of the game times over the other.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the specific state is reached, the number of reserves RbN of the second special figure becomes 0 and the game state of the second special figure ends However, the holding number RbN of the second special figure becomes 0 and the specific state may be judged to have ended when the accessory opening/closing game has ended. Further, the reserved number RbN of the second special figure becomes 0 and the accessory opening/closing game ends, and the game state of the second special figure ends and the specific state may be determined to end.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, whether or not the accessory opening/closing game started during the high-frequency support mode crosses the end timing of the high-frequency support mode is grasped before the end timing, and based on the result. The predetermined notification may be performed before the end timing. For example, when it is understood that the accessory opening/closing game started during the high-frequency support mode straddles the end timing of the high-frequency support mode, a predetermined notification is always made, or when it is understood that the end timing is straddled. In the production lottery, the predetermined notification may be given when the lottery is won, and the predetermined notification may be given both when it is known that the end timing is crossed and when it is not crossed. However, the predetermined notification may be performed more easily when it is determined that the vehicle will straddle than when it is determined that the vehicle does not straddle.

In the above configuration, the predetermined notification may be, for example, a notification such as "Chance!" Note that the predetermined notification does not necessarily have to be performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and may be configured to be performed on the display unit provided in the general electric utility article 34a or its peripheral portion. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the general electric accessory 34a and the predetermined notification at the same time. In addition, the notification in this case does not necessarily have to be an image display, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the light emitting unit as the display unit is provided and the notification is performed based on the emission color or emission intensity, the number of light emitting elements to be turned on, and the like. .. Further, the display section may be provided at the second operating port 34 or its peripheral portion.

In addition, if it is determined that the accessory opening/closing game started during the high frequency support mode does not cross the end timing of the high frequency support mode, a predetermined notification that is not executed if the crossing is detected is performed. The predetermined notification may be performed more easily than when the vehicle is broken or when it is known that the vehicle is straddling.

In the above configuration, as in the fifth to seventh embodiments, there is a time difference between the end timing of the high frequency support mode and the start timing of the first special figure game time after the end of the high frequency support mode. In the configuration, grasp whether or not the accessory opening/closing game started during the high-frequency support mode crosses the start timing of the first special figure game time before the start timing or the end timing, and The configuration may be such that predetermined notification is performed based on the result. The predetermined notification in this case may be performed before the start timing or may be performed before the end timing. In the first to fourth embodiments, as in the fifth to seventh embodiments, the high frequency support mode ends at the start timing of the final game finalization display in the high frequency support mode. It may be configured to do, and in this case as well, it is grasped before the start timing or the end timing whether or not the accessory opening/closing game started during the high frequency support mode crosses the start timing of the first special figure game time. It may be configured to.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the second high winning prize opening/closing game and the third high winning prize opening/closing game whose feasible period is longer than the fixed display time are executed, the winning combination is executed. Grasping whether the opening/closing game crosses the end timing or the starting timing (if the first high winning a prize opening/closing game whose executable period is shorter than the fixed display time is executed, execute the grasping process) No) may be used. In this case, not only the grasping process is executed in both the second high-prize winning combination opening/closing game and the third high-winning winning combination opening/closing game, but the third side high-winning combination opening/closing game on the longer side is executed. In this case, the grasping process may be executed.

Further, when applied to the first to fourth embodiments, it is better not to shoot the game ball as the predetermined notification, which is a shooting operation aiming at the universal utility object 34a (second working port 34). It is better not to do it, or to promote a launching operation aiming at another area where the game ball does not reach the general electric accessory 34a (an area different from the area where the general electric object 34a is arranged), or they are more advantageous. The player may be informed that there is such a notification. The notification in this case is the execution period of the first opening/closing pattern of the accessory opening/closing game that crosses the end timing (when the end timing arrives in the middle of the first opening/closing pattern, the execution period of the first opening/closing pattern before the end timing) It is good to do according to. As a specific mode of the predetermined notification, for example, a display or a voice notification such as "It is better not to launch now" or the like is performed during the execution period of the first opening/closing pattern, or provided on the general electric utility article 34a or its peripheral portion. A configuration may be considered in which the light emitting unit is switched from the lighting state to the extinguished state, the extinguished state is maintained in the execution period of the first opening/closing pattern, and the lighting state is switched again in accordance with the end of the pattern.

Further, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, the execution period of the second opening/closing pattern of the accessory opening/closing game straddling the ending timing (when the ending timing comes in the middle of the second opening/closing pattern, the second opening/closing after the ending timing) In accordance with the execution period of the pattern), it is better to shoot a game ball as the predetermined notification, it is better to perform a shooting operation aiming at the general electric utility object 34a (second operating port 34), the general electric object object 34a It may be configured to prompt a firing operation aiming at an area where the game ball can reach, or to notify the player that they are more advantageous. As such a notification, for example, a notification such as "aiming at a power chu" can be considered. Also in this case, the form of the predetermined notification is not limited to the display or the sound notification, and the light emitting unit provided in the general electric utility product 34a or its peripheral portion is provided before the end timing or before the first opening/closing in the execution period of the second opening/closing pattern. The light may be emitted in a light emission mode different from that during execution of the pattern (e.g., emission of a specific color, increase of emission intensity, or different emission pattern).

Further, the grasping process as to whether or not the accessory opening/closing game started during the high frequency support mode crosses the end timing of the high frequency support mode is performed as in the second to fourth embodiments. It may be performed at a timing in the middle of, or before starting the accessory opening/closing game. In the latter configuration, after grasping the start timing of the character opening/closing game, the feasible period of the character opening/closing game, and the ending timing of the high frequency support mode, the character opening/closing game ends timing. It is good to know whether to cross over. In this case, the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game and the feasible period of the accessory opening/closing game may be grasped by using the read-ahead result of the universal figure reservation. Specifically, the lottery result of the universal figure win/loss lot and the execution period of the universal game time (variable display time and fixed display time (only the variable display time may be fixed if the fixed display time is fixed)) and If there are a plurality of types of accessory opening/closing games, the types thereof are specified by prefetch processing, and the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game and the feasible period of the accessory opening/closing game are grasped based on the result. The general-reading reservation pre-reading can be performed by executing the same processing as the reservation confirmation processing (special figure holding pre-reading processing) in FIG.

In addition, when performing the above grasping process before the start of the final special map game time in the high frequency support mode, the execution period of the special map game time (variation display time and fixed display time (fixed display If the time is fixed, only the variable display time may be used)), and the end timing (remaining period until the end timing) of the high-frequency support mode may be grasped based on the result.

(18) In the above-described first embodiment, the number of times of opening/closing control in the first opening/closing pattern is set to 1. However, the winning frequency to the second operating port 34 becomes higher than that of the second opening/closing pattern (the occurrence of winning). The interval may be shortened) and may be set a plurality of times. In this case, by setting the total opening time of each opening in the first opening/closing pattern to be equal to or more than the product of the game cycle of the game ball and the upper limit winning number, the upper limit winning number is won from the start to the end of the opening/closing pattern. It is possible to

Further, when the number of times of opening/closing control in the first opening/closing pattern is plural, the opening time of each opening/closing control may be the same length or different lengths. When the first opening/closing pattern has three or more opening/closing controls when making the opening times different, the opening times may be different for all the opening/closing controls, or one opening/closing control may be performed. The length of the opening time in may be different from that of the other open/close control.

Further, regarding the second opening/closing pattern, the opening time of each opening/closing control may be the same length, or the opening time length of one opening/closing control is different from that of another opening/closing control or another opening/closing control. May be

(19) In the above-described first embodiment, the first opening/closing pattern is not provided, and winning of the first opening/closing pattern up to the upper limit number is not guaranteed, but the second operating port 34 is larger than the second opening/closing pattern. You may change to something that is more likely to win a prize.

(20) In the above-described first embodiment, the opening time of the universal electrician 34a is set to be equal to or longer than the game cycle of the game ball and equal to or shorter than twice the cycle of the game ball for all the openings in the second opening/closing pattern. The second opening/closing pattern does not have to be, and may be configured to include an opening time that is equal to or longer than the game cycle of the game ball and does not satisfy twice or less of the game cycle.

(21) The configuration of the first embodiment may be applied to the accessory opening/closing game in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, as a mode of the character opening/closing game in the low frequency support mode, a low prize winning object opening/closing game in which the winning of the second operating port 34 is unlikely to occur and a high winning prize opening/closing in which the winning is likely to occur A configuration may be considered in which the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is applied to a pachinko machine provided with a game (a high winning prize opening/closing game for a low frequency support mode).

In such a pachinko machine, the high winning prize opening and closing game does not occur frequently as in the high frequency support mode, but the high winning prize opening and closing game does not occur often in the low frequency support mode, and even if it occurs Many of them are finished only once. Therefore, it is effective to set the upper limit winning number to be larger than the upper limit number of the reserved memories. For example, if the maximum number of winning prizes is 10 and the maximum number of reserved memories is 4, if a winning for the second working port 34 is generated under the first opening/closing pattern, up to the fifth time. Although the winning of is connected to the storage of the hold information, the winning and opening games are ended before the second opening/closing pattern is started, while the winnings after that become invalid winnings. Therefore, after all, only five pieces of reservation information can be acquired. On the other hand, when a prize is generated under the second opening/closing pattern, the number of pieces of reservation information of 10 pieces can be obtained. In this way, depending on which opening/closing pattern the player selects to win the prize, it is possible to cause a difference in the number of pending information that can be acquired, so that there is more room for technical intervention and interest is increased. It will be possible to improve.

(22) In the above-described first embodiment, only one type of accessory opening/closing game in the high-frequency support mode is used, but there are a plurality of types including the high-prize-winning auditors object opening/closing game according to the first embodiment. It may be configured to have. In this case, as another mode of the accessory opening/closing game in the high frequency support mode, it is preferable to use the first high winning prize opening/closing game of the fifth embodiment or the like. In this case, in all types of accessory opening and closing games that can be performed in the high frequency support mode, if the high frequency support mode ends during the execution, the rest may be continuously executed after the end of the mode. The high winning prize opening/closing game according to the first embodiment may be configured such that the rest is continuously executed after the end of the high frequency support mode.

(23) In the second and third embodiments, whether or not the accessory opening/closing game started during the high-frequency support mode crosses the end timing of the high-frequency support mode, and grasps the number of reserves that can be added Although the processing is configured to be performed at a timing in the middle of the accessory opening/closing game, the processing may be performed before starting the accessory opening/closing game. In this case, each grasping process may be performed after grasping the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game, the feasible period of the accessory opening/closing game, and the ending timing of the high frequency support mode. In this case, the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game and the feasible period of the accessory opening/closing game may be grasped by using the read-ahead result of the universal figure reservation. Specifically, the lottery result of the universal figure win/loss lot and the execution period of the universal game time (variable display time and fixed display time (only the variable display time may be fixed if the fixed display time is fixed)) and If there are a plurality of types of accessory opening/closing games, the types thereof are specified by prefetch processing, and the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game and the feasible period of the accessory opening/closing game are grasped based on the result.

In addition, when performing the process of grasping whether to cross the end timing and the number of holdables that can be added before the start of the final special map game time in the high frequency support mode, the special map game time is read by the special map reservation prefetch process. Pre-read the execution period (variable display time and fixed display time (only fixed display time when fixed display time is fixed)), and based on the result, end timing of high-frequency support mode (until end timing) It is good to know the remaining period).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, whether or not the character opening/closing game started during the high frequency support mode crosses the end timing of the high frequency supporting mode, and the duration of the character opening/closing game in the case of crossing The grasping process may be performed before starting the accessory opening/closing game.

(24) In the above-described second embodiment, the player is configured to give notice that the number of addable holdings can be recognized, but whether or not the accessory opening/closing game continues even after the high-frequency support mode ends. Alternatively, the player may be informed of whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state after the mode ends. In addition, it may be configured such that the player is informed of how many times the general electric accessory 34a is opened after the mode ends. In these cases, whether or not the accessory opening/closing game continues even after the end of the high-frequency support mode without grasping the number of reserves that can be added, and whether or not the general electric accessory 34a becomes open information after the mode ends It may be configured such that the above notification is given only by grasping.

Further, the player may be informed of whether or not a prize can be generated in the second operation port 34 after the end of the high frequency support mode, or how many times a prize may be generated in the game. It may be configured such that the notification is made recognizable by the person. Regarding the latter, it is advisable to grasp the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 34a after the mode is finished and inform the number as the number of times that a prize can be generated.

(25) In the second embodiment, when the grasped addable hold number SA is 1 or more, the special effect is always executed, but it is determined that the addable hold number SA is 1 or more. After that, the lottery process of whether to execute the special effect may be performed, and the special effect may be executed when the lottery is won. That is, the special effect may be more easily executed when the number SA of reserves that can be added is 1 or more than when the number SA is not equal.

In addition, when the number SA of reserves that can be added is not 1 or more (when it is 0), a special effect may be executed. In this case, it may be configured to be always executed, or may be configured to be executed when a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to perform the special effect. In this case, the notification of the number of holds that can be added is 0.

(26) In the second embodiment, the player may be notified of the remaining number of balls up to the maximum winning number and the remaining period of the accessory opening/closing game. With such a configuration, the player can recognize the end (deadline) when the hold information can be added, which is convenient in playing the game with the notified number of additions as a target.

(27) In the second embodiment described above, a configuration may be used in which a number smaller than the actual number of retained SAs that can be added is known. In this case, after execution of the special effect, more additions than the number of additions indicated by the effect can occur. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of accomplishment and joy, and it is possible to suitably enhance the fun. In such a configuration, the above notification may be always performed, or a notification of the actual addable hold number SA and a notification of a small number may occur at random. However, in the case of the former, the player may eventually notice that the reliability of the notification may be reduced and the effect of production may be gradually diminished. Therefore, the latter configuration is preferable.

(28) In the second embodiment, the special effect may be executed when the grasped addable hold number SA is equal to or larger than the predetermined number. This is because if a small number is notified, the player may be discouraged or the player's willingness to play may be lowered. For example, the special effect may be executed if the number SA of addable reservations is 2 or more, and not executed if the number SA is less than that. In this case, a specific effect may be performed without notifying the number of reserves that can be added. This is because it is possible for the player to recognize or infer that it is possible to add a predetermined number (for example, two) or more of the holding information by the occurrence of the effect.

(29) In the second embodiment, the special effect is started at the start of the final game time confirmation display, but the special effect is started at the start of the accessory opening/closing game across the end of the high frequency support mode. It may be configured to. Specifically, at the start timing of the character opening and closing game, grasp the remaining period of the final game time or the remaining period until the end of the high frequency support mode, and whether the grasping period is less than or equal to the executable period of the character opening and closing game. Determine whether or not. Then, if it is determined that it is less than or equal to the executable period, the special effect is started, and if not, the special effect is not started. In this case, the player can switch the firing mode of the game ball with the start of the special effect as a guide, which is convenient.

In such a configuration, as a special effect, an operation effect that prompts the player to operate an effect button (an operation means that can be operated by the player) may be executed. In this case, due to the effect, the player releases the firing handle 60 and the player's firing is stopped, and it is expected that the second opening/closing pattern can be performed without the player's awareness. At this time, the effect button may be arranged on the side closer to the firing handle 60 (on the right side of the pachinko machine 10).

Further, in the above configuration (29), the special effect may be started in consideration of the required period from the timing of launching the game ball until the game ball reaches the second operating port 34 or the universal electric vehicle 34a. Good. Specifically, the timing that goes back by a period equal to or longer than the required period from the start timing of the special effect of (29) is set as the start timing of the special effect.

(30) In the second embodiment described above, the special effect is configured to be performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, but may be configured to be performed by the display unit provided in the general electric accessory 34a or its peripheral portion. Good. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the ordinary electric accessory 34a and the special effect at the same time. Note that the notification in this case does not necessarily have to be an image display, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the light emitting unit as the display unit is provided and the notification is performed by the emission color or emission intensity, the number of light emitting elements to be turned on, or the like. .. Further, the display section may be provided at the second operating port 34 or its peripheral portion.

Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, the display section may be provided at a position other than the general electrical utility product 34a or a peripheral part thereof (the second operating port 34 or a peripheral part thereof). The display unit in this case is arranged closer to the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 or the central portion of the game board 24 than the general-purpose display unit 44, and is more visible than the general-purpose display unit 44 from the player's perspective. It should be easy to stand out.

(31) In the second embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the elapsed period (degree of progress) from the start of the accessory opening/closing game is grasped, but the remaining period (remaining degree) until the accessory opening/closing game is finished. ) May be grasped. It should be noted that the “progress degree” of the present invention can be understood to include not only the progress degree but also the remaining degree.

(32) In the fourth embodiment, the predetermined notification 521 may be configured not to execute the second notification (character display of “chance!”).

(33) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the first notification (character display of “great chance!!”) is always performed when the remaining period Tm2 is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, but the configuration is facilitated. May be Specifically, when the remaining period Tm2 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, a lottery process of whether or not to make the first notification may be performed, and the first notification may be made when the lottery is won. In this case, if the lottery is not won, the second notification may be given, or the special effect itself may not be performed.

(34) In the fourth embodiment, the special effect may be started at a predetermined timing after the end of the high-frequency support mode and before the end of the accessory opening/closing game over the end of the mode. Good. In the special effect in this case, the notification corresponding to the remaining period of the accessory opening/closing game at the effect start timing is performed. In addition, such a special effect may be configured to be always performed, and the case of starting at the time of starting the final game finalization display (before the end of the high-frequency support mode) and the case of starting at the above-mentioned predetermined timing are random. It may be configured to occur.

(35) In the fourth embodiment, the special effect may further be configured to give a notification corresponding to the remaining period of the accessory opening/closing game. For example, a configuration such as performing countdown display or changing the facial expression of the character (for example, changing to an impatient facial expression) when the remaining period becomes less than or equal to a predetermined period can be considered. This also applies to the second and third embodiments.

(36) In the fifth embodiment, the first high-win prize winning combination opening/closing game (a winning combination opening/closing game having an executable period shorter than the final game time fixed display time) may be omitted. That is, it may be configured to provide only the accessory opening/closing game having a longer executable period than the final display time of the final game time. This is because even in this case, whether or not to add the hold information varies depending on the execution timing of the accessory opening/closing game, and the game after the end of the high frequency support mode can be enjoyed.

(37) In the fifth embodiment, all or one of the first to third high winning prize opening/closing games has the same opening/closing control mode (only the number of opening/closing control is different), The configuration may be such that it is not possible to identify or infer which mode the action object 34a is in even if the user sees the movement of the accessory 34a.

(38) In the fifth embodiment, the selection ratio of the first high-prize winning combination opening/closing game in which the holding information cannot be added is the highest, but the second high-winning winning combination opening/closing game or The configuration may be such that the selection ratio of the 3 high winning prize opening/closing game is the highest. This also applies to the selection ratio of the confirmed display time in the sixth embodiment.

(39) In the fifth embodiment, the general-purpose game time effect is configured to be performed in the display area P of the symbol display device 41. However, the general-purpose game time effect may be performed by a light emitting device such as an LED. Good. In this case, the light emitting device may be provided in the general utility product 34a or its peripheral portion. As a result, the player can visually recognize the general electric accessory 34a and the general-purpose game game effect at the same time. Further, the light emitting device may be provided at the second working port 34 or a peripheral portion thereof.

(40) In the fifth embodiment, regardless of which one of the first to third high-win prize auction opening/closing games is to be opened/closed, the amusement game display time effect in the amusement picture display area P is produced. Although the same stop result is displayed as a stop, a different stop result may be displayed as a stop according to the type of the accessory opening/closing game to be executed.

(41) In the fifth embodiment, the length of the feasible period of the accessory opening/closing game is set in consideration of the fixed display time of the universal figure game times, but the fixed display time is very short, so the consideration is taken into consideration. It may be configured not to.

(42) In the fifth embodiment, the high frequency support mode may be terminated during the final game finalization display or the variable display midway. This also applies to the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment.

(43) In the sixth embodiment, the fixed display time may be selected separately from the variable display time. In this case, the fixed display time selection table may be provided separately from the variable display time table, or the fixed display time may be selected by using a common table, for example, selecting the fixed display time at the start of the fixed display. The processing may be performed separately from the variable display time selection processing. In these cases, the fluctuation type counter CS may be used as the acquired random number for selecting the fixed display time, or a dedicated random number for selecting the fixed display time may be used.

(44) In the sixth embodiment, the fixed display time selected at the start of the variable display may be changed at the start or during the fixed display.

(45) In the sixth embodiment, the fixed display time is selected regardless of the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure, but for example, the number of reservations RbN is a predetermined number (for example, 4 which is the upper limit number). Alternatively, when the number is 3 or more, which is less than the upper limit number, a short fixed display time is selected or is easily selected. For example, the selection mode of the probability variation display time may be switched according to the number RbN of reservations. In this case, the player's motivation to increase the number RbN of holdings can be suitably evoked.

(46) In the sixth embodiment, when the fixed display time on the short side (for example, 9 sec) is selected, the symbol display device 41 is selected more than when the fixed display time on the long side (15 sec) is selected. The start timing of the temporary stop display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of may be configured to be advanced. For example, when the fixed display time on the short side is selected, the total period of the temporary stop display period (the period from the start of the temporary stop display to the start of the fixed display) and the fixed display time is The display time may be the same as, approximately the same as, or longer than that when selected. It is assumed that the player is paying attention to the display screen G that is easy to stand out. With the above configuration, it looks as if the confirmed display time in which the hold information cannot be added is selected, and then the hold is performed. Additional information can be generated. As a result, the player's surprise and delight can be suitably aroused, and the interest can be improved.

(47) In the seventh embodiment, the number of rounds of the big hit game is the same (5R) when the stop results SD0 to SD5 are stopped and displayed and when the stop results SD6 to SD11 are stopped and displayed. , This may be different. For example, the former round number may be set to be larger than that of the latter, and when the stop results SD0 to SD5 are stopped and displayed, the advantage of the player in the jackpot gaming state may be more advantageous. As a result, not only the degree of advantage of the game after the end of the high-frequency support mode but also the degree of advantage of the jackpot game are affected by the type of the stop result, and the importance of the stop result displayed as a stop can be increased. it can.

In addition, the stop reference number of game times in the high frequency support mode may be different between when the stop results SD0 to SD5 are stopped and displayed and when the stop results SD6 to SD11 are stopped and displayed. In this case, the former reference number of terminations may be larger than that of the latter or vice versa. In the former case, it is more advantageous when the stop results SD0 to SD5 are stopped and displayed, and in the latter case, the shortage compared to when the stop results SD6 to SD11 are stopped and displayed is a game after the mode ends. It is possible to realize the game playability of filling and reducing.

(48) In the seventh embodiment, the variable display time table referred to when the fixed display time is selected is switched according to the type of the stop result, but the game result of the game time other than the type of the stop result (for example, The variable display time table may be switched depending on how many times the jackpot is counted from a predetermined timing.

(49) In the seventh embodiment, the variable display time tables B1 and B2 to be referred to are switched depending on the type of the stop result of the special figure display unit 43 only at the time of initial hit (big hit of the first special figure). However, when the stop result of the first special figure at the time of the first hit is the stop results SD0 to SD5, thereafter, the variable display time table B1 is continuously referred to until the loop in the specific state ends, and When the stop results in the first special figure are the stop results SD6 to SD11, thereafter, the variable display time table B2 may be continuously referred until the loop in the specific state ends.

(50) In the seventh embodiment, the variable display time table for the second special figure referred to in the specific state is switched depending on the type of the stop result of the first special figure. According to the type of stop result (big hit symbol or small hit symbol), the variable display time table to be referred to in a specific state after the big hit game or the V big hit game corresponding to the stop result may be switched.

(51) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine that gives a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrange ball machine, and a sparrow ball.

Also, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, provided with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

Furthermore, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that are provided with a take-in device and start rotation of a reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in a storage part have been taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can be applied to a game machine in which and are integrated.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above-described embodiments is shown in parentheses or the like as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A ball entering portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part.
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a win/loss determination by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
When the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege (big hit game) to the player (transition to the jackpot gaming state by the main control device 81) Function to execute processing),
A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entering portion during execution of the variable acceptance control, the ending means for ending the variable acceptance control (executes accessory opening/closing processing by the main controller 81). Function),
Equipped with
The mode of the variable acceptance control includes a plurality of modes in which the switching control can be executed a plurality of times, and the plurality of modes includes a first switching mode in which the switching control is performed at least once. After executing the first opening/closing pattern), it is possible to execute the second switching mode (second opening/closing pattern) different from the first switching mode and in which the switching control is performed at least once. Includes a specific mode (high winning prize opening and closing game),
A game machine characterized in that the first switching mode is a mode in which the upper limit number of game balls can be entered into the ball entering section from the start to the end of the first switching mode.

In the above configuration, the award determination is executed by the game ball entering the ball entering portion, and when the result of the award determination is the result corresponding to the award information, the bonus is awarded to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by aiming to enter the ball entering portion in order to obtain the privilege. Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, when the specific trigger is established, the variable receiving means is changed from the second state (the state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball entrance portion or the state in which it is difficult to accept) to the first state (the game ball can be received in the ball entry portion Or, the variable acceptance control is performed in which the switching control is performed at least once. In this case, since it is easy to cause a ball to enter the ball entering portion, the frequency of the above-described grant determination increases, and the player can advantageously proceed with the game.

Under such a configuration, in the present feature, as one mode of the variable acceptance control, there is a specific mode in which the switching control is executed in the second switching mode after the switching control is executed in the first switching mode. Further, the first switching mode is a mode in which the upper limit number of game balls can enter the ball entering portion. When the upper limit number of game balls has entered the ball entering portion, the variable reception control is configured to end. However, while the switching control is being executed in the first switching mode, the player aims at the ball entering portion. When the game ball is continuously fired, the variable acceptance control ends before the switching control in the second switching mode is started, and the switching control in the second switching mode is not executed. On the other hand, while the switching control is being executed in the first switching mode, if the player does not shoot the game ball or shoots the game ball in a mode that does not reach the ball entering portion, the first switching mode Even if the switching control of is executed, the number of game balls entering the game ball does not reach the upper limit, and the variable acceptance control does not end. That is, the switching control in the second switching mode is executed. In this way, it is possible to select whether to enter the ball into the ball entering portion under the first switching mode or the second switching mode depending on the game ball launching mode. As a result, the room for technical intervention is expanded, and the interest and the degree of concentration on the game are favorably increased, as compared with the game in which the player simply aims to enter the entrance portion during execution of the variable acceptance control. As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A2. When the first switching mode is to perform the switching control a plurality of times, the period of the first state in each of the switching controls of the first switching mode is the same or one of the switching controls. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the period of the first state of the switching control is different from the period of the first state of the other switching control or the other switching control.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a practically preferable mode for realizing the configuration of the characteristic A1.

Features A3. The second switching mode is a mode in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball entering section than the first switching mode, or the frequency of entering the ball entering section is more likely to be lower than the first switching mode. The gaming machine described in the characteristic A1 or the characteristic A2, which is characterized by being present.

When a game ball enters the ball entering portion in a situation where a predetermined number of pieces of determination information are stored in the information storage means, acquisition of the determination information for the entry of the game ball into the information storage means of the acquired determination information There is a game machine with invalid ball entry that is not a target of memory. With the configuration of this feature in such a gaming machine, when the game ball is fired in a mode in which the second switching control is executed, the game ball is inserted into the ball entering portion while suppressing the occurrence of invalid ball entry. It becomes possible to make a ball. This makes it possible to efficiently supplement the determination information.

It should be noted that, in the case of the present characteristic, "if the second switching mode is one in which the switching control is performed a plurality of times, is the period of the first state in each of the switching controls of the second switching mode the same? Or the period of the first state of the one of the switching controls is different from the period of the first state of the other switching control or the other one of the switching controls." May be applied.

Features A4. When a game ball enters the ball entering portion in a situation where the predetermined number of the information for determination is stored in the information storage means, acquisition of the information for determination based on the ball entering or based on the ball entering It is configured to be a non-targeted ball (ineffective winning) that does not store the information for determination acquired by the information storage unit,
The second switching mode is a mode in which the non-target ball is less likely to occur or the non-target ball is less frequently generated than the first switching mode, and the second switching mode is a mode in which the non-target ball is less likely to occur. The game machine according to any one.

In the above configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion in a situation where a predetermined number of pieces of determination information are stored in the information storage means, the information of the determination information obtained or the acquisition of the determination information of the entry Since the second switching mode is a mode in which the non-target ball is less likely to be stored in the storage means than the first switching mode, the non-target ball is less likely to occur or the occurrence frequency is less likely to occur. , When the game ball is fired in a mode in which the second switching control is executed, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the ball entrance portion while suppressing the occurrence of invalid ball entry. This makes it possible to efficiently supplement the determination information.

Features A5. The ending means ends the variable acceptance control when the upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entering portion regardless of whether or not the game ball is the non-target ball. The gaming machine described in Feature A4.

In this configuration, the number of balls entered into the ball entrance portion is counted even if the ball is not a target ball, and even a non-target ball is a factor that reduces the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit number. With such a configuration, with the configuration of the characteristic A4, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of remaining balls due to a non-target entering ball, and it is possible to secure a long execution period of the second switching mode. This makes it possible to increase the chances of supplementing the determination information.

Features A6. When the variable receiving means is in the second state, it is provided with ball receiving means (upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702) capable of receiving a game ball,
The variable receiving means receives the game ball received by the ball receiving means into the ball receiving portion when the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state by the variable receiving control means. It is a possible configuration,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with retaining means (protruding portions 703, 704) capable of retaining the game balls in the ball receiving means.

In the above-mentioned configuration, the game ball that is launched in a situation where the variable receiving means is in the second state remains on the ball receiving means for a certain period of time, and the game ball is switched to the first state of the variable receiving means. Will be guided to the entrance section. Therefore, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball in the situation where the second switching mode is executed, it is possible to suppress the generation of the waste ball. In other words, while suppressing the occurrence of inconveniences such as forcing a special operation of launching a game ball in consideration of a period when the variable receiving means is in the first state, and suppressing the inconvenience that the player suffers a disadvantage due to the generation of a waste ball, It is possible to exert the above effects of the features A1 to A5.

Features A7. The variable acceptance control means,
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (the high-frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is established. First control means capable of executing (feature opening and closing game for high-frequency support mode) (function of executing general-purpose game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied (the situation where the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), before the variable acceptance control for the satisfaction. Second control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control (feature opening/closing game for low frequency support mode) for non-establishment in which it is difficult to receive a game ball in the entry ball section (executes a universal game state transition process by the main controller 81) Function),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the specific mode is included in a mode in which the switching control can be executed a plurality of times among the modes of the variable acceptance control for establishment.

In the above configuration, when the specific trigger is generated in the first situation in which the specific condition is satisfied, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed, so that the input is performed during the first situation in which the specific condition is satisfied. Balls are likely to enter the ball. Therefore, it becomes easier to receive the above-mentioned grant determination, and the player can advantageously proceed with the game. Under such a configuration, since the mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a specific mode, when the player plays the game in the first situation, the game ball is shot aiming at entering the ball entering portion. If it continues, the first switching mode is performed, so that the player frequently enters the ball entering portion. Therefore, the respective effects of the above characteristics A1 to A6 can be achieved while suppressing the number of stored (holding number) of determination information from becoming 0 or being rapidly reduced in the first situation.

Note that, in this feature, the second switching mode is executed from the firing mode in which a ball is generated in the first switching mode in accordance with the timing at which the first status ends (the switching timing from the first status to the second status). By switching to the firing mode, it is possible to execute part or all of the second switching mode after the second situation is reached. Therefore, by applying this feature to the feature A3 or the feature A4, it is possible to efficiently supplement the determination information after the second situation. Further, in the above-mentioned characteristic A1 which is presupposed by the characteristic A3 or the characteristic A4, the first switching mode is executed prior to the second switching mode, and the first switching mode allows the upper limit number of balls to enter the ball entering portion. Since it is a mode, the occurrence of the second switching mode in the first situation is preferably suppressed, and the demerit of the second switching mode (the reduction in the number of pending storage of determination information is easily promoted) is eliminated. You can With the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which the determination information can be efficiently replenished after the second situation while suppressing the adverse effects on the game during the first situation.

Feature A8. If the second situation is reached at least during the execution of the variable acceptance control of the specific aspect, the variable acceptance control being performed can be continued even after the second situation is reached. A gaming machine described in Feature A7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which the determination information can be further added after the second situation.

Feature A9. The variable acceptance control means, when at least the second situation occurs during execution of the variable acceptance control of the specific aspect, the variable acceptance control is being performed until the upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entering portion. The game machine according to feature A7 or feature A8, which is capable of continuing variable acceptance control.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which the determination information can be further added after the second situation is reached, and further, the second switching mode can be executed to the end. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure the supplemental opportunity (additional opportunity) for the determination information.

Feature A10. Based on the fact that the grant determination means makes the grant determination, the variable display of the design is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means is displayed. (Special figure display unit 43) is provided with game time control means for executing the game times (function of executing special figure game time control processing by the main controller 81),
It is possible to execute the game times in parallel with the variable acceptance control,
The second switching mode is a mode in which it is impossible or difficult to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the ball entering portion during an execution period of a predetermined game time that is executed after the second situation. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A7 to A9.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to execute the second switching mode over a predetermined game time, and it is possible to continue the second switching mode even after the start of the next game time. In the information storage means, the number of stored determination information is decreased by one when the game time is started. According to this configuration, not only the predetermined game time is being executed but also the next game time is being executed. Also, it becomes possible to supplement the determination information. That is, the determination information can be supplemented (added) a plurality of times, and the game after the end of the first situation can be appropriately excited.

Feature A11. The second switching mode is a mode in which it is impossible or difficult to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the ball entering portion during the execution period of the game time executed first after the second situation. The game machine according to feature A10, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, the second switching mode can be continued over the first game time after the second situation, and the determination information can be replenished multiple times. It becomes possible to realize it suitably.

Feature A12. The game machine according to feature A10 or feature A11, wherein an execution period of the game time is a sum of a variable display period of the pattern in the game time and a stop display period of the pattern in the game time.

In the above configuration, the execution period of the game times is the total period of the variable display period and the stop display period of the pattern, and these respective periods are appropriately set, or the pattern of the second switching mode is set in relation to these periods. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably realize the configuration of the characteristic A10 or the characteristic A11.

Feature A13. As a mode of the variable acceptance control for the non-establishment, a predetermined mode (low winning prize opening/closing game) different from the specific mode is included,
The game machine according to any one of features A7 to A12, wherein the second switching mode is more likely to cause a ball to enter the ball entering portion than the predetermined mode.

According to the above configuration, although the second switching mode can be generated after the second situation, the occurrence of the event in which the ball does not enter the ball entering portion at the same level as in the second situation. This can be suppressed, and the significance of the second switching mode can be secured appropriately. As a result, the motivation to generate the second switching mode after the second situation is appropriately increased, and the fun of the game can be significantly enhanced as compared with the case where the game is simply digested under the first situation. It will be possible. In addition, since the specific mode is implemented as one mode of the variable acceptance control under the first situation, the second switching mode is not limited to after the second situation, and also in the game under the first situation. Although it may occur, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the number of determination information stored from becoming 0 or from being sharply reduced.

Feature A14. Features A7 to A13, which are provided with a payout unit (payout device 96 and payout control device 97) capable of paying out a specific number of game balls when the game balls enter the ball entering portion. A gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, during the first situation, the gaming ball (prize ball) is frequently paid out by firing the gaming ball so as to enter the gaming ball into the ball entering portion under the first switching mode. Will be done in. Therefore, the player can play the game in the first situation while suppressing not only the number of stored pieces of determination information but also the decrease in the number of balls held.

Feature A15. When the switching control is executed once in the first switching mode, the switching control is performed a plurality of times in the first switching mode during the period in which the variable acceptance control is in the first state by the switching control. When executed, the total of the periods during which the variable acceptance control is in the first state in each switching control is equal to or more than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball of the launching means and the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A14.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the upper limit number of game balls can enter the ball entering portion from the start to the end of the first switching mode. Further, according to the present configuration, the number of game balls entered into the ball entering section naturally reaches the upper limit by only continuing the normal firing mode aiming at the ball entering section. That is, the player can easily realize a game in which the second switching mode is not executed, and the game can be easily played.

Feature A16. In the switching control executed in the second switching mode, the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state is equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball of the firing means and is equal to or less than twice the firing cycle. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that the switching control is included.

In the above configuration, since the period for which the variable receiving means is in the first state in the second switching mode is equal to or longer than the game cycle of the game ball, it is possible to reliably generate the ball entering the ball entering portion. As a result, when the player executes the second switching mode, the variable reception control is in the first state, but since the ball does not enter the ball entering section, the game for the second switching mode is achieved. It is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in the interest of the person. On the other hand, by setting the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state to be twice the firing cycle or less, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from entering the ball entering portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the player cannot fully enjoy the second switching mode due to the early termination of the second switching mode.

Features A17. Based on the fact that the grant determination means makes the grant determination, the variable display of the design is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means is displayed. (Special figure display unit 43) is provided with game time control means for executing the game times (function of executing special figure game time control processing by the main controller 81),
It is possible to execute the game times in parallel with the variable acceptance control,
The second switching mode is capable of executing the switching control a plurality of times,
After the end of the one switching control in the second switching mode, when a predetermined game time is started, the next switching control in the second switching mode may be started during execution of the predetermined game time. The execution interval (waiting period) between the one switching control and the next switching control and the execution period of the predetermined game times are set in the above-mentioned features A1 to A16. Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, when the player executes the second switching mode, the determination information can be replenished one by one at each time of the game, and the determination information can be replenished efficiently. become.

Feature A18. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A ball entering portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part.
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a win/loss determination by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
When the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege (big hit game) to the player (transition to the jackpot gaming state by the main control device 81) Function to execute processing),
A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The mode of the variable acceptance control includes a plurality of modes in which the switching control can be executed a plurality of times, and the plurality of modes includes a first switching mode in which the switching control is performed at least once. After executing the first opening/closing pattern), it is possible to execute the second switching mode (second opening/closing pattern) different from the first switching mode and in which the switching control is performed at least once. Includes a specific mode (high winning prize opening and closing game),
In the second switching mode, balls are less likely to enter the ball entering section than in the first switching mode, or the frequency of entering the ball entering section is more likely to be lower than in the first switching mode. A gaming machine characterized by being present.

According to this configuration, in the specific mode, after the first switching mode in which the ball entering the ball entering portion is relatively likely to occur is executed, the ball entering the ball entering portion is relatively unlikely to occur The switching mode is executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the characteristic A1. Note that it is possible to apply each of the configurations described in any one of the features A2 to A17 to this feature. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying these configurations.

Features A19. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
Variable receiving means (second operation) which is provided in the game area and is capable of switching between a first state in which the game ball can be received or is easily received and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received or which is harder to receive than the first state (second operation) Mouth 34 and general electric accessory 34a),
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Detecting means (second working port winning sensor 34c) capable of detecting the acceptance of the game ball into the variable receiving means,
Based on the detection result of the detection means, a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have been received by the variable reception means during execution of the variable reception control (role by main controller 81 Function to execute object opening and closing process),
When it is determined by the determination means that the upper limit number of game balls have been accepted by the variable acceptance means, an end means for ending the variable acceptance control (a function of executing the accessory opening/closing process by the main control device 81),
When the detection means detects the acceptance of the game ball into the variable acceptance means, a privilege giving means (payout device 96 and payout control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to the player,
Equipped with
The mode of the variable acceptance control includes a plurality of modes in which the switching control can be executed a plurality of times, and the plurality of modes includes a first switching mode in which the switching control is performed at least once. After executing the first opening/closing pattern), it is possible to execute the second switching mode (second opening/closing pattern) different from the first switching mode and in which the switching control is performed at least once. Includes a specific mode (high winning prize opening and closing game),
The first switching mode is a mode in which the variable receiving means can receive the upper limit number of game balls from the start to the end of the first switching mode.

In the above configuration, when the specific trigger is established, the variable receiving means is changed from the second state (a state in which the game ball cannot be received or is difficult to receive) to the first state (a state in which the game ball can be received or is easy to receive), and thereafter, the The variable acceptance control is executed in which the switching control for setting the two states is executed at least once. In this case, as compared with the case where the variable acceptance control is not executed, the player can easily obtain the privilege, and can advantageously proceed with the game.

Under such a configuration, in the present feature, as one mode of the variable acceptance control, there is a specific mode in which the switching control is executed in the second switching mode after the switching control is executed in the first switching mode. Further, the first switching mode is a mode in which the variable receiving means can receive the upper limit number of game balls. When the variable receiving means receives the upper limit number of game balls, the variable receiving control is configured to end. However, while the switching control is being executed in the first switching mode, the player aims at the variable receiving means. When the game ball is continuously fired, the variable acceptance control ends before the switching control in the second switching mode is started, and the switching control in the second switching mode is not executed. On the other hand, while the switching control is being executed in the first switching mode, if the player does not shoot the game ball or shoots the game ball in a mode that does not reach the variable receiving means, the first switching mode Even if the switching control is executed, the number of game balls received in the variable receiving means does not reach the upper limit number, and the variable receiving control does not end. That is, the switching control in the second switching mode is executed. In this way, it is possible to select whether to enter the ball into the variable receiving means under the first switching mode or the second switching mode, depending on the game ball launching mode. As a result, the room for technical intervention is expanded, and the interest and the degree of concentration on the game are suitably increased compared to the game in which the player simply aims to enter the variable receiving means during execution of the variable reception control. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be improved appropriately.

Note that it is possible to apply each configuration described in any one of the features A2 to A18 to this feature. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the above-mentioned features A1 to A19 is, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a ball entering portion into which a game ball can enter, and a ball entering the ball portion can be easily or easily received. There is known one provided with a first state and a variable receiving means capable of switching the game ball to a second state in which the game ball cannot be received or is hard to be received (see, for example, JP 2004-81853 A). The background art "." has been made with the problem to be solved by the invention "Here, there is still room for improvement in increasing the degree of attention to games in gaming machines."

It should be noted that, with respect to each of the configurations of the features A1 to A19, any one of the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F17, and the features G1 to G9 is provided. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A ball entering portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part.
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a win/loss determination by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
Based on the fact that the grant determination means makes the grant determination, the variable display of the design is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means is displayed. A game time control means (a function for executing a special game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be executed in the (special view display portion 43),
When the determination result of the award determination means corresponds to the award information, a game state transition means (mainly a jackpot game state) for shifting to a special game state (big hit game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A function of executing a transition process to the jackpot gaming state by the control device 81),
Means capable of establishing a specific condition (a high frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114) after the special game state (a transition process at the end of the jackpot game by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
After the specific condition is satisfied, if a predetermined condition (the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC becomes 0) is satisfied, a unit that makes the specific condition not satisfied (by the main controller 81) A function that executes the process for ending the high-frequency support mode),
The player in the game after the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied is caused by the operation mode of the launching device in the predetermined period in the final game time in the first situation where the specific condition is satisfied. Specific means capable of varying the degree of advantage (high prize winning a prize opening and closing game of the ordinary electric prize a),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, the award determination is executed by the game ball entering the ball entering portion, and when the result of the award determination is the result corresponding to the award information, the bonus is awarded to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming to enter the ball entering portion in order to obtain a privilege. Further, in the above configuration, when the specific trigger is generated in the first situation where the specific condition is satisfied, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed, so that the first condition is satisfied while the specific condition is satisfied. , It becomes easy for a ball to enter the ball entrance portion. Therefore, it becomes easier to receive the above-mentioned grant determination, and the player can advantageously proceed with the game. The fulfillment state of the specific condition ends when the predetermined condition is fulfilled.

Under such a configuration, in the present feature, the degree of advantage of the game after the second situation in which the specific condition is not satisfied by the operation mode of the firing means in the predetermined period in the final game time in the first situation It is possible to make different. The fact that the game has advanced to the final game times in the first situation is the situation just before the end of the situation, and in such a case, the player is in the first situation (entering the ball entering section). It is assumed that you are pessimistic that the situation where the ball tends to occur) is likely to end, and it is hard to say that you are enjoying the game. In this respect, according to this feature, it is not just a pessimism at the end of the first situation, and in the final game round, the expectation is that the game after becoming the second situation will be advantageous, and the launch means Can be operated. As a result, the game of the final game time is suitably raised, and it becomes possible to enjoy the game until the end of the first situation. In addition, since the game after the second situation is affected, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game when the first situation ends, and it is possible to favorably continue the game. .. Moreover, since the degree of advantage changes depending on the operation mode of the launching means, the room for technical intervention is expanded, and the interest level and the degree of concentration on the game are suitably increased. As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, since the last game time is targeted, the game time up to immediately before that can be played in a normal operation mode, and it is possible to preferably suppress adverse effects on the game originally in the first situation.

In addition, it can be understood that the "operation mode of the launching means" of this feature includes a mode in which the firing means is not operated.

Feature B2. The gaming machine of feature B1, wherein the predetermined period is a part of the final game time.

In the configuration of the characteristic B1 described above, it is assumed that the player's interest in the operation mode of the launching means becomes extremely high in a predetermined period, but in such a case, for example, if the predetermined period is the entire final game time, As a result of the determination of the grant at the game time and the interest in the pattern display are diluted, an adverse effect that the original meaning of the game time may be lost occurs. In this respect, in the present configuration, the predetermined period is limited to a part of the final game time, so that the game of the final game time can be excited while suppressing the loss of the original meaning of the game time. ..

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the predetermined period is a specific period after the final game time is started until the final game time or the second situation is reached.

In the above configuration, since the predetermined period is limited to a part of the final game time, it is possible to excite the game of the final game time while suppressing the loss of the original meaning of the game time. In such a case, for example, if the predetermined period is set as a part of the period during the final game, it is difficult for the player to play the game, which may cause confusion. In this respect, in the present configuration, the predetermined period is the specific period until the final game time or the state where the specific condition is not satisfied, so that it suffices to pay attention to the operation mode of the firing means at the final stage of the final game time. Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

Feature B4. If the specifying means does not fire the game ball in the predetermined period or shoots the game ball in a manner that the game ball does not enter the ball entering portion, after the second situation is reached, as compared to the case where it is not. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the game can be made advantageous to the player.

In the above-mentioned configuration, by not performing the firing operation aiming at the ball entering portion in the predetermined period, the game after the specific condition is not satisfied becomes advantageous. When the specific condition is satisfied, it is natural that the player positively shoots the game ball aiming at the ball entering portion in order to generate the ball entering the ball entering portion. In such a situation, with this configuration, the operation required in the predetermined period can be significantly different from the operation performed up to that point. For example, if the two operations are similar, the player may intend to perform an operation that should be performed in a predetermined period, but may not actually be in such an operation mode, or the operation mode may be wrong. Although there is a risk, the present configuration can suppress the occurrence of such an inconvenience and make the game easier to play.

Feature B5. A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entering portion during execution of the variable acceptance control, second ending means for ending the variable acceptance control (accessory opening/closing process by the main control device 81). Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control can be executed across the end timing of the first situation, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion does not reach the upper limit number in a predetermined period. With such an operation mode, the variable acceptance control can be continued even after the end of the first situation, and the variable acceptance means can be brought into the first state. Thereby, it becomes possible to add or supplement the determination information, and it is possible to advantageously proceed with the game after the second situation.

Feature B6. A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The predetermined period is a period in which the variable acceptance control is performed when the variable acceptance control is performed over the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation, and a period in which the variable acceptance means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5, which includes an overlapping period with.

In the above configuration, since the predetermined period is related to the execution period of the variable acceptance control, the player can grasp the predetermined period by watching the movement of the variable acceptance means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the inability to identify the predetermined period and the operation switching timing, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game among the players.

Feature B7. A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entering portion during execution of the variable acceptance control, second ending means for ending the variable acceptance control (accessory opening/closing process by the main control device 81). Function to execute)
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
If the specific trigger occurs in the first situation, the first control means (universal game state by the main control device 81) capable of executing the variable acceptance control for establishment (accessory opening/closing game for high-frequency support mode) Function that executes the migration process),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation, the variable reception control for non-establishment is more difficult to receive the game ball in the ball-in portion than the variable reception control for establishment (the accessory opening/closing game for low-frequency support mode). ) Second control means capable of executing (function to execute the universal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Prepare,
The mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a plurality of modes in which the switching control can be executed a plurality of times, and the plurality of modes include a first switching mode (first opening/closing pattern). After executing the switching control, a specific mode (high winning prize opening/closing game) in which the switching control can be executed in a second switching mode (second opening/closing pattern) different from the first switching mode is included. Is
The game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B6, wherein the second switching mode is less likely to cause a ball to enter the ball entering section than the first switching mode.

In the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control can be executed across the end timing of the first situation, an operation such that the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion does not reach the upper limit number in a predetermined period. By adopting the aspect, the variable acceptance control can be continued even after the second situation. In this case, since the second switching mode is provided on the latter half side of the variable acceptance control, it becomes easy to execute the second switching mode after the second situation. Further, in this second switching mode, it is relatively difficult for the ball to enter the ball entering portion, so that the decrease in the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit number is suppressed and the variable acceptance control (second switching mode) is performed. It can be continued for a long time. As a result, the period in which the determination information can be added or supplemented can be extended, and the game after the second situation can be advantageously advanced. Moreover, in the variable acceptance control, since the first switching mode in which a ball is relatively likely to enter the ball entrance section is executed prior to the second switching mode, the ball entrance section is entered in a game other than the predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of storages of the determination information, which is frequently generated. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to suitably excite the final game in the first situation while suppressing adverse effects on the game in the first situation.

Feature B8. In the feature B7, the first switching mode is a mode in which the upper limit number of game balls can enter the ball entering portion from the start to the end of the first switching mode. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, in a game other than the predetermined period, the variable acceptance control can be ended before the second switching mode is executed. As a result, the occurrence of the second switching mode in the first situation is preferably suppressed, and the effect of the above feature B7 can be enhanced.

Feature B9. The second switching mode is a mode in which it is impossible or difficult to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the ball entering portion during an execution period of a predetermined game time that is executed after the second situation. The gaming machine described in the characteristic B7 or the characteristic B8.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to execute the second switching mode over a predetermined game time, and it is possible to continue the second switching mode even after the start of the next game time. In the information storage means, the number of stored determination information is decreased by one when the game time is started. According to this configuration, not only the predetermined game time is being executed but also the next game time is being executed. Also, it becomes possible to supplement the determination information. In other words, it becomes possible to supplement (add) the determination information over a plurality of times, and it is possible to excite the game after the second situation.

Feature B10. As a mode of the variable acceptance control for the non-establishment, a predetermined mode (low winning prize opening/closing game) different from the specific mode is included,
The game machine according to any one of features B7 to B9, wherein the second switching mode is more likely to cause a ball to enter the ball entering portion than the predetermined mode.

According to the above configuration, even though the second switching mode can be executed after the second situation, the occurrence of an event in which the ball does not enter the ball entrance portion at the same level as in the second situation. This can be suppressed, and the significance of the second switching mode can be secured appropriately. As a result, the motivation to execute the second switching mode after the second situation is appropriately increased, and the fun of the game is significantly improved as compared with the case where the game is simply digested under the first situation. Will be possible. In addition, since the specific mode is implemented as one mode of the variable acceptance control under the first situation, the second switching mode is not limited to after the second situation, and also in the game under the first situation. Although it may occur, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the number of determination information stored from becoming 0 or from being sharply reduced.

Feature B11. Production control means (production) which controls a predetermined production means (symbol display device 41) so that a specific production (special production) is executed at least part of the predetermined period or before the predetermined period in the final game time. The game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, which is provided with a control device 82).

According to the above configuration, the player can identify the predetermined period with the specific effect as a guide or switch the operation mode of the launching means to make the game advantageous after the second situation. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the inability to identify the predetermined period and the operation switching timing, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game among the players.

Feature B12. The effect control means, at the start timing of the predetermined period, at least a means for starting the specific effect before a required period until the game ball shot by the launching device reaches the ball-in portion. The gaming machine according to Feature B11.

In the above-mentioned configuration, the specific effect is executed in consideration of the time required for the game ball shot by the launching means to reach the ball entering portion, so it is in time even if the operating mode of the launching means is switched after seeing the specific effect. As a result, the game can be played easily. Note that the actual required time is not necessarily constant, and it is considered that variations may occur. Therefore, for the "required time" in this feature, for example, an average value (for example, an average value when ten game balls are shot) Or the expected value in design can be used.

Feature B13. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A ball entering portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part.
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a win/loss determination by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
Based on the fact that the grant determination means makes the grant determination, the variable display of the design is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means is displayed. A game time control means (a function for executing a special game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be executed in the (special view display portion 43),
When the determination result of the award determination means corresponds to the award information, a game state transition means (mainly a jackpot game state) for shifting to a special game state (big hit game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A function of executing a transition process to the jackpot gaming state by the control device 81),
Equipped with
Means capable of establishing a specific condition (a high frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114) after the special game state (a transition process at the end of the jackpot game by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
After the specific condition is satisfied, if a predetermined condition (the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC becomes 0) is satisfied, a unit that makes the specific condition not satisfied (by the main controller 81) A function that executes the process for ending the high-frequency support mode),
After the second condition in which the specific condition is not satisfied, due to the occurrence mode of the ball entering the ball entering portion in the predetermined game period in the final game time in the first condition in which the specific condition is satisfied Specific means capable of varying the degree of advantage of the player in the game (high prize winning object opening/closing game of the general electric object 34a),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above-mentioned composition, the same operation effect as the above-mentioned feature B1 can be produced. Note that it is possible to apply each configuration described in any of the above features B2 to B12 to this feature. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying these configurations.

Note that the invention described in the above features B1 to B13 is, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and the lottery result is a specific result, There is known one that shifts to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). There is still room for improvement in raising the degree of attention of the above.” The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

In addition, with respect to each of the configurations of the features B1 to B13, any one of the features A1 to A19, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F17, and the features G1 to G9 is provided. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A ball entering portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part.
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a win/loss determination by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
When the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege (big hit game) to the player (to the jackpot gaming state by the main control device 81) Function that executes the migration process),
A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the variable acceptance control is started, a grasping unit that grasps the progress of the variable acceptance control (the grasping process of the number SA that can be added and retained by the effect control device 82 according to the third embodiment or the fourth embodiment) Function to execute)
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, a predetermined informing means (symbol display device 41) so that a specific notice (special effect) is executed before the variable acceptance control in which the progress is grasped by the grasping means is completed. ) Control means (a function of executing the special effect process by the effect control device 82 of the effect control device 82 of the second or third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, the award determination is executed by the game ball entering the ball entering portion, and when the result of the award determination is the result corresponding to the award information, the bonus is awarded to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by aiming to enter the ball entering portion in order to obtain the privilege. Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, when the specific trigger is established, the variable receiving means is changed from the second state (the state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball entrance portion or the state in which it is difficult to accept) to the first state (the game ball can be received in the ball entry portion Or, the variable acceptance control is performed in which the switching control is performed at least once. In this case, since it is easy to cause a ball to enter the ball entering portion, the frequency of the above-described grant determination increases, and the player can advantageously proceed with the game.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, the progress of the variable acceptance control is grasped during the variable acceptance control, and the specific notification based on the result is executed before the end of the variable acceptance control. .. In this case, the player can grasp whether the switching control is executed for a part of the started variable acceptance control that has not been actually executed. In this way, if it becomes possible for the player to know in advance whether or not it is possible to generate a ball in the ball entering section, not only will it be easier for the player to have a sense of expectation for the subsequent game. , You can enjoy the game with the goal of achieving a ball. As a result, the fun of the game, which is a combination of the award determination based on the entry into the entry portion and the variable acceptance control that changes whether or not it is possible to enter the entry portion and the ease of entry, is significantly enhanced, It becomes possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that, in this feature, "based on the grasping result of the grasping means, a specific notification (special effect) is executed before the variable acceptance control whose progress has been grasped by the grasping means is finished" is " The specific notification (special effect) based on the grasping result of the grasping means is executed before the variable acceptance control whose progress has been grasped by the grasping means is finished."

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the specific notification is a notification that allows a player to recognize whether or not the switching control is executed.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible for the player to know in advance whether or not the switching control will be executed during the remaining period of the variable acceptance control that is being executed. For example, when it is indicated by the specific notification that the switching control is executed, the player expects to cause a ball to enter the ball entering portion during the period when the switching control is actually executed, You can play by aiming for it. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably increase the game motivation and the degree of concentration on the game.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or the feature C2, wherein the specific notification is a notification that allows a player to recognize whether or not a ball can enter the ball entering portion, or whether the ball can be easily entered. ..

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible for the player to know whether or not a ball can be entered into the ball entering portion during the remaining period of the variable acceptance control that is being executed. For example, when the specific notification indicates that a ball can be generated, the player can expect to actually generate the ball or aim for it to play the game. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably increase the game motivation and the degree of concentration on the game.

Feature C4. The specific notification indicates whether it is possible to add the number of executed game times to the number of game times whose execution is suspended or whether it is possible to add storage of the determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, which is a notice recognizable by a person.

According to the above configuration, the variable acceptance control being executed allows the player to know in advance whether or not the number of game times to be executed, in other words, the number of opportunities for grant determination can be increased. For example, when the specific notification indicates that the number can be increased, the player can expect the addition of the number of times of game times to be executed, or can play a game aiming at the realization thereof. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably increase the game motivation and the degree of concentration on the game.

Feature C5. A first grasping means as the grasping means,
Second grasping means for grasping a reduction timing of the number of stored determination information in the information storing means or a start timing of the next game time (by the effect control device 82 of the second embodiment or the third embodiment) Function to execute the process of grasping the number SA of addable hold)
Equipped with
The notification control means is adapted to execute the specific notification based on the grasping result of the first grasping means and the grasping result of the second grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one.

The determination information is stored only within a predetermined number (upper limit number) in the information storage means, and when the number of stored determination information has reached the predetermined number, a ball has entered the ball entrance portion. Does not add new judgment information. For this reason, if the special notification is given only by referring to the progress of the variable receiving means (remaining situation), there may be a discrepancy between the number that can be actually added and the number indicated by the notification. In this respect, in this feature, since the specific notification is given in consideration of the timing of decreasing the number of stored determination information or the start timing of the next game time (the timing of substantially reducing the number of stored determination information), It becomes possible to appropriately notify whether or not the number of executions of can be added.

In addition, from the "timing of decreasing the number of stored determination information in the information storage means" of the present characteristic, "the notification control means is based on the grasping result of the first grasping means and the grasping result of the second grasping means. The configuration until "the specific notification is executed" is performed by "the first grasping means is grasped by the first grasping means after the number of stored judgment information in the information storing means is reduced or the next game time is started. Second grasping means for grasping whether or not the variable receiving means is in the first state or is in the first state by the variable acceptance control (effect of the second embodiment or the third embodiment The function of executing the grasping process of the number SA of reserves that can be added by the control device 82), and the notification control means executes the specific notification based on the grasping result of the second grasping means." You can also

Feature C6. Any one of the features C1 to C5 characterized in that the specific notification is a notification by which the player can recognize information corresponding to the number of game times that can be added to the number of game times that are suspended for execution. A game machine described in Crab.

According to the above configuration, the player can previously know the number of game times that can be added by the variable acceptance control being executed. For example, when a large number is notified as the number of additional game times, the expectation for the subsequent game is increased or the mood is raised, which makes the game enjoyable. Further, when the number can be grasped in such a manner, it is possible to expect the addition of the maximum number or to aim for it and play, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect produced by the specific notification. ..

It should be noted that the "information corresponding to the number of game times that can be added to the number of game times for which execution is suspended" of this feature can be added to the number of game times for which execution is suspended. It can be understood that, in addition to the number of game times, the number of storages of determination information that can be added (the number of reserved storages) is included. In addition, “the information corresponding to the number of game times that can be added to the number of game times whose execution is suspended” of this feature is “the variable acceptance control in which the progress is grasped by the grasping means is terminated. The information corresponding to the number of game times that can be added by the time, or the information corresponding to the number of game times that can be added before the end of each game time whose execution is suspended” can be expressed.

Feature C7. The notification control means is provided with means for causing the player to recognize information corresponding to a number smaller than the actual number of playable games as the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature C6.

According to the above configuration, after the execution of the specific notification, a larger number of additions than the addable number indicated by the notification can occur. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of accomplishment and joy, and it is possible to suitably enhance the fun.

Feature C8. A first grasping means as the grasping means,
Second grasping means for grasping the execution period of each game time of which execution is suspended (performs a grasping process of the number SA of reserves that can be added by the effect control device 82 of the second embodiment or the third embodiment) Function),
Equipped with
One of the features C1 to C7 characterized in that the notification control means causes the specific notification to be executed based on the grasping result of the first grasping means and the grasping result of the second grasping means. The game machine described.

In the above configuration, since the second grasping unit grasps the execution period of each game time whose execution is suspended, it is possible to grasp the start timing of each game time of which future execution is confirmed. Since the start timing of each of these game times is a future timing when the number of stored determination information is reduced, the grasp result of the second grasping means and the grasp result of the first grasping means (progress of variable acceptance control) By deriving the addable number based on both of them, it is possible to derive the addable number without including the entry into the entry portion that does not lead to the addition of the determination information. Therefore, it is possible to derive an addable number commensurate with the actual number, and it is possible to perform highly reliable notification.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to Feature C8, wherein the second grasping unit grasps an execution period of each of the game times when the specific notification is started.

In the above configuration, since the execution period of each game time held at the start of the specific notification is ascertained, there is no time lag between the notification timing and the information used for deriving the addable number, or it may be a little. it can. As a result, it is possible to accurately derive the number of additions that can be added, and to perform highly reliable notification.

Feature C10. The second grasping means, based on each of the determination information stored in the information storage means, information (variable display time and confirmed display time, or variation) corresponding to the execution period of each game time of which execution is suspended. Characteristic C8 or characteristic C9 characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process for confirmation of holding by the main control device 81) for grasping the display time) before the respective game times are executed. The game machine described.

In the above configuration, since the execution period of each game time that is held is grasped by so-called pre-reading, even if the execution period of each game time is not uniform, it is possible to add according to the actual situation. The number can be derived. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly reliable notification while increasing the degree of freedom in the execution period of each game time.

Feature C11. The variable acceptance control means,
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (the high-frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is established. First control means capable of executing (feature opening and closing game for high-frequency support mode) (function of executing general-purpose game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied (the situation where the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), before the variable acceptance control for the satisfaction. Second control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control (feature opening/closing game for low frequency support mode) for non-establishment in which it is difficult to receive a game ball in the entry ball section (executes a universal game state transition process by the main controller 81) Function),
Equipped with
When the second situation occurs during execution of the variable acceptance control for establishment, it is configured such that the variable acceptance control that is being executed can be continued even after the second situation.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein the grasping device grasps a progress of the variable acceptance control executed over the end timing of the first situation.

In the above-described configuration, when a specific trigger occurs in the first situation, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed, and a ball is likely to enter the ball entering portion. In this case, the player can easily proceed with the game because the player can easily receive the above-mentioned grant determination. However, the first situation is not permanent and ends when the specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, at the end of the first situation, the player is often disappointed, and it is difficult to say that the situation is enjoying the game.

In this regard, in the present configuration, the progress of the variable acceptance control executed over the end timing of the first situation is grasped, and the specific notification is performed based on the result. In this case, the player can know in advance whether the switching control will be performed after the second situation. In particular, when the specific notification indicates that the switching control will be performed after the second situation is reached, although the first situation is internally completed, a ball is likely to enter the ball entry portion. Since the state is extended, the player's mood is elevated and the player's motivation for playing is suitably stimulated. That is, according to this configuration, in addition to the above-described effect of the feature C1, it is possible to achieve a further effect that the game at the end of the first situation is suitably excited.

Feature C12. The gaming machine according to Feature C11, wherein the notification control unit causes the specific notification to be executed at least before the first game time after the second situation is started. ..

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation regarding the variable acceptance control after the second situation has occurred, before the first game time after the second situation has started. become. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to suitably arouse the player's willingness to play when he/she enters the game after the second situation.

Feature C13. The game according to the feature C11 or the feature C12, wherein the notification control means causes the specific notification to be executed after the stop display of the pattern is started in the final game time in the first situation. Machine.

Where the specific notification relates to the game after the end of the first situation, if such notification is given before the notification of the grant determination result in the final game time under the first situation, the result of the final game time is There is a concern that it may function as an indication that it is an outlier. In this respect, in this configuration, since the specific notification is executed after the result of the determination of grant in the final game time is notified, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience.

Feature C14. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein the grasping unit grasps the progress of the variable acceptance control when the specific notification is started.

In the above configuration, since the progress of the variable acceptance control at the start of the specific notification is grasped, it is possible to perform the specific notification reflecting the progress at the start, and it is possible to perform highly reliable notification. become.

Feature C15. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
Variable receiving means (second operation) which is provided in the game area and is capable of switching between a first state in which the game ball can be received or is easily received and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received or which is harder to receive than the first state (second operation) Mouth 34 and general electric accessory 34a),
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Detecting means (second working port winning sensor 34c) capable of detecting the acceptance of the game ball into the variable receiving means,
When the detection means detects the acceptance of the game ball into the variable acceptance means, a privilege giving means (payout device 96 and payout control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to the player,
After the variable acceptance control is started, a grasping unit that grasps the progress of the variable acceptance control (the grasping process of the number SA that can be added and held by the effect control device 82 of the second embodiment or the third embodiment) Function to execute)
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, a predetermined informing means (symbol display device 41) so that a specific notice (special effect) is executed before the variable acceptance control in which the progress is grasped by the grasping means is completed. ) Control means (a function of executing the special effect process by the effect control device 82 of the effect control device 82 of the second or third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when the specific trigger is established, the variable receiving means is changed from the second state (a state in which the game ball cannot be received or is difficult to receive) to the first state (a state in which the game ball can be received or is easy to receive), and thereafter, the The variable acceptance control is executed in which the switching control for setting the two states is executed at least once. In this case, as compared with the case where the variable acceptance control is not executed, the player can easily obtain the privilege, and can advantageously proceed with the game.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, the progress of the variable acceptance control is grasped during the variable acceptance control, and the specific notification based on the result is executed before the end of the variable acceptance control. .. In this case, the player can know in advance whether the switching control will be executed for a portion of the started variable acceptance control that has not actually been executed yet. In this way, it becomes possible for the player to know in advance whether or not it is possible to generate the acceptance of the game ball into the variable acceptance means (and in turn, whether or not the privilege can be obtained). For example, not only is it easier to have a sense of expectation in the subsequent game, but also the game can be played with the goal of realizing the above acceptance. As a result, it becomes possible to favorably enhance the interest, as compared with the case where the game is simply played.

Note that it is possible to apply each configuration described in any of the features C2 to C14 to this feature. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying these configurations.

The invention described in the above-mentioned features C1 to C15 is, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a ball-entering portion into which a game ball can enter, and a ball-receiving portion can accept or easily accept the game ball. There is known one provided with a first state and a variable receiving means capable of switching the game ball to a second state in which the game ball cannot be received or is hard to be received (see, for example, JP 2004-81853 A). The background art "." has been made with the problem to be solved by the invention "Here, there is still room for improvement in increasing the degree of attention to games in gaming machines."

In addition, with respect to each of the configurations of the features C1 to C15, any one of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B13, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F17, and the features G1 to G9 is provided. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger (ball entry into the second working opening 34) (function for executing a win/fail judgment by the main controller 81);
When the result of the lottery process is a predetermined specific result (big hit result), first shift means (main controller) for shifting to a special game state (big hit game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state 81, a function for executing a transition process to a jackpot gaming state),
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a first specific state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
It is provided with a second transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the jackpot game by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning to the first specific state after the end of the special game state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the high frequency support mode ends in the middle of the character opening/closing game), the second specific state after the end of the first specific state (the character opening/closing game continues even after the end of the high frequency support mode) It is a configuration that can be a continuous state),
The second specific state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific state,
When it becomes the second specific state after the end of the first specific state, a predetermined notification unit (symbol display device 41) so that a specific notification (special effect) corresponding to the duration of the second specific state is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising notification control means for controlling (a function of executing special effect processing by the effect control device 82 of the fourth embodiment).

In the above configuration, when the result of the lottery process is the specific result, the special game state may be entered, and then the first specific state may be entered. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second specific state is established after the first specific state is completed. Although the second specific state is not as advantageous as the first specific state, it is more advantageous than the normal game state, so that it is a relief game for the player when the first specific state ends. Further, in the present configuration, when the second specific state is reached after the end of the first specific state, the specific notification is performed, so that the player can understand that the second specific state will occur due to the notification. As a result, even in a situation where the first specific state is likely to end, it is possible to enter the game with a sense of expectation in the subsequent development. Moreover, the specific notification is a notification corresponding to the duration of the second specific state. By knowing the length of the duration of the second specific state, the player can grasp or infer the degree of advantage of the game in the second specific state. For example, when a notification corresponding to a long duration is given, it is a pleasure. With this, the end of the first specific state can be reached. With the above configuration, the game can be enjoyed even in the final stage of the first specific state, and the interest can be improved.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the duration of the second specific state is a period during which the second specific state can be continued.

In the above configuration, the duration period is not a guaranteed period and is only a period that can be continued. Therefore, when the specific notification is executed, the player sets the second period with the period grasped from the specific notification as a target. A specific state can be played.

In addition, the present characteristic is that "the second specific state is such that the length of the continuation period of the second specific state may vary depending on the game situation in the first specific state or the second specific state. It is also possible to express that the notification is executed as the specific notification corresponding to the continuable period of the second specific state." In this case, the following effects can be expected. The length of the duration of the second specific state may vary depending on the game situation in the first specific state or the second specific state. In such a situation, for example, a specific notification is guaranteed that the second specific state is continued. If it corresponds to the specified period, the period indicated by the specific notification is expected to be relatively short. In this case, the player's expectation may not be evoked even if the specific notification is executed, or the degree of expectation evoked by the notification may be reduced. In this regard, in the present configuration, since the specific notification is associated with the period in which the second specific state can be continued, the specific notification can be executed in association with a relatively long period, and the player's expectation is favorably adjusted. It becomes possible to evoke.

Feature D3. Means capable of varying the duration of the second specific state depending on the game situation at the end of the first specific state (in the main controller 81, the special figure game times, the general figure game times, and the accessory opening/closing game The game machine according to the feature D1 or the feature D2, which is provided with a function of asynchronously and overlappingly executing).

In the above configuration, since the duration of the second specific state changes depending on the game situation at the end of the first specific state, it is possible to play in expectation that the first specific state will end in a mode in which the period becomes longer. It is possible to allow the player to suitably enjoy the final game in the first specific state.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the notification control means is executed before the specific notification is brought into the second specific state.

In the above configuration, the notification corresponding to the duration of the second specific state is executed before the state is reached. For example, when a notification corresponding to a long duration is given, the player can face the second specific state with a strong sense of expectation, and the player's discouragement regarding the end of the first specific state can be appropriately reduced. Will be possible.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the notification control means is configured to execute the specific notification immediately before the end of the first specific state.

The specific notification is related to the game after the first specific state has ended. However, if such notification is performed at an early stage of the first specific state, the notification is the end of the first specific state from the viewpoint of the player. It may look like a notice or the player's interest in the first specific state may be low, and the interest in the first specific state may be reduced by half. In this regard, in the present configuration, the specific notification is executed just before the end of the first specific state, so that the specific notification is suppressed from interfering with the first specific state, and the notification can be effectively performed. become.

Feature D6. A specifying unit (a function for executing the remaining period determination process by the effect control device 82) for specifying the duration of the second specific state before the second specific state is reached;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the notification control unit executes the specific notification based on a specification result of the specifying unit.

According to the above configuration, the duration of the second specific state is specified in advance, and the specific notification is executed based on the result, so that the specific notification can be appropriately executed.

Feature D7. Specifying means for specifying the duration of the second specific state (function for executing the remaining period determination processing by the effect control device 82);
Period determination means (by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not the continuation period specified by the specifying device is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (a period during which the game times of the second special diagram can be added twice) A function to execute special production processing),
Equipped with
If the duration determining unit determines that the continuation period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the notification control unit executes a predetermined notification (character display of "great chance!!") as the specific notification, or The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the predetermined notification is executed more easily than when the duration determining unit determines that the duration is not longer than the predetermined duration.

According to this configuration, the player can recognize or predict the length of the duration of the second specific state depending on the presence or absence of the predetermined notification as the specific notification. For example, when the predetermined notification is made, the player's sense of expectation for the second specific state is suitably evoked, and it is possible to suitably raise the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D8. The notification control means is configured to execute the specific notification after the second specific state and before the end of the second specific state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the continuation period is a remaining period of the second specific state.

According to this configuration, the specific notification is executed after pretending that the second specific state does not occur. As a result, the joy and surprise of the player can be appropriately evoked, and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the present feature is that "the notification control means is configured to be executed before the specific notification is brought into the second specific state, and after the specific notification is brought into the second specific state. And a second means to be executed before the end of the second specific state, wherein the second means executes the notification corresponding to the remaining period of the second specific state as the specific notification. It is also possible to express it as ". In this case, since the specific notification may be in the second specific state and may be performed after the second specific state, it is possible to more appropriately exhibit the effect of the feature D8.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, which is in the normal game state after the second specific state is finished.

In the above configuration, since the normal game state is restored when the second specific state ends, the second specific state becomes the last chance for the player who has finished the first specific state. In this case, as a result of the player having a strong enthusiasm to play the second specific state, the significance of the second specific state is enhanced, and the above-described effects of the features D1 to D8 can be more suitably exerted. become.

Feature D10. Equipped with a ball entry part (second operation port 34) into which a game ball can enter,
The lottery means is for performing the lottery process based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering portion.
A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (the high-frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is established. First control means capable of executing (feature opening and closing game for high-frequency support mode) (function of executing general-purpose game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied (the situation where the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), before the variable acceptance control for the satisfaction. Second control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control (feature opening/closing game for low frequency support mode) for non-establishment in which it is difficult to receive a game ball in the entry ball section (executes a universal game state transition process by the main controller 81) Function),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the first specific state is the first situation.

In the above configuration, while the game state is in the first specific state (first situation), the player can easily take the lottery by the lottery means, so that the game can be advantageously advanced, but as a reaction to that, At the end of the first specific state, the player is likely to be strongly discouraged. Under such a situation, by providing any one of the features D1 to D9, the player's discouragement with respect to the end of the first specific state is appropriately reduced, and the end game of the first specific state is enjoyed. Will be possible.

Feature D11. In the case where the second status is reached during execution of the variable acceptance control for establishment, it is possible to continue the variable acceptance control being executed even after the second status is achieved.
The second specific state is a state that can be executed after the remaining switching control in the variable reception control that is being executed becomes the second situation,
The gaming machine according to Feature D10, wherein the continuation period is a period in which the remaining switching control can be executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably create the second specific state that is more advantageous than the normal game state and is more disadvantageous than the first specific state, and is a practically preferable mode for realizing the configuration of the characteristic D10. Can be

Feature D12. A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger (ball entry into the second working opening 34) (function for executing a win/fail judgment by the main controller 81);
When the result of the lottery process is a predetermined specific result (big hit result), a first shift means (main control) for shifting to a special game state (big hit game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (A function of executing a transition process to a jackpot gaming state by the device 81),
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a first specific state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
It is provided with a second transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the jackpot game by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning to the first specific state after the end of the special game state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the high frequency support mode ends in the middle of the character opening/closing game), the second specific state after the end of the first specific state (the character opening/closing game continues even after the end of the high frequency support mode) It is a configuration that can be a continuous state),
The second specific state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific state,
When the second specific state is reached after the end of the first specific state, a notification control unit (fourth implementation) that controls a predetermined notification unit (symbol display device 41) so that a specific notification (special effect) is executed. Gaming machine, which is provided with a function of executing special effect processing by the effect control device 82 in the form of.

In the above configuration, when the result of the grant determination is the result corresponding to the grant information, the game may shift to the special game state and then shift to the first specific state. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second specific state is established after the first specific state is completed. Although the second specific state is not as advantageous as the first specific state, it is more advantageous than the normal game state, so that it is a relief game for the player when the first specific state ends. Further, in the present configuration, when the second specific state is reached after the end of the first specific state, the specific notification is performed, so that the player can understand that the second specific state will occur due to the notification. As a result, even in a situation where the first specific state is likely to end, it is possible to enter the game with a sense of expectation for the subsequent development, and it is possible to enjoy the game even in the final stage of the first specific state. Become.

Note that it is possible to apply each configuration described in any one of the features D2 to D11 to this feature. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the above features D1 to D12 is, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and the lottery result is a specific result, There is known one that shifts to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). There is still room for improvement in raising the degree of attention of the above.” The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

In addition, with respect to each of the configurations of the features D1 to D12, any one of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C15, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F17, and the features G1 to G9 is provided. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A ball entering portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part.
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a win/loss determination by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
Based on the fact that the grant determination means makes the grant determination, the variable display of the design is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means is displayed. A game time control means (a function for executing a special game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be executed in the (special view display portion 43),
When the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege (big hit game) to the player (transition to the jackpot gaming state by the main control device 81) Function to execute processing),
A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (the high-frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is established. First control means capable of executing (feature opening and closing game for high-frequency support mode) (function of executing general-purpose game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied (the situation where the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), before the variable acceptance control for the satisfaction. Second control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control (feature opening/closing game for low frequency support mode) for non-establishment in which it is difficult to receive a game ball in the entry ball section (executes a universal game state transition process by the main controller 81) Function),
Equipped with
When the second situation is changed from the first situation, after a predetermined period (final display time of the final game time) has passed since the second situation, the first game after the second situation It is a configuration that can start times,
When the second situation occurs during execution of the variable acceptance control for establishment, it is configured such that the variable acceptance control that is being executed can be continued even after the second situation.
In the mode of the variable acceptance control for the establishment, a specific mode in which the feasible period of the variable acceptance control is longer than the predetermined period (the second high winning a prize combination opening/closing game and the third high winning a prize of the fifth embodiment) Amusement machine opening and closing game) is included.

In the above configuration, the award determination is executed by the game ball entering the ball entering portion, and when the result of the award determination is the result corresponding to the award information, the bonus is awarded to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming to enter the ball entering portion in order to obtain a privilege. Further, in the above configuration, when the specific trigger is generated in the first situation where the specific condition is satisfied, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed, so that the first condition is satisfied while the specific condition is satisfied. , It becomes easy for a ball to enter the ball entrance portion. Therefore, it becomes easier to receive the above-mentioned grant determination, and the player can advantageously proceed with the game.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, it is possible to start the first game time after the second situation is reached after a predetermined period of time has passed since the second situation where the specific condition has not been established. It is composed. In this case, after the second situation is reached, a grace period (start waiting period) having the same length as the predetermined period is generated until the number of stored determination information items is decreased by one by the start of the first game time. be able to. Then, it is possible to execute the variable acceptance control for establishment across the time of switching from the first situation to the second situation (at the end of the first situation), and to implement the variable acceptance control for establishment. Includes a specific mode in which the feasible period is longer than a predetermined period (grace period). Therefore, if the execution timing of the variable acceptance control becomes the timing at which the variable acceptance control is executed over the end of the first situation, and if the specific aspect is performed as the aspect of the variable acceptance control at that time, After the start of the first game time, the remaining switching control of the variable acceptance control can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to generate a ball entering the ball entering portion in a state where the number of pieces of determination information stored has decreased, and it is possible to add determination information (and thus game times). As a result, it is possible to extend the state in which it is easy for the player to enter the ball entering portion until after the start of the first game, despite the fact that the condition for satisfying the specific condition has ended internally. Even after the end of one situation, it becomes possible for the player to continue playing with a sense of expectation.

Feature E2. The modes of the variable acceptance control for establishment include the first mode as the specific mode, and the second mode in which the feasible period is shorter than the predetermined period (the first high winning a prize product of the fifth embodiment). The opening and closing game) and the gaming machine according to the feature E1.

In the above-described configuration, the modes of the variable acceptance control for establishment include not only the first mode in which the feasible period is longer than the predetermined period but also the second mode in which the feasible period is shorter than the predetermined period. Therefore, even if the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed so as to cross over the end of the first situation, if the variable acceptance control is in the second mode, the variable acceptance control is performed before the start of the first game time. After that, the switching control does not occur after the start of the game. In other words, in order to be able to add the determination information, not only the execution timing of the variable acceptance control but also the type of variable acceptance control at that time is required, and the luck of the player is more strongly reflected. As a result, the player's sense of superiority and sense of accomplishment when the addition of the determination information can be achieved is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably enhance the interest.

Feature E3. A plurality of types of modes including at least the first mode and the second mode are provided as modes of the variable acceptance control for establishment.
The variable acceptance control means executes the variable acceptance control selected from the plurality of types of modes,
The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the second mode has a configuration that is more easily selected than the first mode.

In the above configuration, the second mode in which the feasible period of the variable acceptance control is shorter than the predetermined period is easier to implement than the first mode in which the feasible period of the variable acceptance control is longer than the predetermined period. The percentage of cases that cannot be added and ends will increase. As a result, it is possible to increase the value of the event that allows the addition of the determination information, and further enhance the player's sense of superiority and sense of achievement when the addition can be achieved.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to feature E2 or feature E3, wherein at least one mode of the switching control is different between the variable acceptance control of the first aspect and the variable acceptance control of the second aspect.

According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control is executed across the end of the first situation, the player is watching the movement of the variable acceptance means, so that the variable acceptance control being executed is in the first mode. It is possible to infer whether or not it is the second aspect. As a result, it is possible to add an interesting feature of estimating whether or not the determination information can be added from the behavior of the variable receiving means.

In addition, you may paraphrase "the aspect of at least 1 said switching control differs" of this characteristic "that the period which sets the said variable acceptance means to the said 1st state is different in at least 1 said switching control." Since the normal state of the variable receiving means is the second state, the first state, which is different from such a state, is conspicuous and is relatively easy for the player to notice. Therefore, as in the present configuration, by making the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state in at least one switching control different between the first mode and the second mode, the player can change the behavior of the variable receiving means. It becomes easier to notice. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of guessing and make the game easy to play regardless of the skill of the player.

Feature E5. In the case where the number of times of the switching control in the variable acceptance control of the second aspect is 1 and the number of times of the switching control in the variable acceptance control of the first aspect is a plurality of times, A mode of at least the first switching control in the variable acceptance control is different,
Alternatively, in both of the variable acceptance control of the first aspect and the second aspect, when the number of times of the switching control is a plurality of times, at least the first time of the switching control of the first aspect and the second aspect. The gaming machine according to feature E4, which is characterized by different aspects.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make a guess by looking at the variable acceptance means only at the beginning of the variable acceptance control, and it is not necessary to keep looking at the variable acceptance means until the end of the control, so the gaze on the variable acceptance means goes too far. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming conscious of the game times. In other words, the mode of the variable acceptance control is inferred from the behavior of the variable acceptance means while favorably achieving compatibility with the game that enjoys the game times (the game in which the stop result corresponding to the imparted information is stopped and displayed leads to the award of a privilege). It is possible to add interestingness.

Feature E6. A passing portion (through gate 35) which is provided in the game area and through which a game ball can pass,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery process based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the passage portion (function for executing the universal figure win/loss lottery by the main control device 81),
Based on the fact that the lottery process is performed by the lottery means, the variable display of the second pattern is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process is stopped and displayed as one of the second game times. Second game time control means (a function of executing general-purpose game time control processing by the main control device 81) for causing the second game time to be executed by a predetermined display means or a display means different from it.
Equipped with
The specific trigger is that the result of the lottery process is a predetermined result (opening result),
The second game time control means stops the stop result in a different display mode when the variable acceptance control of the first aspect is executed and when the variable acceptance control of the second aspect is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E5 characterized by displaying.

In the above configuration, the second game time that triggers the variable acceptance control is executed, and in the second game time, the variable acceptance control of the first aspect is executed and the variable acceptance control of the second aspect is executed. In this case, the stop result having a different display mode is stopped and displayed. For example, even if the variable acceptance control of the second aspect is actually executed or the variable acceptance control is not executed, an illegal act is performed so that the variable acceptance control of the first aspect is executed. If it is found out, the employee in the game hall can detect the misconduct by checking the situation of the second game time and the stop result thereof. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Feature E7. The number of times of the switching control in the variable acceptance control of the specific aspect is a plurality of times,
In the variable acceptance control of the specific mode, after the variable acceptance means is switched from the first state to the second state by the switching control, the variable acceptance means is changed to the first state by the next switching control. A state in which the variable receiving means is in the second state for a standby period at least once before switching from the second state to the first state,
At least one of the waiting period is a length equal to or less than twice the cycle of the game balls being fired by the shooting means.

The variable acceptance control of the second aspect may be performed not only in the final stage of the first situation but also in the early stages and the middle stages. In such a situation, the length of the waiting period is less than or equal to twice the firing cycle of the game ball, so that two game balls continuously enter the ball entering portion during the waiting period of the variable acceptance control of the second aspect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of events that do not enter the ball. As a result, even if the variable acceptance control of the second mode is executed while the specific condition is satisfied, the number of stored determination information items (holding number) is prevented from becoming 0 or suddenly decreasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the original game play in the first situation in which a ball is likely to enter the ball entrance portion.

In addition, in this feature, a feature that "a payout unit (payout device 96 and payout control device 97) capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on a ball entering the ball entering portion is provided" is further provided. You may prepare. In this case, even when the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is performed in the situation where the specific condition is satisfied, the game balls are paid out to a certain extent, and it is possible to preferably suppress the reduction of the balls held. ..

Feature E8. As the specific mode, a first specific mode (second high winning prize opening/closing game) and a second specific mode (third high winning prize opening/closing game) in which the feasible period is different from the first specific mode The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, which is provided with a plurality of types of modes including.

In the above configuration, in a situation where the variable acceptance control continues even after the first game time after the second situation is started, at that time, the variable acceptance control being performed is the first specific mode, Alternatively, depending on whether it is the second specific mode, the duration of the variable acceptance control after the start can be different. As a result, it is possible to cause a difference in the number of pieces of determination information that can be added, and to make the degree of advantage different.

Feature E9. The gaming machine according to feature E8, wherein at least one mode of the switching control differs between the variable acceptance control of the first specific aspect and the variable acceptance control of the second specific aspect.

It is possible to add the fun of inferring from the behavior of the variable receiving means whether it is the variable acceptance control of the first specific aspect or the variable acceptance control of the second specific aspect.

Feature E10. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the predetermined period is a stop display period (fixed display time) of the stop result in the final game time in the first situation.

According to the above configuration, since the ending process of the first situation (the process of changing the specific condition from the established state to the unestablished state) can be performed in synchronization with the process of starting the stop display of the pattern, the control process is simple. Can be In addition, it is easier for the player to understand the ending timing of the first situation as compared with the case where the first situation ends during the variable display or the stop display during the game. Such an advantage is particularly advantageous in each of the configurations of the above-mentioned features E1 to E9 in which an advantageous state is created by using the variable acceptance control over the end of the first situation.

Feature E11. When a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the ball-in portion during execution of the variable acceptance control, variable acceptance control ending means for terminating the variable acceptance control (accessory opening/closing process by main controller 81) The game machine according to any one of the features E1 to E10, which is characterized in that it has a function of executing.

According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control can be continued even after the start of the first game time, how long the variable acceptance control is continued varies depending on the entry situation of the game ball into the entry portion. Therefore, it is possible to change the length of the continuation period depending on the shooting situation of the game ball, and it is possible to make a difference in the number of additional pieces of determination information. As a result, the player is provided with fun and ingenuity in how to play the game, and the interest and the degree of concentration on the game are suitably increased.

Feature E12. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E11, wherein the variable acceptance control is configured to be able to be executed asynchronously with the game times.

According to the above configuration, for example, it is impossible to adjust the start timing of the variable acceptance control by adjusting the entry timing to the entry portion, so the variable acceptance control is intentionally started at an advantageous timing. It will not be possible to do so. As a result, whether the variable acceptance control is executed over the end of the first situation, or whether the variable acceptance control is started at a timing when the duration after the start of the first game time is longer is determined by the player. It is entrusted to luck, and it becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the game among the players.

Feature E13. Whether the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation or the start timing of the first game time, the switching timing or the first game Grasping means to grasp before the start timing of the time,
Notification control means for causing a predetermined notification to be executed before the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time based on the grasping result of the grasping means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E12, which is characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, depending on whether or not the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation or the start timing of the first game time after the second situation. The predetermined notification is executed before the switching timing. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to know in advance whether or not the variable acceptance control is switched and executed across timings, and the second situation is a state in which a ball is likely to enter the ball entry part. A game that can be extended until after the start of the first game time after playing can be suitably excited.

Feature E14. The notification control means, when the variable acceptance control for the establishment is executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time, the predetermined notification is executed, or the switching timing or the The gaming machine according to feature E13, wherein the predetermined notification is executed more easily than when the variable acceptance control for establishment is not executed over the start timing of the first game time.

According to the above configuration, the player knows in advance that the variable acceptance control will be executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time after the second situation by the execution of the predetermined notification. Will be possible. As a result, the player's expectation that the predetermined notification is given is aroused, and as a result, the player's attention to whether or not the notification is given is increased, and the switching timing or the first game time It is possible to suitably excite the game before the start timing.

Feature E15. The grasping means grasps, when the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is executed, whether or not the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time. The gaming machine according to the feature E13 or the feature E14, which is provided with a means for performing.

In the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is executed, it is grasped whether or not the variable acceptance control is executed over the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time, and depending on the result. The predetermined notification is given. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to know in advance whether or not a ball can be inserted into the ball entering portion after the start of the first game time after the second situation is reached, and the switching timing or the first The game before the start timing of the game times can be suitably excited.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature E14, "If the notification control means executes the variable acceptance control of the specific aspect across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time, The predetermined notification is executed, or the predetermined notification is executed more easily than when the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is not executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time. Yes, there is.

Feature E16. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A ball entering portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part.
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a win/loss determination by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
Based on the fact that the grant determination means makes the grant determination, the variable display of the design is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means is displayed. A game time control means (a function for executing a special game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be executed in the (special view display portion 43),
When the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege (big hit game) to the player (to the jackpot gaming state by the main control device 81) Function that executes the migration process),
A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (the high-frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is established. First control means capable of executing (feature opening and closing game for high-frequency support mode) (function of executing general-purpose game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied (the situation where the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), before the variable acceptance control for the satisfaction. Second control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control (feature opening/closing game for low frequency support mode) for non-establishment in which it is difficult to receive a game ball in the entry ball section (executes a universal game state transition process by the main controller 81) Function),
Equipped with
When the second situation occurs during execution of the variable acceptance control for establishment, it is configured such that the variable acceptance control that is being executed can be continued even after the second situation.
In the aspect of the variable acceptance control for the establishment, a specific aspect in which the feasible period of the variable acceptance control is longer than the stop display period of the stop result in the final game time in the first situation (fifth embodiment) A second high-prize winning combination opening/closing game and a third high-winning winning combination opening/closing game).

In the above configuration, the award determination is executed by the game ball entering the ball entering portion, and when the result of the award determination is the result corresponding to the award information, the bonus is awarded to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming to enter the ball entering portion in order to obtain a privilege. Further, in the above configuration, when the specific trigger is generated in the first situation where the specific condition is satisfied, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed, so that the first condition is satisfied while the specific condition is satisfied. , It becomes easy for a ball to enter the ball entrance portion. Therefore, it becomes easier to receive the above-mentioned grant determination, and the player can advantageously proceed with the game.

With such a configuration, in this feature, the variable acceptance control for establishment can be executed across the time of switching from the first situation to the second situation (at the end of the first situation), and the variable acceptance control can be executed. The specific mode includes a specific mode whose executable period is longer than the stop display period of the final game time under the first situation. In this case, if the execution timing of the variable acceptance control is the timing at which the variable acceptance control is executed over the end of the first situation, and if the above-described specific aspect is performed as the aspect of the variable acceptance control at that time, After the start of the first game time after the end of the second game state, the remaining switching control of the variable acceptance control can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to generate a ball entering the ball entering portion in a state where the number of pieces of determination information stored has decreased, and it is possible to add determination information (and thus game times). As a result, it is possible to extend the state in which it is easy for the player to enter the ball entering portion until after the start of the first game, despite the fact that the condition for satisfying the specific condition has ended internally. It becomes possible for the player to enjoy the end game in one situation.

It is possible to apply each configuration described in any one of the features E2 to E15 to this feature. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying these configurations.

The inventions described in the above features E1 to E16 are as follows. "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a ball entering portion into which a game ball can enter and a ball entering the ball portion can be easily or easily accepted. There is known one provided with a first state and a variable receiving means capable of switching the game ball to a second state in which the game ball cannot be received or is hard to be received (see, for example, JP 2004-81853 A). The background art "." has been made with the problem to be solved by the invention "Here, there is still room for improvement in increasing the degree of attention to games in gaming machines."

With respect to each of the configurations of the above features E1 to E16, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D12, the features F1 to F15, and the features G1 to G9 is provided. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A ball entering portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part.
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a win/loss determination by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
Based on the fact that the grant determination means makes the grant determination, the variable display of the design is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means is displayed. A game time control means (a function for executing a special game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be executed in the (special view display portion 43),
When the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege (big hit game) to the player (transition to the jackpot gaming state by the main control device 81) Function to execute processing),
A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (the high-frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is established. First control means capable of executing (feature opening and closing game for high-frequency support mode) (function of executing general-purpose game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied (the situation where the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), before the variable acceptance control for the satisfaction. Second control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control (feature opening/closing game for low frequency support mode) for non-establishment in which it is difficult to receive a game ball in the entry ball section (executes a universal game state transition process by the main controller 81) Function),
Equipped with
When the second situation occurs during execution of the variable acceptance control for establishment, it is configured such that the variable acceptance control that is being executed can be continued even after the second situation.
When the second situation is changed from the first situation, after a predetermined period (final display time of the final game time) has passed since the second situation, the first game after the second situation It is a configuration that can start times,
A period setting means for setting the predetermined period (a function for executing the special figure confirmation display process by the main control device 81 of the sixth embodiment),
The period setting means,
First means for setting a relatively short first period (confirmed display time of 4.5 sec) as the predetermined period;
Second means for setting a second period having a relatively long length (confirmed display time of 15 sec) as the predetermined period;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, the award determination is executed by the game ball entering the ball entering portion, and when the result of the award determination is the result corresponding to the award information, the bonus is awarded to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming to enter the ball entering portion in order to obtain a privilege. Further, in the above configuration, when the specific trigger is generated in the first situation where the specific condition is satisfied, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed, so that the first condition is satisfied while the specific condition is satisfied. , It becomes easy for a ball to enter the ball entrance portion. Therefore, it becomes easier to receive the above-mentioned grant determination, and the player can advantageously proceed with the game.

Under such a configuration, in the present feature, it is possible to start the first game time after the second situation is reached after a predetermined period has passed since the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied. It is composed. In this case, after the second situation is reached, a grace period (start waiting period) having the same length as the predetermined period is generated until the number of stored determination information items is reduced by 1 by the start of the first game time. be able to. Then, the variable acceptance control for establishment can be executed across the time of switching from the first situation to the second situation (at the end of the first situation), and the predetermined period (grace period) can be extended. Can be a short first period or a long second period. In this case, in relation to the length of the predetermined period, whether or not the variable acceptance control is continued until after the start of the first game time, and the length of the continuation period when it is continued may vary. For example, if the variable acceptance control is continued even after the start of the first game, it is possible to cause the ball to enter the ball entering portion with the number of pieces of determination information stored reduced, and the determination information ( It is possible to add game times). As a result, it is possible to extend the state in which it is easy for the player to enter the ball entering portion until after the start of the first game, despite the fact that the condition for satisfying the specific condition has ended internally. Even after the end of one situation, the player can play with a sense of expectation.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the period setting means is more likely to set the second period as the predetermined period than the first period.

In the above configuration, the second period is easier to set as the predetermined period than the first period, so that the ratio of cases in which the determination information cannot be added and ends is high. As a result, it is possible to increase the value of the event that allows the addition of the determination information, and enhance the player's sense of accomplishment and happiness when the addition can be achieved.

Feature F3. The mode of the variable acceptance control for the establishment includes a specific mode having a feasible period of a specific length (12 sec) (third high winning prize object opening/closing game),
The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or the feature F2, wherein the first period is shorter than the executable period of the specific mode, and the second period is longer than the executable period of the specific mode. ..

According to this configuration, if the predetermined period is the first period, the variable acceptance control can be continued until after the start of the first game time, and if it is the second period, the variable acceptance control cannot be continued. It becomes possible to suitably exhibit the above-mentioned effects of F2.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the period setting means sets the predetermined period regardless of the number of pieces of the determination information stored in the information storage means.

For example, in a configuration in which the first period is set as the predetermined period or the first period is more easily set than the second period in response to the number of stored determination information items being equal to or greater than a certain number, the number of stored items is increased. When an action is performed, not only the illegal acquisition of the determination information (game times) but also the advantage of the illegal game due to the setting of the first period will be realized in cooperation with the illegal action. I have a concern. In this respect, in this configuration, the predetermined period is set regardless of the number of memories, so even if a fraudulent act of increasing the number of memories is performed, the influence thereof can be prevented from reaching the length of the predetermined period. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the predetermined period is a stop display period (fixed display time) of the stop result in the final game time in the first situation.

According to the above configuration, since the ending process of the first situation (the process of changing the specific condition from the established state to the unestablished state) can be performed in synchronization with the process of starting the stop display of the pattern, the control process is simple. Can be Further, the player can easily understand the ending timing of the first situation as compared with the case where the first situation ends during the variable display or the stop display during the game. Such an advantage is particularly beneficial in each of the configurations of the above-mentioned features F1 to F4 that create an advantageous state by utilizing the variable acceptance control over the end of the first situation.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the stop display period of the final game time is longer than the stop display period of each game time other than the final game time in the first situation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the stop display of the final game time, which is a preferable mode for realizing the configuration of the characteristic F5.

Note that this feature can also be expressed as "the first period is longer than the stop display period of each game time other than the last game time in the first situation". In this case, even the first period on the short side is longer than the stop display period of the other game times, so that the player can be appropriately focused on the stop display of the final game time.

Feature F7. Another display means (symbol display device 41) different from the predetermined display means and having a display area larger than the predetermined display means,
After changing the display of the separate display means, the stop result corresponding to or not corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is fixedly displayed. A display control means for controlling the separate display means (a function for executing special figure variation display control processing by the effect control device 82);
Equipped with
When the stop display for the first period is performed in the final game time, the display control means starts the stop display by the predetermined display means after the temporary stop display is started by the separate display means. The gaming machine according to the feature F5 or the feature F6, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a means for making the period until it is longer than that when the stop display of the second period is performed.

In the above configuration, where it is assumed that the player plays the game by paying attention to the different display means which is conspicuous, the stop display of the final game time is displayed in the first display period (shorter advantageous side period) on the predetermined display means. In such a case, the separate display means starts the temporary stop display earlier to lengthen the temporary stop display period, and it is as if the second display period (longer disadvantageous side) is displayed. Is given to the player. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the disadvantageous stop display period was selected, and then to add the determination information. As a result, the player's surprise and delight can be suitably aroused, and the interest can be improved.

Feature F8. A period information storage unit (variable display time) that stores period information (variable pattern information) corresponding to the variable display period and the stop display period of the pattern displayed on the predetermined display unit as a period information group (variable display time table). Table storage area 113c)
The period setting means selects the variable display period and the stop display period of each game time based on selecting one of the period information from the period information group (special figure game by the main control device 81 A function of executing a time control process), and sets the stop display period selected by the selecting means in the final game time as the stop display period of the final game time. The game machine according to any one.

In the above configuration, the stop display period can be selected together with the selection of the variable display period, and the number of processing steps can be reduced as compared with the case where the display periods are individually selected. Therefore, it is possible to realize each of the configurations of the features F1 to F7 while suppressing an increase in the load of the control process and a complication of the process configuration.

Feature F9. A period information storage means for storing period information corresponding to the stop display period of the stop result as a period information group,
The period setting means selects the stop display period of the final game time based on the period information group, and makes the selection when the final game time is started. F5 The gaming machine according to any one of to F8.

In the above configuration, since the stop display period is set with a sufficient margin with respect to the start timing of the stop display, for example, the effect according to the selected stop display period is performed before the start of the stop display of the final game time. It will be possible. That is, it is possible to adopt a configuration suitable for securing the presentation time.

Feature F10. A first ball entering portion as the ball entering portion;
A second ball-in portion (first operating port 33) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Equipped with
The information acquisition means acquires the information for determination based on a game ball entering the first ball entering portion or the second ball entering portion,
The variable receiving means is provided corresponding to the first ball receiving portion,
The period setting means,
One period selected from a plurality of periods of different lengths (15 sec, 9 sec, and 4.5 sec confirmed display time) including the first period and the second period is set as the predetermined period. ,
And means for changing the selection mode of the predetermined period according to the game result of the game times (kind of the stop result of the first special figure) that triggered the transition to the first situation (of the seventh embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a variable display time table B1 and a variable display time table B2).

In the above configuration, by changing the selection mode of the length of the predetermined period, whether or not the determination information can be added and the number of additions are changed in the game after the second situation, and the addition is possible. It is possible to create a special state in which the degree of expectation for Then, since such switching of the selection mode is performed according to the game result of the game times that has triggered the transition to the first situation, the player has a strong sense of expectation for such a special state. You can play the game times before moving to the first situation. That is, according to the present configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game before the transition to the first situation as well as the game at the end of the first situation or after the end.

Feature F11. If the determination result of the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that corresponds to the grant information, the game time control means determines a grant result stop result corresponding to the grant correspondence result as the stop result (seventh embodiment). The stop result SD0 to SD11) of the embodiment of FIG.
The gaming machine according to Feature F10, characterized in that the game result is a type of the stop result corresponding to the addition.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the special state is achieved is determined according to the type of the addition support stop result when the addition support result is obtained. As a result, the game result of the game before the transition to the first situation and the switching of the selection mode of the period after the transition to the first situation can be appropriately associated, and the type of the player corresponding to the special state It is possible to favorably realize the game playability in which the game before the transition to the first situation can be performed in the expectation that the result of the assignment-corresponding stop will be stopped and displayed.

Feature F12. When the game result is a first result (stop result SD0 to SD5), the period setting means sets the first period as the predetermined period, or the game result is different from the first result. A means (variation display time table B1 and variation display time table B2 according to the seventh embodiment) for facilitating the setting of the first period is provided as compared with the result (stop results SD6 to SD11). The gaming machine according to feature F10 or feature F11, which is characterized in that

In the above configuration, when the predetermined period is the shorter first period, the variable acceptance control is more likely to continue even after the first game time after the end of the first situation is started, which is advantageous to the player. With the configuration of this feature, it is possible to preferably exert the above-described effects of the feature F10 or the feature F11.

Feature F13. A period information storage unit that stores period information corresponding to a plurality of periods having different lengths as a period information group,
The period information group includes a plurality of period information groups including a first period information group (variable display time table B1) and a second period information group (variable display time table B2),
At least the period information corresponding to the first period is stored in the first period information group,
The period information corresponding to at least the second period is stored in the second period information group,
In the first period information group, the first period is more easily selected than in the second period information group,
When the game result is the first result (stop result SD0 to SD5), the period setting means sets the predetermined period based on the first period information group, and the game result is the first result. The game machine according to any one of features F10 to F12, wherein the predetermined period is set on the basis of the second period information group when the second results are different (stop results SD6 to SD11).

In the above configuration, the first period information group in which the first period (shorter advantageous side period) is relatively likely to be selected, and the second period (longer disadvantageous side period) is relatively likely to be selected, or the first period is A second period information group that is not selected is provided, and which of the period information groups is referred to is switched according to the type of game result. Thereby, the type of game result and the ease of selection in the first period can be associated with each other by a relatively simple processing configuration. That is, each of the features F10 to F12 can be realized while suppressing the load required for control and complication of the structure, and a practically preferable mode for realizing those structures.

In addition, when the feature F12 or the feature F13 is applied to the feature F11, the “game result”, the “first result”, and the “second result” are respectively the “grant corresponding stop result” and the “first grant corresponding stop result”. And can be expressed as “second provision corresponding suspension result”.

Feature F14. Whether the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation or the start timing of the first game time, the switching timing or the first game Grasping means to grasp before the start timing of the time,
Notification control means for causing a predetermined notification to be executed before the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time based on the grasping result of the grasping means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F13, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, depending on whether or not the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation or the start timing of the first game time after the second situation. The predetermined notification is executed before the switching timing. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to know in advance whether or not the variable acceptance control is switched and executed across timings, and the second situation is a state in which a ball is likely to enter the ball entry part. A game that can be extended until after the start of the first game time after playing can be suitably excited.

Feature F15. The notification control means, when the variable acceptance control for the establishment is executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time, the predetermined notification is executed, or the switching timing or the The gaming machine according to feature F14, wherein the predetermined notification is executed more easily than when the variable acceptance control for establishment is not executed across the start timing of the first game time.

According to the above configuration, the player knows in advance that the variable acceptance control will be executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time after the second situation by the execution of the predetermined notification. Will be possible. As a result, the player's expectation that the predetermined notification is given is aroused, and as a result, the player's attention to whether or not the notification is given is increased, and the switching timing or the first game time It is possible to suitably excite the game before the start timing.

Feature F16. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A ball entering portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part.
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a win/loss determination by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
Based on the fact that the grant determination means makes the grant determination, the variable display of the design is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means is displayed. A game time control means (a function for executing a special game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be executed in the (special view display portion 43),
When the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege (big hit game) to the player (to the jackpot gaming state by the main control device 81) Function that executes the migration process),
A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal electric power product 34a) that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (the high-frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is established. First control means capable of executing (feature opening and closing game for high-frequency support mode) (function of executing general-purpose game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied (the situation where the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114), before the variable acceptance control for the satisfaction. Second control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control (feature opening/closing game for low frequency support mode) for non-establishment in which it is difficult to receive a game ball in the entry ball section (executes a universal game state transition process by the main controller 81) Function),
Prepare,
When the second situation occurs during execution of the variable acceptance control for establishment, it is configured such that the variable acceptance control that is being executed can be continued even after the second situation.
When the second situation is changed from the first situation, after a predetermined period (final display time of the final game time) has passed since the second situation, the first game after the second situation It is a configuration that can start times,
A gaming machine provided with a variable means for changing the length of the predetermined period (a function for executing a special figure game time control process by the main controller 81 of the sixth embodiment).

According to the above-mentioned composition, the same operation effect as the above-mentioned feature F1 can be acquired. Note that it is possible to apply each configuration described in any one of the features F2 to F15 to this feature. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying these configurations.

Feature F17. A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger (ball entry into the second working opening 34) (function for executing a win/fail judgment by the main controller 81);
Based on the fact that the lottery means performs the lottery process, the variable display of the picture is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process is stopped and displayed as one game time, and a predetermined display means ( A game time control means (a function for executing special figure game time control processing by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be executed on the special figure display portion 43),
When the result of the lottery process is a predetermined specific result (big hit result), a first shift means (main control) for shifting to a special game state (big hit game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (A function of executing a transition process to a jackpot gaming state by the device 81),
Period information storage means (variable display time table storage area 113c of ROM 113) for storing period information (variation pattern information) corresponding to the stop display period of the stop result as a period information group (variation display time table);
Equipped with
The game time control means includes a selection means (a function of executing special figure game time control processing by the main control device 81) for selecting the stop display period of each game time based on the period information group, and the selection means. The stop display of the stop result is performed in the stop display period of the length selected by
As a game state, it has a specific game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and is different from the special game state,
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a big hit that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs), a second transition unit (by the main control device 81) that transitions to the specific game state after the special game state ends Function to execute the transition process at the end of the jackpot game),
Specific means capable of varying the degree of advantage of the player with respect to the game after the specific game state is ended, depending on the length of the stop display period of the final game times in the specific game state (the executable period is 12 sec. 15 sec, 9 sec, 4.5 sec fixed display time can be selected for a certain third high winning a prize game),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when the result of the lottery process is the specific result, the game state shifts to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and when the first condition is satisfied, the special game state ends The game state shifts to a specific game state that is different from the game state and is advantageous to the player. That is, the specific game state is not necessarily transferred after the special game state ends, and the first condition is required to be satisfied as the transition condition. Therefore, when shifting to the specific game state, the player has a great sense of expectation for the game in the game state. And, in such a specific game state, the fact that the game has advanced to the final game time is the situation immediately before the end of the specific game state. In such a case, the player ends the specific game state. It is assumed that you are pessimistic about that, and it is hard to say that you are enjoying the game. In this respect, according to this feature, since the degree of advantage of the game thereafter changes depending on the length of the stop display period of the last game time, you can enjoy what kind of length is selected, and the advantageous length. You can play with the expectation that will be selected. Therefore, it becomes possible to entertain the player in the final game in the specific game state.

Note that it is possible to apply each configuration described in any of the features F1 to F16 to this feature. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the above-mentioned features F1 to F17 is, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a ball-entering portion into which a game ball can enter, and a ball-receiving portion can accept or easily accept the game ball. There is known one provided with a first state and a variable receiving means capable of switching the game ball to a second state in which the game ball cannot be received or is hard to be received (see, for example, JP 2004-81853 A). The background art "." has been made with the problem to be solved by the invention "Here, there is still room for improvement in increasing the degree of attention to games in gaming machines."

In addition, with respect to each of the configurations of the features F1 to F17, any one of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E16, and the features G1 to G9 is provided. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A first ball entering portion (second operating port 34) and a second ball entering portion (first operating port 33), which are provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering part or the second ball entering part. ,
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
Transfer determination means for performing a transfer determination of whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the transfer correspondence information (a function for executing a success/failure determination by the main control device 81),
Based on the fact that the shift determination means makes the shift determination, the variable display of the pattern is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the shift determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means A game time control means (a function for executing a special figure game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be executed on the (special figure display portion 43),
When the result of the shift determination is a shift correspondence result that corresponds to the shift correspondence information, first shift means for shifting to a special game state (big hit game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (A function of executing a process of shifting to the jackpot gaming state by the main control device 81),
Second transition means (main control) capable of shifting to a specific game state (high-frequency support mode) in which a ball entering the first ball entering portion is more likely to occur than in the normal game state after the special game state ends. A function for executing the transition process at the end of the jackpot game by the device 81),
Equipped with
When the result of the shift determination is the shift correspondence result, the game time control means, as the stop result, the shift correspondence stop result corresponding to the shift correspondence result (stop results SD0 to SD11 of the seventh embodiment). Is configured to stop
Depending on the type of the transition support stop result when the transition determination result is the transition support result, the player in the game after the specific game state after the special game state corresponding to the transition support result ends A gaming machine provided with a specifying means (variation display time table B1 and variation display time table B2 of the seventh embodiment) capable of varying the degree of advantage.

In the above configuration, when the result of the shift determination is the shift correspondence result, the game state shifts to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and then a ball is likely to enter the first ball entering portion. There may be a transition to a specific game state. In such a configuration, in this feature, the degree of advantage of the game after the specific game state ends is changed depending on the type of the transition corresponding stop result that is stopped and displayed in the case of the transition corresponding result. As a result, the player not only displays the transition corresponding stop result as the stop result at the game times but also displays the type of transition corresponding stop result in which the game after the specific game state is advantageous. You can play with the expectation, and your interest will improve. Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the type of the transition corresponding stop result is only related to the degree of advantage of the special gaming state or the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state. In this feature, the type of the transition corresponding stop result is the specific gaming state. This will affect the degree of advantage of the game after the end of, and it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel game property. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to favorably increase the game motivation and the degree of attention to the game.

In this feature, "a specific game state in which the first ball entering portion is more likely to occur than in the normal game state" is "a player is more advantageous than the normal game state in the special game state". It can also be expressed as "a specific game state different from the state".

Features G2. When the migration support stop result is a first migration support stop result (stop results SD0 to SD5), the identifying unit determines that the transfer support stop result is different from the first migration support stop result. Characteristic G1 characterized in that the game after the specific game state is finished becomes advantageous or easy to be advantageous to the player than in the case of (stop results SD6 to SD11). Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, the first transition support stop result is stopped and displayed as the transition support stop result, so that the player can proceed with the game after the end of the specific game state in an advantageous situation, or there is a possibility of that. It can be predicted to be high in advance. Therefore, the special game state and the specific game state can be digested with excitement, and the expectation for the game after the end of the specific game state can be suitably increased.

Features G3. Another display means (symbol display device 41) different from the predetermined display means and having a display area larger than the predetermined display means,
After changing the display of the separate display means, the stop result corresponding to or not corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is fixedly displayed. A display control means for controlling the separate display means (a function for executing special figure variation display control processing by the effect control device 82);
Equipped with
The display control means, in the separate display means, when the transition corresponding stop result stopped and displayed at the game time is the first transition corresponding stop result and the second transition corresponding stop result. The gaming machine described in the feature G2, which is provided with a means (a function of executing special figure variation display control processing by the effect control device 82) for temporarily stopping or confirming the same stop result.

In the above configuration, it is assumed that the player plays the game by paying attention to the different display means which is easily noticeable. When the first transition corresponding stop result is stopped and displayed on the predetermined display means and the second transition corresponding stop result is displayed. The same stop result is displayed as a stop (temporary stop display or confirmation display) by a separate display means. As a result, the player cannot distinguish whether or not the game after the end of the specific game state is advantageous from the contents of the stop display, and enjoy the game by estimating the expansion after the specific game state. It will be possible.

Features G4. A first state, which is provided corresponding to the first ball entering portion, is capable of receiving or is easy to receive a game ball in the ball receiving portion, and is incapable of receiving a game ball in the ball receiving portion or is more difficult to receive than the first state A variable receiving means (universal servant 34a) capable of switching to the second state;
Based on a predetermined specific trigger (the opening result is obtained in the universal figure win/loss drawing), the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Variable reception control means for executing variable reception control (accessory opening/closing game) in which opening/closing control is executed at least once (function for executing general/university game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The specific game state ends when the stop display of the final game times of the specific game state is started,
The game time control means is provided with a period selection means (function of executing special figure variation start processing by the main control device 81) for selecting a stop display period (confirmed display time) for stop display of the stop result, and the period selection means. The stop display is performed in the stop display period selected by
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the specifying means makes the selection mode of the stop display period in the period selecting means different depending on the type of the transition corresponding stop result. ..

In the above configuration, since the specific game state ends at the start of the stop display at the final game time of the specific game state, the number of stored determination information is 1 by the start of the first game time after the end of the specific game state. A grace period of the same length as the stop indication period can be generated before it is reduced. In this case, if the variable acceptance control started during the specific game state is executed over the grace period, the switching control can be generated after the start of the first game time, and the determination information can be added. It will be possible. Since the length of the grace period (stop display time) can be made different depending on the type of the transition support stop result, whether or not the determination information can be added and the number of additions can be changed. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of the game after the end of the specific game state, and it is possible to preferably realize each of the configurations of the features G1 to G3.

Features G5. As the stop display period selectable by the period selection means, a relatively short first period (4.5 sec confirmed display time) and a relatively long second period (15 sec confirmed). Display time) and
When the migration support stop result is a first migration support stop result (stop results SD0 to SD5), the specifying unit selects the first period by the period selecting unit, or the transfer support stop result is The first period is more likely to be selected by the period selecting means than when the second transition corresponding stop result (stop result SD6 to SD11) is different from the first shift corresponding stop result. The gaming machine described in the feature G4.

In the above-described configuration, the shorter stop display period is the first period, which makes it easier for the variable acceptance control to continue even after the first game time after the end of the specific game state is started, which is advantageous to the player. However, by adopting the configuration of this feature, it is possible to preferably exert the above effects of the above feature G4.

Features G6. A period information storage unit (variable display time table storage area 113c) that stores period information (variation pattern information) corresponding to a plurality of periods having different lengths as a period information group (variation display time table),
The period information group includes a plurality of period information groups including a first period information group (variable display time table B1) and a second period information group (variable display time table B2),
In the first period information group, at least the period information corresponding to a relatively short first period (fixed display time of 4.5 sec) is stored,
In the second period information group, at least the period information corresponding to a relatively long second period (confirmed display time of 15 sec) is stored,
In the first period information group, the first period is more easily selected than in the second period information group,
When the migration support stop result is a first transfer support stop result, the specifying unit selects a period based on the first period information group by the period selection unit, and the transfer support stop result is the first A characteristic G4 characterized in that, in the case of a second transition support stop result different from the transition support stop result, the period selecting means selects a period based on the second period information group. Alternatively, the gaming machine described in the feature G5.

In the above configuration, the first period information group in which the first period (shorter advantageous side period) is relatively likely to be selected, and the second period (longer disadvantageous side period) is relatively likely to be selected, or the first period is The second period information group that is not selected is provided, and which of the period information groups is referred to is switched according to the type of the transition support stop result. With this, with a relatively simple processing configuration, it is possible to associate the type of the transition-compatible stop result with the ease of selecting the first period as the stop display period. That is, it is possible to realize each configuration of the characteristic G4 or the characteristic G5 while suppressing the load required for the control processing and the complication of the configuration, and it is possible to provide a practically preferable mode for realizing those configurations. ..

Features G7. Any of the characteristics G1 to G6 characterized in that even if the game after the specific game state is finished by the specific means is advantageous, it is disadvantageous to the player over the specific game state. A game machine described in Crab.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the game after the specific game state is over from being excessively advantageous, and position the game as a bonus game after the specific game state is over. As a result, the superiority of the specific game state is secured, and it is possible to preferably suppress the reduction or disappearance of the significance of providing the specific game state.

Features G8. A means for varying the degree of advantage of the player in the special game state corresponding to the transition correspondence result depending on the type of the transition correspondence stop result when the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, The gaming machine according to any one of characteristic features G1 to G7.

According to the above configuration, the type of the transition support stop result affects the degree of advantage of the special game state, so that the importance of the transition support stop result displayed as a stop can be increased. As a result, it is possible to strongly evoke the expectation that the transition support stop result, which is advantageous to the player, will be displayed, and it is possible to suitably enhance the interest.

Note that, instead of or in addition to this feature, "the specification after the special gaming state corresponding to the transition correspondence result is determined depending on the type of the transition correspondence stop result when the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result. And a means for varying the degree of advantage of the player in the gaming state".

Features G9. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation,
A first ball entering portion (second operating port 34) and a second ball entering portion (first operating port 33), which are provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the winning process for the working opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring the determination information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering part or the second ball entering part. ,
An information storage unit (reserved sphere storage area 114b) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as a predetermined upper limit;
Transfer determination means for performing a transfer determination of whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the transfer correspondence information (a function for executing a success/failure determination by the main control device 81),
Based on the fact that the shift determination means makes the shift determination, the variable display of the pattern is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the shift determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means A game time control means (a function for executing a special figure game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be executed on the (special figure display portion 43),
When the result of the shift determination is a shift correspondence result that corresponds to the shift correspondence information, first shift means for shifting to a special game state (big hit game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (A function of executing a process of shifting to the jackpot gaming state by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
As a game state, it has a specific game state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and is different from the special game state,
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a big hit that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs), a second transition unit (by the main control device 81) that transitions to the specific game state after the special game state ends Equipped with a function to execute the transition process at the end of the jackpot game,
When the result of the shift determination is the shift correspondence result, the game time control means, as the stop result, the shift correspondence stop result corresponding to the shift correspondence result (stop results SD0 to SD11 of the seventh embodiment). Is configured to stop
After a lapse of a predetermined period (final display time of the final game time) from the end of the specific game state, it is possible to start the first game time after the end of the specific game state,
One of a plurality of periods including a relatively short first period (4.5 sec confirmed display time) and a relatively long second period (15 sec confirmed display time). A period setting means for setting the predetermined period (function of executing the special figure fluctuation start process and the special figure confirmation display process by the main control device 81),
The period setting means sets the first period as the predetermined period when the transition support stop result is a first transition support stop result (stop results SD0 to SD5), or the transition support stop result is Means for facilitating the setting of the first period as the predetermined period as compared with the case of the second transition corresponding stop result (stop results SD6 to SD11) different from the first transition corresponding stop result (seventh implementation A variation display time table B1 and a variation display time table B2).

According to the above-mentioned composition, the same operation effect as the above-mentioned feature G1 can be produced. Note that it is possible to apply each configuration described in any of the above features G1 to G8 to this feature. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the above characteristics G1 to G9 is, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger and the lottery result is a specific result, There is known one that shifts to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). There is still room for improvement in raising the degree of attention of the above.” The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

In addition, with respect to each configuration of the above features G1 to G9, any one of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E16, and the features F1 to F17 is provided. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of the other characteristic groups A to G to the respective configurations of the characteristic groups A to G described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating machine game machines such as slot machines: Variable display means for displaying the final stop of the symbol row after variable display of the symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and the variation of the symbol starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating device for stop or after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a special game advantageous to the player on condition that the final symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type gaming machine using a ball: Variable display means for displaying the final stop of the symbol row after variably displaying the symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, and stopped. Due to the operation of the operation means or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game state advantageous to the player (bonus) as a necessary condition that the final stopped symbol at that time is a specific symbol. A loading device that is configured to generate a game or the like) and further includes a ball tray to perform a loading process for loading a game ball from the ball tray, and a dispensing device that dispenses the game ball to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown in.

10... Pachinko machine, 34... 2nd actuation port, 34a... General electric object, 43... Special figure display part, 44... General figure display part, 53... Game ball launching mechanism, 81... Main control device, 82... Performance control device, 96... Dispensing device, 97... Dispensing control device, PE... Game area.

Claims (7)

Launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launching operation,
A ball entering portion provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
An information storage unit that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number set in advance as an upper limit;
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage unit corresponds to the assignment information,
Based on the fact that the grant determination means makes the grant determination, the variable display of the design is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one game time, and the predetermined display means is displayed. A game time control means for causing the game time to be executed in
When the determination result of the grant determination means is a result corresponding to the grant information, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to the player,
A first state, which is provided corresponding to the ball-in portion, is capable of receiving or easy to receive a game ball in the ball-in portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received in the ball-inlet portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means that can be switched to the state,
Based on a predetermined specific trigger, the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then the variable acceptance control is executed in which the switching control to the second state is executed at least once. Acceptance control means,
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
First control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control for establishment when the specific trigger occurs in a first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is established;
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not satisfied, it is possible to execute the variable reception control for non-establishment in which it is more difficult to receive the game ball in the ball entering portion than the variable acceptance control for establishment. Second control means,
Equipped with
In the case where the first situation is changed to the second situation, it is possible to start the first game time after the second situation is reached after a predetermined period has passed since the second situation was reached. And
When the second situation occurs during execution of the variable acceptance control for establishment, it is configured such that the variable acceptance control that is being executed can be continued even after the second situation.
The aspect of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a specific aspect in which the feasible period of the variable acceptance control is longer than the predetermined period. The mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a first mode as the specific mode and a second mode in which the executable period is shorter than the predetermined period. Gaming machine described in. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein at least one mode of the switching control is different between the variable acceptance control of the first aspect and the variable acceptance control of the second aspect. A passing portion which is provided in the game area and through which a game ball can pass,
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery process based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the passage portion,
Based on that the lottery process is performed by the lottery means, the variable display of the second pattern is started, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process is stopped and displayed as one of the second game times. Second game time control means for causing the second game time to be executed by a predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means,
Equipped with
The specific trigger is that the result of the lottery process is a predetermined result,
The second game time control means stops the stop result in a different display mode when the variable acceptance control of the first aspect is executed and when the variable acceptance control of the second aspect is executed. The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, which is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the predetermined period is a stop display period of the stop result in the final game time in the first situation. Whether the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation or the start timing of the first game time, the switching timing or the first game Grasping means to grasp before the start timing of the time,
Notification control means for causing a predetermined notification to be executed before the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time based on the grasping result of the grasping means,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising: The notification control means executes the predetermined notification when the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed over the switching timing or the start timing of the first game time, or the switching timing or the 7. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the predetermined notification is executed more easily than when the variable acceptance control for establishment is not executed across the start timing of the first game time. ..

Images